All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Iran-backed groups have stepped up attempts to kill US forces in Iraq with an intense volley of ballistic missiles fired at Al Asad airbase in western Iraq.

The attack is the largest by Iran-backed militias against US forces yet.

“It is a huge escalation, involving perhaps 15-20 missiles,” said Joel Wing, a California-based expert who has been tracking violence in Iraq for 16 years. 

“It seems like things are spiralling. There’s no way they’re firing ballistic missiles and not expecting casualties.”

Mr Wing told The National the US will almost certainly be drawn into a lethal response, if only to deter further attacks. One option for the US could be trying to kill a militia commander in a targeted strike.

A range of militias backed by Tehran operate in Iraq, most under the umbrella of the Popular Mobilisation Forces. They have stepped up their attacks on US forces in the country since the outbreak of the Israel-Gaza war and the related rise in regional tensions between Iran and its proxy groups and the US and Israel.

While the joint Iraqi-US operated Al Asad airbase has been hit with ballistic missiles before – Iran fired around 12 at the base in early 2020 – this latest attack is the largest by Iran-backed militia groups within Iraq.

Militias launched smaller salvos of one or two ballistic missiles at US forces at the end of last year but have mostly used much smaller, inaccurate rockets and small but deadly drones.

The escalation is part of the militias’ campaign to pressure the US to leave Iraq. There are about 2,500 American military trainers in the country under the International Coalition against ISIS.

Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammed Shia Al Sudani, who relies on Iran-backed militias and parties for support, has criticised militias for attacking coalition troops on Iraqi territory, but has upped his calls for US forces to leave the country as the conflict escalates.

Mr Al Sudani has also fiercely condemned US counter strikes against the militias as a “violation of sovereignty”.

Unprecedented Missile Attack

The drones used by the militias, such as the Iran-made Shahed-136, carry up to 50kg of explosives, compared to ballistic missiles – used in Saturday’s attack – that can carry several hundred kilograms, potentially levelling entire buildings.

Centcom, the US headquarters in the Middle East, said some soldiers were “undergoing evaluation for traumatic brain injuries,” after Saturday’s attack, and that one Iraqi was seriously wounded.

After Iran’s 2020 missile attack on Al Asad, as many as 100 US soldiers sheltering in bunkers suffered concussive injuries from the missile strikes, each detonating up to 500kg of explosives and sending shock waves through concrete shelters.

The US said Patriot missile interceptors shot down a number of the missiles in Sunday’s attack, which also involved rockets flying at lower altitudes, possibly in an attempt to overwhelm air defences.

Iran has supplied the PMF militias with ballistic missiles smuggled from Iran, part of an effort to transfer the weapons to Syria.

Militias Equipped with New Missiles

In November, the Islamic Resistance in Iraq, which encompasses Kataib Hezbollah and a smaller group, Harakat Hezbollah Al Nujaba, released an image of what it claimed was a new ballistic missile, the Al Aqsa.

According to Fabian Hinz, an expert on Iranian weapons, the missile was likely based on existing Iranian designs with a range of up to 250km.

Iran is also thought to have transferred Fateh 110 missiles to the militias with a range of up to 500km.

Earlier this month, Kataib Hezbollah, seen by analysts as the most influential group in the PMF, said it had already carried out ballistic missile attacks on US forces and warned attacks would expand “under the banner of the Islamic Resistance in Iraq”.

The group previously ran the Missiles Directorate within the PMF, placing it in charge of missile technology.

In November, a US AC-130J gunship killed two members of Kataib Hezbollah near Baghdad, with the US saying the group was moving ballistic missiles launchers following a previous attack.

Iran has been transferring ballistic missiles to Iraq since around 2017, with many of the weapons believed to be stored in Jurf Al Sakhar, a rural town emptied of civilians during a brutal battle with ISIS in 2014. It has been taken over by Kataib Hezbollah since.

The US bombed Kataib Hezbollah positions again in December in Jurf Al Sakhar and Anbar, after another attack that wounded American soldiers in Erbil.

The rivalry between US forces and Kataib Hezbollah is bitter and goes back to the US occupation of Iraq, when the militia killed and wounded hundreds of US soldiers. The worst Kataib Hezbollah attacks came in 2011 when the group killed 14 American troops over several weeks that summer.

At the time, it was led by former Iraqi MP Jamal Jaafar Ibrahimi, better known as Abu Mahdi Al Muhandis, who was killed in a US drone strike, alongside Iranian Gen Qassem Suleimani, in early 2020.

That attack, which followed deadly rocket strikes on US forces the previous week, led to Iran’s missile bombardment at Al Asad – underlining how quickly the US-militia conflict can escalate.

Tensions continued and one of US President Joe Biden’s first acts in office was ordering air strikes against the group in Syria, after it attacked US troops there.

Escalation Likely

Experts warned the continuing Israel-Gaza war meant that escalation between the US and Iran in Iraq was likely.

“Gaza is just total hell and Israel is not going to stop,” Mr Wing said. “Plus the aftermath is probably a long military occupation of Gaza and more resistance. The pressure for Iran to ‘do something’ is incredible and they can’t seem to hold back.”

Mark Pyrus, a historian and Iran expert, agreed.

“Iran’s strategy is multitheatre, as a response to the current Israel-Gaza campaign that includes Israeli and American operational engagement,” he said. “Expectation is a forthcoming American counterstrike.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image: A US Air Force operation to support maritime security and stability in the Middle East. Photo: US Navy

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

I don’t think its an overstatement to observe that the future of the world is hanging in the balance as 15 World Court judges at the Hague deliberate over the contending legal submissions made by the governments of Israel and South Africa. At this preliminary stage the core contention comes down to the question of whether or not it is “plausible” that the Genocide Convention is being violated in the course of the Gaza Massacre.

A rhetorical question could be asked in response to this legal question. If the lethal, horrific and many-faceted atrocities being committed in Gaza do not embody genocide, then what does?

What are the implications if the Israeli government succeeds in persuading the judges that its ruthless, high-tech obliteration of people and their life support systems in the Gaza prison camp, is something other than genocide?

The result of such a ruling would have the effect of normalizing what is going on in Gaza.

The industrial-scale killing happening there, is a classic example of several synergistic forms of genocide being imposed simultaneously. This combination of techniques to achieve the indiscriminate mass murder of a mostly unarmed civilian population, almost half of whom are children, surely qualifies as the outer extremes of genocidal assault.

Any ruling that stops short of ordering a stop to the military machinery of genocide would further discredit the already-tenuous credibility of the International Court of Justice. (ICJ)

Since its inception in 1945 the ICJ “has yet to judge any country in the world to be responsible for genocide.” See this.

The government of Israel suddenly finds itself viewed in the world as the primary perpetrator of genocide rather than its primary victim. See this.

On a deeper level, however, it is the International Court of Justice (ICJ) and the whole apparatus of international law that is facing the jaded judgment from the most attentive and conscientious branches of the global community.

Craig Murray is a former British diplomat who played a behind-the-scenes role in the process that led the government of South Africa to take on the monumental responsibility of bringing this case forward. As Murray explains, the outcome of the Israeli Genocide Case will decide the guilt or innocence of more than a country. The whole system of international criminal law is also on trial.

How did the assumptions develop on the part of the predators that they would not face legal recriminations for pressing ahead with a multitude of lethal tactics aimed at exterminating an occupied people locked in captivity. How did the predators come to an understand that they could be both the occupier and the wronged party when faced with legitimate armed resistance to their illegal occupation?

What is the role of the international judges, including at the ICJ, in creating the conditions for the development of such imperious assumptions on the part of the protagonists of genocide. The outrageous circumstances, recorded with fidelity in the “airtight” legal case put forward to the ICJ by the South African government, has created a major indictment of a country so far granted repeated impunity from legal consequences for its crimes against the native Palestinians.

As Prof. Takahashi points out, the Israeli genocide in Gaza represents an extension of of an old and well-established processes in the West’s imperial appropriation of lands and natural resources on its colonial frontiers. He writes,

“From the get-go, international legal norms were intended to apply only to so-called “civilised” – read white – peoples. Savages did not count, and the powerful Western states could – and did – do to them what they pleased. Natives certainly did not “own” land or natural resources, and colonial powers were free to steal and exploit those as they wished. Zionism was also founded on such racist attitudes – attitudes that remain at the core of Israeli policies to this day.” See this.

The South African intervention clearly states the obvious but in great detail with eloquence and overwhelming proof for the compelling legal arguments. The Israeli defence at The Hague, one characterized by outbursts of self-righteous indignation, could be interpreted as a diversionary tactic.

This diversion is being carried out by agents of a polity whose top officers have been caught literally red handed, in the midst of a monumental implementation of genocide. Any fair and objective assessment of the evidence could not help but lead to the conclusion that Israel does not have even a single solid legal leg to stand on. But let’s not be naive.

What the Israelis do have going for them is the backing of a formidable worldwide network of Zionist authority. This Zionist network has access to unimaginable wealth with tentacles in strategic nerve centres of high-level corporate governance intertwined with organized crime. Hence the choice put before the 15 judges in this case is a stark one. They can embrace the rule of law or they can protect their own personal self-interest as well as the interest of the lobbies, countries and individuals to whom they are beholden.

A verdict that allows the government of Israel to get off the hook for its genocidal actions would, some say, expose the total bankruptcy of an international system that often puts small, hugely entitled constituencies above the law. Such a verdict would help bring to light the elaborate matrix of depravity and degradation from which the genocidal crimes of Israel have emerged.

Officials in the Israeli state as well as some in the Israeli business community, the military and in many branches of civil society have long derived the correct message that they represent an order of humanity that is above the law. They are basically left free to dispossess, oppress and kill certain groups and individuals without being held answerable to any form of legal authority.

The provision of licenses to kill and steal is, of course, not unique to Israel. But the governments of Israel and its US partner make especially ample use of this feature of the international system that creates a category of people basically exempted from accountability for even serial violations of very serious laws.

Now South Africa’s legal argument is shining a spotlight on this whole phenomenon by calling the question on the blatant transgressions of the highest order of legal prohibition by the officials of Israeli state.

A telling snapshot of the broader problem to be faced, is epitomized by the road to judicial power of Joan E. Donoghue. She is the heavily politicized President of the ICJ who is chairing the current hearings. Judge Donoghue came to the ICJ as the choice of the former US Secretary of State, Hillary Clinton. In congratulating Donoghue in 2010 for her judicial appointment to the ICJ at the Hague, Clinton indicated,

“Joan Donoghue has won the confidence of senior officials in both Democratic and Republican Administrations. And as the State Department’s Acting Legal Adviser in 2009 and now as the Principal Deputy Legal Adviser, Joan has provided me with the very best legal advice on the complex and challenging issues we confront on a daily basis.” See this.

Judge Donoghue, a former US State Department official and legal adviser to Hillary Clinton when she led that department, is in a very clear conflict of interest. It is possible or maybe even likely that she regularly reports back to the US State Department whose present Secretary is Antony Blinken.

As the source of weaponry, financing, and “diplomatic cover,” the US government is quite clearly the senior partner with the Israeli government in this campaign to violently de-Palestinianize Gaza and the West Bank. Any finding that Israel is guilty of genocide or, at this stage, plausible genocide, would make the US government complicit in the same crime.

As Michel Chossudovsky sees it,

“South Africa’s initiative —which has a direct bearing on the planning of US-NATO military operations in the Middle East– will no doubt be the object of carefully designed (behind the scenes) acts of sabotage.”

He predicts, therefore, that it is very unlikely the judges will make a decent ruling on the basis of an objective assessment of the evidence. Rather the politicized judges will probably respond based on a calculated consideration of their self-interest as well as of the agencies and individuals they may seek to serve and reward.

This pessimistic view is shared by many, including Paul Larudee. He writes,

“it’s quite possible that the game is rigged, the deck stacked, and that the ruling will go against South Africa.”

Jerome Irwin widens the focus on what he thinks of as a thoroughly rigged process involving elected officials as well as rich and powerful lobbies. He believes “the likes of all the Trudeaus, Bidens, Blinkens and rest of the AIPAC’s puppets will do exactly as they’re told.”

Consider that this trial, beginning on 11 January, 2024, is the first time the government of Israel has deigned to be actually present in court room proceedings dealing with its alleged and proven criminality in its interactions with Palestinians. Like the US government, the Israeli government has come to understand it will not be compelled to follow international law or obey judicial rulings that lack enforcement mechanisms. Now an apparent break in this pattern has occurred. For the first time in the concurrent history of the UN and Israel, on Jan. 11 and 12 an Israeli delegation sat in “the dock” for the criminally accused.

The founders of Israel looked to the UN to legitimize its initial existence with the passage in the General Assembly of Resolution 181. After that Resolution, one based on a unrealized partition plan to create new Jewish and Arab states, Israelis turned on the UN. For instance in 1948 a Jewish militia, sometimes defined as a terrorist group, assassinated a UN-appointed peace mediator, Count Folke Bernadotte.

This same contemptuous attitude toward the UN was reflected in 2023 when 136 UN workers, more than any other previous conflict, were killed in the course of the IDF’s assault on Gaza.

Now the government of Israel is at least paying attention to the accusations they face. According to the Jewish Telegraphic Agency,

“Israeli officials say the charge of genocide is too much for a state born in the ashes of the Holocaust to ignore.” The JTA added, “The State of Israel will appear before the International Court of Justice at The Hague to dispel South Africa’s absurd blood libel.”

Israel as a Polity Born in the Ashes of the Holocaust 

The core of the Genocide Convention offers very precise definitions of the content of the crime as well as of the human activities related to the crime that are “punishable.” The five definitions of genocide are short, precise statements that are easy to understand.

It is obvious that four of these definitions are met by many aspects of what is clearly observable even in the daily mass media coverage of the Israeli invasion of Gaza. What is obvious in the media becomes crystal clear in South Africa’s submission. A big part of the South African intervention involves proving the depth and breadth of the Israeli intent  “to destroy, in whole or in part” the Palestinians.

Article II In the present Convention, genocide means any of the following acts committed with intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnical, racial or religious group, as such:

(a) Killing members of the group;

(b) Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group;

(c) Deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part;

(d) Imposing measures intended to prevent births within the group;

(e) Forcibly transferring children of the group to another group.

Article III The following acts shall be punishable:

(a) Genocide;

(b) Conspiracy to commit genocide;

(c) Direct and public incitement to commit genocide;

(d) Attempt to commit genocide;

(e) Complicity in genocide

Raphael Lemkin was the principle technocratic at the new United Nations who worked with national delegations to come up with the initial draft of the Genocide Convention. Prior to his work at the UN, Lemkin also invented the term “genocide” and introduced it in a book he completed in 1944. Lemkin came up with the term in the process of studying the social engineering of the of the National Socialist government of Germany after it came to power in 1933.

Raphael Lemkin was a multi-faceted scholar. He was Pole, a Jew, an international lawyer, and an expert in the Ottoman assault on the Armenians. In studying the assault on Armenians, Lemkin observed that the world’s legal systems could readily handle the crime of murder but did not have even a name to describe actions that weaken, diminish or end the viability of national groups.

Lemkin developed the concept of genocide in the course of his observation of some of the legal and administrative changes as Germany grew in power and influence. This expanded influence was felt throughout Europe and especially in Eastern Europe. In the text Lemkin pays close attention to interventions that undermined the vitality and cultural viability of certain nations deemed less deserving of support than other nations.

Although he mentions from time to time the problematic treatment of Jews, the bulk of his attention as a Polish jurist was drawn to the dilemmas being faced especially by many Slavic nations in Eastern Europe. He devoted much attention to the implications of limiting or ending agencies like national museums, national archives, national theatres, schools and language institutes.

Lemkin heaped scorn on actions that result in the “vandalization” of art forms as expressed in media like traditional music, paintings, sculpture and literature. See this.

These media of artistic expression Lemkin considered essential in the process of renewing and revitalizing heritage and culture. Lemkin was especially attentive to the role of religion and churches in the spiritual and community life of healthy nations.

It was in the process of looking at this this kind of “vandalism” and “barbarism” that Lemkin came up with his concept of genocide which he discusses in his volume, Axis Rule in Occupied Europe: Laws of Occupation, Analysis of Government, Proposals for Redress.

Lemkin left Europe in 1941 and headed eastward. He crossed the Pacific Ocean towards New York City. In his work at the United Nations his ideas involving genocide were seized upon and attached to the top priorities of the winning side in World War II. Lemkin’s emphasis on what in today’s term would be called cultural genocide, was pushed to the side. In its place definitions were developed in the process of drafting the Genocide Convention to make it harmonious with the narrative of Israel as a state “born in the ashes of the Holocaust.”

Certainly this narrative of Israel as a polity born in the ashes of the Holocaust was integral to Tal Becker’s introduction of the case for Israel’s defence put on Jan. 12, 2024, before the judges of the World Court. Becker seemed to assert some kind of proprietary claim to the Genocide Convention based on an inheritance from the event that has come to be known as The Holocaust. In my view Becker’s brief reference to the role of Raphael Lemkin did not fairly represent the Polish jurist’s role in originating, modifying and adapting the idea of genocide that formed the basis of the UN’s Genocide Convention.

Becker’s Israeliocentric interpretation of the forces that led to his appearance before the ICJ showed no empathy at all for the forces that brought the Palestinians, the South African government and the multicultural South African legal team within the framework of the adversarial litigation currently underway.

According to Becker, the Israeli government and its Jewish citizens are once again blameless victims transgressed upon with this unjustified criminal charge brought forward by ill-willed anti-Semites in league with crazed Islamic terrorists.

“Gaza Will Become a Place Where No Human Being Can Exist.” General Giora Eiland, Former Head of the Israeli National Security Council

One of the most intense and detailed facets of South Africa’s legal submission was the section explaining how, all up and down the Israeli government, the Israeli Armed Forces, and Israeli civil society, there exists a broadly shared intention to exterminate as many Palestinians as possible. The aim goes far beyond the 24/7 bombarding of the entire population of Gaza from air, sea and land.

The aim is to destroy all housing, all infrastructure, all access to food, water, education, electricity, fuel, medical care, employment, mosques, churches and more, in order to eliminate all systems for supporting human life. The aim is to depopulate Gaza as much as possible and then force the survivors to run for their lives in a grotesque saga of forced deportation.

There is in the South African submission much testimony supporting the assertion that the primary agenda right now of the Israeli state and people is to push forward an agenda of genocide on steroids. Awareness of this agenda flows from the Israeli leadership into the rank and file of the Armed forces, into the media, into the education system and into the society at large. General Giora Eiland is a representative example of a high-ranking and influential military figure in Israel seeking to deploy all means possible to bring about the mass extermination and deportation of Palestinians.

Eiland’s titles include Israeli Army Reservist Major General, former Head of the Israeli National Security Council, and adviser to the Defence Minister. He is well known in Israel for his advocacy of plans to induce lethal plagues among the Palestinians to weed out their numbers. In Haaretz, Gideon Levy explains that Eiland thinks “epidemics in Gaza are good for Israel.” He cites Eiland as follows: “After all, severe epidemics in the southern Strip will bring victory closer and reduce fatalities among IDF soldiers.” 

The authors of the South African submission have assembled numerous public citations from the vocal and prolific military officer, political adviser, and national security official. These citations appear between pages 62 to 64 of South Africa’s submission to the ICJ. From this text I draw the following excerpt:

Giora Eiland has repeatedly been given a media platform to call for Gaza to be made uninhabitable, declaring “the State of Israel has no choice but to make Gaza a place that is temporarily, or permanently, impossible to live in.”473 In an interview on 6 November 2023, he suggested that, “if there is an intention for a military action at Shifa [Hospital], which I think is inescapable, I hope that the head of the CIA got an explanation of why this is necessary, and why the US must ultimately back even an operation like this, even if there are thousands of bodies of civilians in the streets afterward.”474 Further he proposed that “Israel needs to create a humanitarian crisis in Gaza, compelling tens of thousands or even hundreds of thousands to seek refuge in Egypt or the Gulf . . . Gaza will become a place where no human being can exist.”475

Echoing the words of President Herzog, he has repeatedly underscored that there should be no distinction between Hamas combatants and Palestinian civilians, saying:“Who are the ‘poor’ women of Gaza? They are all the mothers, sisters or wives of Hamas murderers. On the one hand, they are part of the infrastructure that supports the organization, and on the other hand, if they experience a humanitarian disaster, then it can be assumed that some of the Hamas fighters and the more junior commanders will begin to understand that the war is futile . . . The international community warns us of a humanitarian disaster in Gaza and of severe epidemics. We must not shy away from this, as difficult as that may be. After all, severe epidemics in the south of the Gaza Strip will bring victory closer . . . It is precisely its civil collapse that will bring the end of the war closer. When senior Israeli figures say in the media ‘It’s either us or them’ we should clarify the question of who is ‘them’. ‘They’ are not only Hamas fighters with weapons, but also all the ‘civilian’ officials, including hospital administrators and school administrators, and also the entire Gaza population who enthusiastically supported Hamas and cheered on its atrocities on October 7th.”476

The evidence is shocking in South Africa’s submission and in the evidence in the mass media of the lethal intentions of almost the entire Israeli population towards the Palestinian population. Witnessing even at a distance the startling animosity of a large part of the entire Jewish Israeli population, helps give me an idea of what it must have been like in the Deep South of the United States in the heyday of segregation or in South Africa in the heyday of apartheid.

As witnessed by Miko Peled, the son of a famous Israeli General, the deep and pervasive animosity towards Palestinians is cultivated in the Israeli system of public education, in the Armed Forces, and throughout the media.

The presentation to the ICJ by Irish lawyer, Blinne Ní Ghrálaigh, emphasized the severity, shamefulness, and urgency of the many-faceted humanitarian crisis in Gaza. Ní Ghrálaigh explained in no uncertain terms the widespread guilt and responsibility of those in authority who could have done something to preempt this genocidal nightmare.

The Gaza debacle ultimately should shame all of humanity.

Ní Ghrálaigh’s intention was to emphasize for the court the imperative of taking quick action by issuing an immediate order. The essence of such an order would state that the government of Israel must cease and desist pushing forward its many-faceted genocidal incursions.

Of course getting Israel to respect such an order forms a obstacle yet to be bridged. The difficulty in enforcing a court order, however, should not be allowed to provide the judges with an excuse not to do their part to meet this humanitarian and existential crisis that has gone way too far already.

The ruthlessness of this genocide is much more than plausible for those who choose to consider the available evidence and those equipped with hearts that can feel the necessity of stopping the perverse kill fest presently taking place, hour by hour, right before our eyes. See this.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on the author’s Substack, Looking out at the World from Canada.

Dr. Anthony Hall is currently Professor of Globalization Studies at the University of Lethbridge in Alberta Canada. He has been a teacher in the Canadian university system since 1982. Dr. Hall, has recently finished a big two-volume publishing project at McGill-Queen’s University Press entitled “The Bowl with One Spoon”.

He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 

Featured image is from the author

The Fix Is In – Trump Goes to Prison

January 22nd, 2024 by Martin Armstrong

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Let me explain something very important. According to Business Insider, George Soros’s son has come out and said that Trump would not go away unless he is in prison. The FIX IS IN and Trump will be imprisoned in the Washington, DC case. That is the plan.

The objective in Colorado is to kick Trump off the ballot.

This is a war for the very soul of the United States. I have had to look at these forecasts projected by the computer, and it is certainly not my aspiration in life. People keep telling me it is my destiny to bring independent forecasting upfront. Perhaps so. But I do not relish laying out these forecasts, for I wish I could prevent the outcome, but I cannot. No protest can be mustered to prevent this. We have to crash and burn. Only then will the blind finally see, and those who have understood these forecasts will get to perhaps spread the word.

Atty General calls for Speedy Trial

They have done everything they possibly can to stop Trump, for they KNOW he will do his best to prevent their agenda.

Yet, unfortunately, the computer has warned that neither side will accept the 2024 election.

They are outright pushing to put Trump in prison.

The Attorney General has now come out pushing for a speedy trial in DC because they think throwing Trump in prison will be the only thing that will stop him.

 

My deep concern is that we are approaching the 19th cycle of 8.6 from the American Civil War. This only adds to the rising tensions, which will escalate into 2026. These people are so desperate to impose their totalitarian state that they refuse to back off. If they cannot imprison Trump, they will assassinate him. We are approaching the last 8.6 years in this 51.6-year cycle, and they will be the darkest days of our lives.

My concern is if the Supreme Court yields to this conspiracy to imprison Trump, it could be like the Dread Scott decision, where they tried to reduce the tension by claiming blacks could not be citizens of the United States and that they were, in fact, property.

They thought they were cutting the baby in half to prevent a civil war. But that decision led the people to vote for Abraham Lincoln, who, by the way, was also taken off the ballot in several states. If they buy this argument that Trump was acting as a candidate and NOT as President, then they probably will think that putting him in prison will lower the tensions. That will not end well for them or the nation.

World War III is already in motion.

There will be no state of peace, and Zelensky was put in that position to facilitate this war. I warned when he took office that this would be the guy who started World War III. Zelensky is nothing like what you think. In the EU, another crisis is brewing. The EU has extended permission for Ukrainian refugees to live in the EU. The Council agreed to extend the temporary protection for people fleeing Russia’s war of aggression against Ukraine from March 4th, 2024, to March 4th, 2025.

However, Zelensky’s general mobilization and a state of war has been in effect in Ukraine since Feb. 24th, 2022, with all men aged 18 to 60 considered eligible for military service and subject to conscription. Men are prohibited from leaving Ukraine, and now the EU is recording the refugees, thereby documenting those who are avoiding Zelensky’s draft. It has been said that documents exist showing Zelensky himself refused to show up for the draft before he was president several times.

During a state of war, travel abroad for men in Ukraine is restricted. All military-eligible individuals are forbidden to leave Ukraine, except in cases specified by Cabinet Resolution No. 57. Some military-eligible individuals, lacking the right to leave, have illegally crossed borders and sought asylum in the EU, the United States, or Asian countries. Ukraine lacks a system for holding such individuals to account, but that is rumored to be in the works. Zelensky wants all men returned to die on the battlefield. At this time, Russian soldiers outnumber Ukrainians 4 to 1.

Trump would indeed end the war in 24 hrs.

Cut off all funds for the Ukrainian government employees whom Biden is paying their salaries and pensions.

Insist that Zelensky honors the Minsk Agreement and the war is over.

Those in power right now want war, and they have no intention of ending anything.

2024 Presidential Election by Popular Vote

Here are the computer projections for the 2024 election. Trump should win, as you can see on 4 out of 6 models. But Models #3 and #4 are shocking. These show such a landslide with 61% to 35% and 59% to 37% projections that this scares the hell out of the globalists.

The prospect that the next presidential election in 2028 will NOT EVEN TAKE PLACE is a very high probability, according to our computer.

I am NOT putting this out here as some Trump supporter.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from Gage Skidmore via Flickr

Psoriasis After COVID-19 mRNA Vaccination

January 22nd, 2024 by Dr. William Makis

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Weight Loss Influencer Mila De Jesus Dead at 35 – The Brazilian mom of 4 rose to fame online after undergoing bariatric surgery in October 2017.

  • De Jesus’ cause of death has “not yet been revealed”. The content creator leaves behind four children and her husband George Kowszik, whom she married in September 2023.
  • De Jesus — who was born in Brazil and lived in Boston, Massachusetts — rose to fame online after undergoing bariatric surgery in October 2017 and sharing her weight loss journey with her 59,000 Instagram followers. 
  • Her last health update came in November 2023, posting a before and after photo of her progress.
  • “13 years between one picture… 6 years since a decision that changed my life in so many ways,” she wrote at the time. “On one side Mila age 22 and on the other Mila age 35. How much we change huh, how we grow and how we learn. Pride girl pride 😌💜 #beforeandafter
  • De Jesus was also known for her popular makeup tutorials for her 103,000 YouTube subscribers. 

Weight loss influencer Mila De Jesus dies at 35

New York Post:

  • The Instagram star, who was born in Brazil but lived in Boston, passed away Friday, four months after tying the knot with her husband, George Kowszik, Jam Press reported.
  • She leaves behind four children from a previous marriage.
  • Just months prior, the content creator announced that she’d been suffering from psoriasis — a skin disease that causes a rash with itchy, scaly patches — since July.
  • “It’s been three months dealing with this situation, 80% of my body is affected,” De Jesus wrote in an October Instagram post to her nearly 60,000 followers.“Juggling doctors, medications, ointments, and taking a deep breath.”
  • The influencer’s followers, friends and family members were devastated over her loss.

De Jesus.

*

Psoriasis After COVID-19 mRNA Vaccination – Cases Published in Peer-reviewed Journals 

2022 Oct (Tachibana et al) – Japan – Pfizer Two cases of generalized pustular psoriasis after Pfizer COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine. (a-d) Case 1: 60 year old woman 8 days after 2nd mRNA; (e-h) Case 2: 18 year old woman 7 days after 1st mRNA.

Image

2022 Apr – (Frioui et al) – A case of new‐onset acute generalized pustular psoriasis following Pfizer‐BioNTech COVID‐19 vaccine.

  • A 20‐year‐old man presented to the emergency department with a 3‐week history of an acute, rapidly progressive erythematous rash associated with fever, and poor general condition. The patient had a history of mild plaque psoriasis adequately controlled with topical betamethasone.
  • The first dose of mRNA‐CV was given 4 days before the onset of the rash

2022 Mar – (Rouai et al) – Pustular rash triggered by Pfizer-BioNTech COVID-19 vaccination: A case report

 

 

2022 Mar – (Tran et al) – Generalized erythrodermic psoriasis triggered by vaccination against severe acute respiratory syndrome Coronavirus 2.

  • Two people had 1st dose Moderna and 2nd dose Pfizer, then developed “Generalized eruthrodermic psoriasis” – a rare and potentially life threatening variant of psoriasis.

 

Image

 

2022 Feb – (Nia et al) – Erythrodermic psoriasis eruption associated with SARS-CoV-2 vaccination.

  • 58-year-old male presented to the hospital for 6 days of generalized rash covering his body with partial sparing of the medial thighs and feet.
  • It started a day after he received the Pfizer COVID-19 mRNA vaccine

 

2021 Dec (Huang et al) – Exacerbation of Psoriasis Following COVID-19 Vaccination: Report From a Single Center.

  • 68 yo man had psoriasis exacerbation 14 days after Moderna mRNA vaccine.

 

 

2021 Aug (Bostan et al) – Exacerbation of plaque psoriasis after inactivated and BNT162b2 mRNA COVID‐19 vaccines: A report of two cases.

  • Case 1: 51 yo man diagnosed with psoriasis 1 year ago, had 1st Pfizer mRNA jab and his lesions started to enlarge and then accelerated 2 weeks after 2nd dose.
  • Case 2: 52 yo man had Coronavac (inactivated SARS-CoV-2 vaccine, China), 1 month after 2nd dose presented with skin rash on buttocks.

 

 

2021 Aug (Sotiriou et al) – Psoriasis exacerbation after COVID‐19 vaccination: a report of 14 cases from a single centre

  • 14 Greek patients presented to a single ER from Jan.1, 2021 to May 10, 2021 after taking COVID-19 vaccines and were diagnosed with Psoriasis.
  • 5 had Pfizer, 7 had AstraZeneca, 1 had Moderna

 

 

2022 Sep (Wu et al) – New Onset and Exacerbations of Psoriasis Following COVID-19 Vaccines: A Systematic Review.

A systematic literature search was conducted

7 studies reporting new-onset psoriasis, 32 studies reporting psoriasis flares, and 4 studies reporting both

mRNA vaccines, produced by Moderna and BioNTech/Pfizer, were frequently associated with psoriasis episodes.

First, second, and third vaccine doses were associated with psoriasis incidents, with the second dose most frequently associated with psoriasis flares.

Delayed onset was observed, ranging from 2 to 21 days in the new-onset group and from 1 to 90 days in the flare group

My Take…

COVID-19 mRNA Vaccines can cause a wide variety of autoimmune diseases and the sudden development of any autoimmune disease in an mRNA Vaccinated person should implicate the vaccine.

The tragic case of Brazilian Influencer Mila De Jesus is important because it shows that a sudden onset of an autoimmune disease in a COVID-19 Vaccinated person is a very bad sign – it signals other kinds of internal damage as well.

In her case, she had a sudden cardiac arrest, most likely from cardiac damage in addition to her new onset psoriasis which she was diagnosed with a few months prior to her death, and went on to involve 80% of her body.

UPDATE: WHO VigiAccess database shows 4955 reports of Psoriasis after COVID-19 vaccination as of Jan. 22, 2024.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. William Makis is a Canadian physician with expertise in Radiology, Oncology and Immunology. Governor General’s Medal, University of Toronto Scholar. Author of 100+ peer-reviewed medical publications.


The Worldwide Corona Crisis, Global Coup d’Etat Against Humanity

by Michel Chossudovsky

Michel Chossudovsky reviews in detail how this insidious project “destroys people’s lives”. He provides a comprehensive analysis of everything you need to know about the “pandemic” — from the medical dimensions to the economic and social repercussions, political underpinnings, and mental and psychological impacts.

“My objective as an author is to inform people worldwide and refute the official narrative which has been used as a justification to destabilize the economic and social fabric of entire countries, followed by the imposition of the “deadly” COVID-19 “vaccine”. This crisis affects humanity in its entirety: almost 8 billion people. We stand in solidarity with our fellow human beings and our children worldwide. Truth is a powerful instrument.”

Reviews

This is an in-depth resource of great interest if it is the wider perspective you are motivated to understand a little better, the author is very knowledgeable about geopolitics and this comes out in the way Covid is contextualized. —Dr. Mike Yeadon

In this war against humanity in which we find ourselves, in this singular, irregular and massive assault against liberty and the goodness of people, Chossudovsky’s book is a rock upon which to sustain our fight. –Dr. Emanuel Garcia

In fifteen concise science-based chapters, Michel traces the false covid pandemic, explaining how a PCR test, producing up to 97% proven false positives, combined with a relentless 24/7 fear campaign, was able to create a worldwide panic-laden “plandemic”; that this plandemic would never have been possible without the infamous DNA-modifying Polymerase Chain Reaction test – which to this day is being pushed on a majority of innocent people who have no clue. His conclusions are evidenced by renown scientists. —Peter Koenig 

Professor Chossudovsky exposes the truth that “there is no causal relationship between the virus and economic variables.” In other words, it was not COVID-19 but, rather, the deliberate implementation of the illogical, scientifically baseless lockdowns that caused the shutdown of the global economy. –David Skripac

A reading of  Chossudovsky’s book provides a comprehensive lesson in how there is a global coup d’état under way called “The Great Reset” that if not resisted and defeated by freedom loving people everywhere will result in a dystopian future not yet imagined. Pass on this free gift from Professor Chossudovsky before it’s too late.  You will not find so much valuable information and analysis in one place. –Edward Curtin

ISBN: 978-0-9879389-3-0,  Year: 2022,  PDF Ebook,  Pages: 164, 15 Chapters

Price: $11.50 FREE COPY! Click here (docsend) and download.

We encourage you to support the eBook project by making a donation through Global Research’s DonorBox “Worldwide Corona Crisis” Campaign Page

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

World Health Organization (WHO) Director-General and Big Pharma Shill Tedros Ghebreyesus has called on countries to sign on to WHO’s pandemic treaty so the world can prepare for “Disease X.” 

Ghebreyesus, speaking in front of an audience at the World Economic Forum in Davos last Wednesday, said that he hoped countries would reach a pandemic agreement by May to address this “common enemy.”

Scientists on Big Pharma and WHO’s payroll say the unknown and hypothetical virus “could be 20 times deadlier than COVID-19.” See this. 

WHO is a political and propaganda organization, not a health organization.  

Notice that WHO is predicting in advance of its appearance a new 20 times more deadly virus. So WHO is claiming a crystal ball that reveals the future. Why does it only reveal future viruses?

Notice that WHO knows in advance that the unknown and hypothetical virus is very deadly.

Notice that none of these things can possibly be known before they happen.

There is an effort long underway to take all control over health decisions out of the hands of doctors and patients.  The WHO “treaty” is likely designed by Bill Gates, Fauci, and Big Pharma.  It is an instrument of tyranny.  It will be used to prevent effective treatment against whatever pathogen is next released.

Notice that WHO’s prediction is an indication that another released virus will soon be on its way to us.

Notice that these predictions are coming from the Bill Gates/WEF crowd that is intent on reducing the world population by 7.5 billion lives, effectively a genocide of the human race.

Notice that the politicians and media are doing nothing to alert the public and that the organized attempt to destroy your control over your health is meeting faint resistance.

WHO knows that the Covid “pandemic” was an orchestration in which covid tests known to produce false results were intentionally used to create the image of pandemic.

WHO knows that most deaths were not from Covid but from the withholding of effective treatment and the imposition of a treatment protocol known to maximize the death rate.

WHO knows that the “vaccine” has killed and maimed far more people than the virus itself.

Notice that this means that WHO knows it is again deceiving and lying to the public.

Notice that “our representatives” in Congress are doing nothing to protect us.

Notice that the corrupt medical establishment goes along with it even though most of them will also be victims.

Notice that censorship is tightening and that it will be harder the next time to get correct information to the public.

Notice that Bill Gates and Tedros Ghebreyesus are still treated as honorable men.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Paul Craig Roberts is a renowned author and academic, chairman of The Institute for Political Economy where this article was originally published. Dr. Roberts was previously associate editor and columnist for The Wall Street Journal. He was Assistant Secretary of the Treasury for Economic Policy during the Reagan Administration. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Se Acerca Siempre Más La Derrota de Vladimir Zelenski

January 22nd, 2024 by Alessandro Pagani

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

My aunty, forced to leave her home under Israeli orders two months ago, sits on a thin mattress, on the sand, in a blue tent, cradling her youngest grandchild in her arms.

Like thousands of children in Gaza, he’s not well. It must be the contaminated water they drink. I think of her journey from her beautiful home in Tuffah neighbourhood to this tent that houses 16 of her family members.

For months, she escaped the bombs, running from shelter to shelter, praying not to lose anyone she loves, but losing many just the same.

Did anyone tell her that her 10-year-old grandchild’s corpse was left to decompose for five days after an Israeli tank fired into her daughter’s home? Did she know her daughter sat with a gushing wound on her head, holding the corpse of her dead son while her two other children and husband were left bleeding, inhaling the stench of death, for five days while Israel blocked any ambulance from reaching them?

These are the stories that haunt us.

Many will say this is the second Palestinian Nakba, and it is for the majority of Palestinians in Gaza who were driven from their homes and lands in 1948.

But for my family, and for nearly 30 percent of Gaza’s population, this is our first experience of Nakba. This is the first time our connection to the city that has held our lives, our stories, and our history, for thousands of years, has been disrupted.

The house my aunty was driven out of belongs to my great-grandfather and was first built during the Ottoman empire, more than 100 years ago. Our neighbourhood, Tuffah, and its adjacent Mohatta Street, where the old railway station used to be, are much older than Israel and all its wars.

Happy Memories

I push away these thoughts. I search for a happy memory. Gaza in July of 2023.

Noise. Heat. Colours. Flashing lights. Cars. Music. Smoke. Food. Laughter. My husband and I climbing the stairs of the Lighthouse restaurant, along Gaza beach. Our son, Nahed, eager to introduce us to his UNRWA colleagues, Hani a Palestinian-American colleague from UNRWA USA, content creators Motaz and Amjad, and Joe, a young Gaza tour guide and influencer.

Motaz asks if he can come over to our apartment to shoot the sunset. “What kind of photos do you take?” “Only beautiful ones,” he smiles. “I want the world to see Gaza’s beauty.”

Joe agrees. The young man tells us that he too only posts beautiful videos of Gaza.

“It is one of the most beautiful cities in the world!” he boasts, with young, unbridled enthusiasm.

I strike a deal with both young men. Motaz can take as many photos from our apartment as he likes if he shares with us his beautiful collection. He promises he’ll take special photos just for us to keep.

Joe offers to take us on a tour of the old city.

My husband and my son discuss with Hani plans for a seaside concert. As well as his work for UNRWA USA, Nahed is also a composer, and he has enlisted the Gaza branch of the Edward Said National Conservatory of Music, and Gaza’s popular SolBand, to participate in a live music concert and fundraiser.

Amjad and I sip on our cold mint lemonade and drift into a conversation about life in Gaza, especially for progressive women.

“Yes there are challenges,” she says. “But despite the wars and the siege, this is our home. I don’t think I would ever want to leave.”

Nahed’s “Gaza to the World” concert runs smoothly. We are so impressed by the musical talent and training of Gaza musicians, which rivals that of any other city in the world.

‘My generation needs hope’

Joe takes us on his special tour of the old city. We visit the Church of Saint Porphyrius, the Great Mosque of Gaza, eat in the old bazaar, browse the antique shops in the old al-Zawya market, visit the ancient Samara baths, and end with cardamon coffee and namoura dessert in a restored heritage home, where we learn how our ancestors stored their food and kept their homes cool in the summer and warm in the winter.

Joe tells us that he gets a lot of support online, but that sometimes people scold him for only showing Gaza’s beautiful side.

“They say ‘there is hunger in Gaza. There is poverty, siege, and frustration. We are prisoners here, and yet you take videos that show none of that. Only beautiful sunsets?’” Joe tells me.

He defends himself. “Enough people are shining the spotlight on the ugly. I choose to show the beautiful,” he says. “My generation needs hope. We need hope for a life that is worth living for.”

It all passed like a dream.

Our families have lost their homes. All the cafes were destroyed. Gaza City, the old and the new parts, is scorched earth. Many in our families were massacred. UNWRA is reeling; 142 UN workers have been killed, no one is spared.

Doctors, journalists, medics, entire families… the bombs don’t discriminate.

Hani’s father, brother and two nephews, one of them only 13 years old, appeared in photos online. Hani’s brother was among the men stripped to their underwear, hands tied behind their backs, detained by the Israeli army.

They had been taken from the UN school where they were sheltering, and portrayed in Israeli media as Hamas terrorists, before being released for having no connection at all to Hamas.

‘There is nothing left here’

There is so much talk about defeating Hamas and deradicalising Palestinians. Yet every war Israel undertakes bolsters Hamas. Because in every war, it is the people who suffer, their history, their culture, their art, their music, and their heritage.

Wiping out Gaza only makes Palestinians hate Israel more. The easier and more effective way to weaken Hamas would have been to give Palestinians hope in a future free of occupation and tyranny.

Motaz, Amjad and Joe were forced with their families into the far south, as spaces, and hope, continue to shrink beneath their feet. Amjad is looking for a way to leave Gaza. So is Joe, who sent me a heartbreaking message.

“There is nothing left here,” he said. “There can be no life here. They destroyed everything.”

Motaz, who has become one of the most important voices from Gaza, with more than 18 million followers on Instagram, only manages to send a few love hearts as a response to my inquiries about his wellbeing.

“This camera will only capture things that can inspire beauty and love,” he had said to me in our apartment in Gaza City on that July day in 2023. Now I wonder how many dead babies and bloated corpses his camera has captured.

My phone pings. I receive a new video of my aunt walking through the tents in Rafah muttering prayers. Her son’s voice asks: “Who are you praying for?”

She points at the tents: “These poor people who live in these tents. I don’t know how they do it. May God give them strength.”

Her son asks: “Did you forget? You are one of these people now.”

She gives a wholehearted laugh. Her face, darkened by the sun, and coated with a layer of dust, momentarily flashes features of a time long passed.

“Oh yeah,” she giggles. “I forgot. I am one of them.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr Samah Sabawi is an award-winning playwright, author and poet. 

Featured image: Palestinian rescue services remove the bodies of members of the Shaaban family, all six of whom were killed in an Israeli airstrike on the Sheikh Radwan neighborhood, western Gaza, October 9, 2023. (Mohammed Zaanoun)

War on Yemen? Don’t Expect a Cakewalk

January 22nd, 2024 by Mike Whitney

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

On Wednesday, the Biden administration labeled the Houthis a “Specially Designated Global Terrorist group,” opening the door to the imposition of sweeping sanctions.

Aid groups immediately responded with warnings that the designation threatens to greatly intensify Yemen’s humanitarian crisis. As a result of the almost decade-long war the Saudi regime has waged on Yemen with US arms and logistical support, more than half of the country’s population—over 18 million people—need food and other assistance…— US Imperialism Setting Middle East Ablaze, World Socialist Web Site

The Biden administration is in the process of reimposing the 7 year-long embargo on Yemen that cut off food, water and essential medical supplies to the civilian population. This is how Washington weaponizes the “terrorist” designation in order to use famine as an instrument of foreign policy. The clear intention is to starve the population into submission so the US can advance its geopolitical agenda in the region. In this case, Washington’s strategic objectives remain largely concealed from the general public, so we will list them here:

The United States has three main goals in Yemen:

  1. To eliminate an ally of Iran. (The Houthis)
  2. To control critical shipping lanes in the Red Sea.
  3. To construct an oil pipeline across Yemen in the event that the US launches a war on Iran and shipping in the Strait of Hormuz is disrupted. Now that Israel is moving ahead with its ethnic cleansing operation, we can add a forth objective to the list:
  4. To militarily engage any army or militia in the region that tries to derail Tel Aviv’s territorial ambitions.

Keep in mind, the current war is not merely an expansion of Israeli territory, but an attempt to establish Israel as the regional hegemon. Israel aspires to be the dominant power in the Middle East unopposed by its current set of rivals. The Biden administration is assisting in that project mainly because US interests coincide with Israel’s long-term plans. Check out this excerpt from an article at the World Socialist Web Site:

The genocide in Gaza is an integral part of US imperialism’s strategy of global war in pursuit of world hegemony. It is one front in an emerging world war, along with Washington’s proxy war against Russia in Ukraine, its escalating war throughout the Middle East, whose central target is Iran, and its war preparations against China. Bernie Sanders backs US attack on Yemen, World Socialist Web Site

In short, US global ambitions segue perfectly with Israel’s regional strategy. Neither country believes it can achieve its broader aims through peaceful means due in part to the lack of critical resources and flagging economic output. So military aggression is the only path forward. The primary targets in the impending conflict are Iran, Russia and China. Here’s more from the World Socialist Web Site:

These actions are preparatory to a head-on clash with Iran that could come at any time. Not only has the Pentagon planned for such war for decades, but, from the standpoint of US imperialism, its strategic aims have never been more vital than today, when the US is in a de facto war with Russia and plotting for war with China. Its goal in targeting Iran is to secure unbridled dominance over the world’s principal oil-exporting region, a region uniquely positioned to project geopolitical power across Eurasia, Africa and the entire Indian Ocean region…

The reality is that these are different arenas in a rapidly developing global conflict, as US imperialism desperately seeks to offset the decline in its relative economic power and establish global hegemony though war, plunder and the revival of colonial subjugation.

…the dynamic across the Middle East is one of rapid escalation toward a regional conflagration led by Washington, its imperialist allies and their principal regional client, Israel. US imperialism setting Middle East ablaze, World Socialist Web Site

Yemen is a small but crucial part of the overall strategy. The billionaire elites who use political agents to implement policy, are determined to eradicate the threat to commercial shipping in the Red Sea posed by the Houthis. This is the underlying motive behind Washington’s drive to war. Not surprisingly, it was also the proximate cause for the Saudi-led intervention although the media diverted attention to the less-consequential political power struggle.

The truth is, Washington’s current war on Yemen is merely a continuation of the Saudi-Houthi conflict. In 2015, the Saudis spearheaded a coalition of 9 Arab countries (backed by the United States) that conducted massive airstrikes on the country while imposing a naval blockade that resulted in the deaths of hundreds of thousands of Yemenis. The ostensible goal of the intervention, was to prop up Washington’s preferred political leader, Abdrabbuh Mansur Hadi. Had the Saudis prevailed in the conflict, the US would have achieved its main strategic objectives without having to involve itself in the actual fighting. But the Saudis did not win which is why there has been a lull in the action while US foreign policy elites concocted another plan for eliminating the Houthis and delivering the strategically located Yemen into the trusted hands of a US-backed puppet. (Sound familiar?) The recent outbreak of hostilities between the US and the Houthis over the Houthis blockade of commercial ships linked to Israel, has provided the US with an opportunity to lock-horns with the Arab militia and use its firepower advantage to rout the enemy and achieve what Washington’s proxies (The Saudis) could not achieve.

While the present war between the US and Yemen is still in its early stages, (Note: The US has conducted 5 major airstrikes on Houthis positions on the mainland while the Houthis have attacked 4 commercial ships in the last 5 days.) US chances of winning are not that encouraging. The Houthis are a well-organized, highly-motivated, battle-hardened killing machine that’s familiar with the terrain and has good grasp of how the US likes to conduct its wars. If the United States couldn’t beat the Taliban, they shouldn’t count on beating the Houthis.

Then, of course, there is the question of ‘how well-equipped’ the Houthis are. Take a look:

Over just a few years, Houthi rebels in Yemen have amassed a remarkably diverse array of anti-ship weaponry, incorporating both cruise and ballistic missiles, which they have recently used to threaten shipping in the Red Sea…

In parades in 2022 and 2023, the Houthis unveiled additional ASCMs, including what appeared to be two anti-ship versions of the Iranian Quds/351 LACM. One version is allegedly equipped with a radar-homing seeker (Sayyad), and the other has an electro-optical/infrared seeker (Quds Z-0).
..
…they possess other ISR assets, including UAVs, (drones) nominally civilian vessels used for scouting, open-source information on maritime traffic and data gathered by the Behshad, an Iranian cargo vessel anchored in the Red Sea reported to serve as an Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corps forward-operating and reconnaissance base. It also seems likely that Iran has equipped the group with coastal radar systems.

The extensive Houthi arsenal raises questions about Iran’s broader strategy in the region. … That suggests a strong, long-term Iranian focus on strengthening Houthi anti-ship capabilities and a potential attempt to export Iran’s model of naval coercion from the Persian Gulf and the Strait of Hormuz to the geopolitically important Red Sea and Bab el-Mandeb Strait. Houthi anti-ship missile systems: getting better all the time, IISS

What does this excerpt tell us?

It tells us that the Houthis are a well-armed military force that has equipped itself with the particular weapons it needs for warfare on the Red Sea. It tells us that the Houthis knew there would eventually be a war with the United States for which they would have to be well prepared. It tells us that the US is probably going to suffer significant losses in the conflict ahead and that the fighting will drag on for a number of years disrupting transit on the Red Sea, inflicting massive damage to global supply-lines, and further strengthening anti-American coalitions. All of this could have avoided had the Biden administration chosen to pressure Israel into ending its siege of Gaza and allowing humanitarian aid to reach the Palestinian people. But they chose not to do so.

It’s worth mentioning, that Houthi spokesmen have repeatedly stated that they will only attack US, UK and Israel-linked ships on the Red Sea. All other ships will be permitted to sail the waterway freely without any threat to their safety. The media has tried to mislead the public on this matter by insisting that the attacks are random and indiscriminate, but that is not the case. Here’s a recap from Iran’s Press TV:

Yemen’s Ansarullah resistance movement has promised a “safe passage” for international ships sailing in the Red Sea as the country’s armed forces ramp up their retaliatory attacks on Israeli-owned and -bound vessels in support of Palestinians in the besieged Gaza Strip.

Mohammad al-Bakhiti, a member of Ansarullah’s politburo, made the statement in an interview published by the Russian daily Izvestia on Friday and said the Red Sea was safe so long as ships transiting the strategic waterway were not linked to Israel.

“As far as ships from all other countries, including Russia and China, are concerned, their navigation in the region is not under any threat whatsoever… Moreover, we are ready to ensure the safe passage of their ships in the Red Sea, because free navigation plays a significant role for our country,” he added.

Stressing that attacks on vessels “in any way connected with Israel” will continue, Bakhiti said, “Ansarullah does not pursue the goal of capturing or sinking this or that sea vessel. Our goal is to raise the economic costs” for the Israeli regime “in order to stop the carnage in Gaza.” (Press TV)

It’s a sad day when Iranian state media can be trusted more than any of the hundreds of western news agencies, but that is the state of western media today.

By the way, over 50 humanitarian organizations have joined together (virtually overnight) to voice their opposition to Biden’s labeling of the Houthis as a Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT). Here’s a brief excerpt from their statement:

While the Houthis share much blame, alongside the Saudi/UAE-led coalition, for horrific human rights violations in Yemen, the designations do nothing to address these concerns. They will, however, prevent the delivery of critical humanitarian assistance to millions of innocent people, greatly hurt the prospects for a negotiated settlement to the conflict, and further undermine U.S. national security interests in the region. Our coalition joins a chorus of growing opposition to the designation, including a bipartisan group of members of Congress, multiple humanitarian organizations operating on the ground in Yemen, and former career diplomats who have served both Republican and Democratic presidents.

Rather than being a catalyst for peace, these designations are a recipe for more conflict and famine, while unnecessarily further undermining U.S. diplomatic credibility.”50 Group Coalition Calls on Biden to Reverse Houthi Terrorist Designation, FCNL

The reason we’ve reprinted the statement here, is because the administration and media have been insisting that the “terrorist” moniker will not lead to mass starvation when, in fact, that’s precisely what it’s designed to do. Biden’s policy is intended to starve Yemen into submission. We need to be clear about how the policy works. The administration plans to kill people in the most agonizing way imaginable to assert control over a scrap of land that is 8,000 miles away from the United States.

We should also be clear as to why the Saudis finally lifted the eight-year-old restrictions on imports headed for Yemen in April 2023. It wasn’t because the Saudis were suddenly struck by pangs of remorse. No. It was because the resourceful Houthis started bombing oil fields and critical infrastructure in Saudi Arabia. That’s what forced the reprobate Saudis back to the bargaining table. Here’s the story from Aljazeera:

Yemen’s Houthis rebels have acknowledged a series of attacks on Saudi Arabia after state media in the kingdom reported rocket and drone strikes targeting an oil depot in Jeddah and other facilities in Riyadh.

A huge plume of black smoke was seen rising from the plant in Jeddah, as the city prepared to host a Formula One race on Sunday. Houthi military spokesperson Yahya Sarea said the group attacked Aramco’s facilities with missiles and the Ras Tanura and Rabigh refineries with drones. Sarea added that the attack also targeted vital facilities in the Saudi capital Riyadh.

The attacks targeted “Aramco facilities in Jeddah and vital facilities in the capital of the Saudi enemy, Riyadh”… Facilities of oil giant Aramco were also attacked in Jizan, Najran, Ras Tanura and Rabigh with “a large number of drones”, he added. (Aljazeera)

These attacks took place in March 2022. It wasn’t long after that the Saudis came to their senses and began to seek a negotiated settlement. (Funny how that works.) We fully expect that the current conflagration will produce the same result. As Washington’s war on Yemen gains pace, the Houthis will undoubtedly target Saudi Arabia’s state-run oil facilities sending global shares tumbling while oil prices go through the roof. We think this scenario could prompt emergency diplomacy that could end the hostilities before matters really get out of hand. (That is our hope, at least.) Unfortunately, we have no crystal ball so we’ll have to see how things play out. Check out this brief clip from Trita Parsi of the Quincy Institute who mulls-over an entirely different scenario that no one in the administration has even considered. Here’s what he said:

There is a simple reason why U.S. and U.K. military strikes against Yemen’s Houthis will not achieve their objective of re-opening the crucial Red Sea lanes for international shipping: The Houthis don’t have to succeed in striking additional commercial vessels, or even successfully retaliate against U.S. military ships. All they need to do is to try. That is enough to sustain a de facto shipping blockade of the Red Sea, through which a staggering 12% of global trade flows. Many Western commercial vessels will simply not risk moving their ships through those waters, not in spite of President Joe Biden’s military strikes, but now because of them. How Biden Can Stop Houthi Missile Attacks—Without Risking War, Time

Bingo. The Houthis don’t have to defeat the US in order to win the war. They just have to outlast the US by continuing to threaten commercial transport on the Red Sea. That’s all they need to do. And, with their prodigious stockpile of ballistic missiles and attack drones, they should be able to sustain that effort for years to come, perhaps, forever. Has anyone on the Biden team even thought about that?

We’re convinced that the Biden administration is barking up the wrong tree. There is no military solution to the Houthis blockade on the Red Sea. The US has already launched 5 massive aerial strikes on Yemen blasting more than 70 sites, without any indication that the Houthis offensive capability has been even slightly degraded. For all practical purposes, the current strategy is a complete bust, no material benefit whatsoever.

At the same time, the Houthis have launched their own missile attacks on passing commercial ships 4 out of the last 5 days. The success of these attacks cannot be measured in terms of how many ships were sunk (which is not the goal) but in terms of how many carriers are presently avoiding the world’s most important transit corridor. That number continues to grow by the day which means that –by any concievable metric– the US is losing the war. Which means that Biden is going to up the ante.

But how will escalation change the eventual outcome? Will the deploying of US Special Forces or ground troops to the Arabian peninsula ensure an American victory or should we expect another 20-year Afghanistan-type quagmire? And is the administration really prepared for the inevitable economic slump and stock market turmoil when the sh** hits the fan and the Saudi oil fields are consumed by flames while the shelling of US bases in Iraq and Syria intensifies to a thundering crescendo? Shouldn’t they at least give that a passing thought? Here’s one last excerpt from the World Socialist Web Site:

The launching of military strikes against Yemen marks a new stage in the deepening imperialist military offensive throughout the Middle East and beyond. The US and its imperialist allies are waging a de facto war against Iran, working to eliminate Iran’s military allies throughout the Middle East. The strikes against Yemen are directed at encircling Iran and provoking it into retaliation against US forces, which could be used to justify a full-scale war against Tehran….

Overriding all of this, the United States is involved in a struggle to fend off the challenge posed by China to its global hegemony, which threatens to trigger a shooting war in the Pacific. In the US media and political circles, there is growing talk of a new “axis of evil” involving Iran, China and Russia.

Each one of these conflicts cannot be understood in isolation. The bombing of Yemen is part of a global counter-revolution, in which the imperialist powers are seeking to reestablish direct control over their former colonies…

Every war launched by the US and its imperialist allies has ended in one bloody debacle after the other, with millions of people killed. But each disaster only reinforces the determination of US imperialism to use war as a means to secure its global hegemony.

The US/UK attack on Yemen and the global eruption of imperialist war, World Socialist Web Site

The table is set for a major conflagration in Yemen that will quickly escalate and spread across the entire Middle East. I see no indication that Biden is planning to slow the rush to war or pull back from the brink. This is shaping up to be a real catastrophe.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on The Unz Review.

 

Michael Whitney is a renowned geopolitical and social analyst based in Washington State. He initiated his career as an independent citizen-journalist in 2002 with a commitment to honest journalism, social justice and World peace.

He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). 

Featured image is from Twitter/X

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The author of the brilliant article in Spanish, “Platicando en Davos” (Talking in Davos), Dr. Victor Andrés Belaunde Gutiérrez, is a Peruvian lawyer and international analyst. He has cast a final rather devastating blow – a Latin American View – at the WEF, Davos 24. Is it representative for all Latin America?

Probably not. But for a large segment of alert people, including many Latin American top corporate executives and even for some country leaders, Mr. Belaunde’s words may be speaking from their heart. Take Javier Milei, the newly elected President of Argentina, who was invited to Davos and gave a brilliant speech that probably Klaus Schwab and many of the WEF Clan did not expect.

Maybe President Milei’s and Victor Belaunde’s words are part of the final straw breaking the WEF’s neck. 

The WEF circus has been going on for too long – 54 years. The WEF’s naval-glancing organizers and participants are distancing themselves ever-more from reality, while they have one objective and one objective only – massively reducing world population, so that Mother Earth’s remaining natural resources will serve a small elite “forever”, instead of being swallowed by “useless eaters”, who can rapidly be replaced by robots, transhumans (chipped human survivors), and Artificial Intelligence (AI). 

Once there is only a fraction of the 8 billion world inhabitants left – and, yes, that is the goal already spelled out by the Club of Rome’s (a Rockefeller invention), 1972 Report “Limit to Growth”and then stated in Henry Kissinger’s 1974 Report on “National Security Study Memorandum (NSSM) 200”. Kissinger was then President Nixon’s Secretary of State.  (both reports can be downloaded, pdf)

The One Objective 

This one objective comes disguised under many different documents and statements, from the covid crime, to a potential virus “X” – which does not yet exist, but for which already bio-weapon “vaccines” are being produced; to energy shortages; and to the climate farce. All extreme fear-mongering, reducing the populations auto-immunity (even without being “vaxxed”).

Such a limited world population would lend itself best for a One World Order (OWO) with a One World Government, (OWG), and a One Health World (OHW), the latter dictated and tyrannized by the World Health Organization (WHO). 

The WHO tyranny – a dream of the WEF and its cult cabal – may only happen if the infamous Pandemic Treaty and the amply modified International Health Regulations (IHR), are being approved (coerced) at the World Health Assembly (WHA) in May 2024. 

To avoid this fraud, people around the world MUST now call upon their governments – in whatever strongest ways they can – to EXIT WHO. NOW. Period.

*

Below are some excerpts from Dr. Belaunde’s views About WEF, Davos 24. Translation by Deepl.com.

For the full report (in Spanish), see this.

Interestingly, Victor Belaunde quoted the pertinent and much telling beginning of President Milei’s address:

“Good afternoon,

Thank you very much. Today I am here to tell you that the West is in danger, because those who are supposed to defend the values of the West, find themselves co-opted by a worldview that – inexorably leads to socialism, consequently, to poverty. 

Unfortunately, in recent decades, motivated by some well-thought-out desires to help others, and others by the desire to belong to a privileged caste, the main world leaders of the Western world have abandoned the model of freedom for different versions of what we call collectivism. (…)” 

*

The Peruvian lawyer briefly comments that Mr. Milei is right: Those who must defend democratic capitalism are those who are burying it, in most cases, out of sheer frivolity: 

“I only quote his [President Milei’s] opening words because they sum up what the talks, the conversations at Davos, are all about. The people who have climbed to the highest ranks in status and wealth thanks to liberal and democratic capitalism, are promoting ideas that, as they are implemented, will destroy it.

“In addition, the demonstrations of frivolity and intellectual mediocrity that the famous forum emits are increasingly scandalous. For example, the impression that the prostitute traffickers make during these meetings – why not some orgies while we save the world with 2100 euro-a-night ladies?

“Perhaps this is not the best example as it is the oldest profession in the world.

“But the pitiful spectacle of a supposed witch, sorceress, or God knows what, emitting sounds and spitting on the faces of some panelists, is decidedly pathetic [PK note: a cult ritual].

“I cannot conceive how a person who has any notion of self-respect, would tolerate being a part of [cult] pranks of that caliber.

“Can people who willingly participate and applaud such farces be recognized as serious?

Have they no shame? Is it that their need to belong to the cool people of the planet is so powerful? – Is it that the cool, sophisticated is now inevitably ridiculous and shameful?” 

*

The Peruvian lawyer and international analyst, Victor Belaunde, introduced his conclusion of the WEF’s declining and ever-more devastating role for the world economy, with the following words:

“Every year in Davos, Switzerland, the luminaries of our planet, the members of a supposed world elite, gather at the so-called World Economic Forum (WEF) in Davos, Switzerland.

“The WEF is the brainchild of German executive Klaus Schwab, who, with immense skill, devised a relatively small cohort of corporate and political elitists, who were and are becoming immensely wealthy along the way.

“Mr. Schwab is the proponent of a particular economic and business philosophy, whose consistency with liberal and democratic capitalism is highly debatable. The vast majority of attendees do not pause to reflect on this point, being interested only in the opportunity to improve their personal public relations and rub elbows at the highest level.

“If you make it to Davos, you’ve made it!”

“What is this philosophy that is incompatible with liberal and democratic capitalism?

“It is the so-called Stakeholder Capitalism, a term popularized in all languages and interpreted as meaning of “interested parties”.

“But who are these “stakeholders” and what do they mean by “stakeholders”? – Stakeholders are all those individuals and entities that have an “interest” in the activities of a company or in the development of a project. So far, it all sounds very nice, modern, inclusive, and democratic, but it is not.

“Capitalism is based on respect for private property. However, this stakeholder system relegates the shareholders of companies, i.e. their owners, to a position indistinguishable from that of any other stakeholders.

Mr. Belaunde uses the example of a “community” or an NGO, both of which are “stakeholders’, according to the WEF concept. But following their laws and statutes, must defend consumers in the area. This “philosophy” according to Belaunde, is destroying the possibility of developing private enterprises. 

Why then, Belaunde asks, do so many executives gladly attend to these conclaves that promote ideas, incompatible with economic freedom? The answer is simple. Economic power gradually shifts from the owners of the enterprise to the employees, who slowly become self-perpetuating castes that capture the entities for which they work.

“It seems like a subtle form of Marxism”, Mr. Belaunde intimidates, believing that this is precisely countering the idea of the WEF. 

*

The bottom line is a devastating Report about WEF Davos24, in particular, and about the WEF and its nefarious goals in general.

This should be one more inspiration for us, We, the People, in Latin America and around the world, to stand up and stop this emerging civilization destroying genocide, launched again and again by the World Economic Forum and its handlers and followers.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Peter Koenig is a geopolitical analyst and a former Senior Economist at the World Bank and is the author of Implosion – An Economic Thriller about War, Environmental Destruction and Corporate Greed; and  co-author of Cynthia McKinney’s book “When China Sneezes: From the Coronavirus Lockdown to the Global Politico-Economic Crisis” (Clarity Press – November 1, 2020).

Peter is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). He is also a non-resident Senior Fellow of the Chongyang Institute of Renmin University, Beijing.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Billionaires Melinda French Gates and MacKenzie Scott this month invested a total of $23 million in the School-Based Health Alliance (SBHA), the leading Washington, D.C.-based, national nonprofit that promotes the expansion of school-based health centers (SBHCs).

Gates’ contribution ($16 million), made through her Pivotal Ventures company, will launch SBHC “care coordination initiatives” in Houston, Atlanta, Chicago and Miami. Scott’s funding ($7 million) will support general operations for the alliance.

The funding substantially increases the alliance’s revenue, which was less than $4 million in 2022, the most recent year for which data is available. Before the new $23 million investment, most of the nonprofit’s funding came from federal grants.

SBHA tweeted the grant announcement:

The organization’s mission is to increase the number of SBHCs nationally among schools that receive federal funding through policy advocacy, technical support to existing centers and support securing funding for new and existing centers. There are approximately 3,900 SBHCs in the U.S.

SBHCs are intended to provide healthcare to kids by offering “primary care, mental healthcare, and other health services in schools,” particularly in underserved communities.

This includes services “to prevent disease, disability, and other health conditions or their progression” such as “immunizations” and “well-child care,” typically with a focus on advancing equity.

Promoting equity is also a key platform for Pivotal Ventures, which Gates founded in 2015 to “accelerate social progress in the United States by removing barriers that hold people back.” It is a venture capital fund that primarily makes return-seeking investments rather than providing philanthropic donations, but it also has grantees like the alliance.

SBHCs ‘Completely Unregulated’

Justine Tanguay, an attorney and director of Children’s Health Defense’s (CHD) Reform Pharma initiative, told The Defender there is a long history of private equity firms investing in healthcare in pursuit of their own interests.

“Many philanthropists and donors claim that funding SBHCs provides underserved and low-income families with equity and access to affordable healthcare,” Tanguay said. “But it’s not about improving children’s health, it’s about making money.”

The Pivotal Ventures-backed care coordination initiatives will fund staff positions for SBHC “care coordinators” in schools serving low-income families. Coordinators will set up information-sharing “among all those concerned with a student’s health needs and care,” including students, parents or guardians, school staff and/or healthcare professionals.

They will also address issues such as housing, food security and transportation as part of student care.

Workgroups comprised of staff from SBHCs and “community members” in each city will select the coordinators. The initiative also will lobby for policies to take over payment for the care coordinators through Medicaid.

Tanguay said these kinds of models for SBHCs have the potential to circumvent parents’ rights to make healthcare decisions for their children by allowing care providers direct access to minors, potentially without parental consent.

“Here, the opportunity to circumvent both parental rights and informed consent is ripe for abuse since SBHCs are completely unregulated and therefore, have no oversight,” she said.

Georgia attorney Nicole Johnson, co-director of Georgia Coalition for Vaccine Choice and a consultant to the CHD legal team, also told The Defender the $23 million investment raised concerns about who was making decisions and what kind of regulations might be in place to protect children and families.

“The large federal grants combined with this Gates/Scott funding seem to be putting SBHCs on a fast track across the nation,” Johnson said.

“As beneficial as some of these services may be, shouldn’t we slow down and consider who is leading the charge for these SBHCs and what their motives may be? Shouldn’t we make sure there are proper regulatory frameworks in place to protect children and parents?” she asked.

Scott’s award is the largest “unrestricted” gift in the alliance’s 28-year history, meaning that it is not earmarked for any particular project and will be used to support general organizational costs for the nonprofit, to use as its leadership sees fit.

“I believe that SBHCs could be of benefit and service to many families, of any income,” Johnson said. “But as they are being rolled out, there are few guardrails in place to safeguard children’s medical data/privacy, ensure continuity of care and protect parental rights,” she added.

Philanthropic Funding Key to SBHC Expansion for Decades

SBHCs are typically full-service health clinics physically situated within school buildings, although a small percentage of them are mobile units or, increasingly, telehealth clinics.

The Association of American Pediatrics (AAP) began to establish the first SBHCs in the 1960s in Massachusetts, Texas and Minnesota. Since their inception, they have focused on providing services to low-income children who lack access to regular healthcare.

Until the late 1980s, there were just a handful of SBHCs, primarily located in “urban communities” across the country. Their work focused on family planning, along with general youth health and well-being.

Early controversies over SBHCs focused on issues of reproductive healthcare and parental rights, but efforts to establish new SBHCs expanded rapidly in the 1990s.

The Center for Population Options, which was dedicated to reducing unintended teenage pregnancy, was the first organization to offer technical support and conduct periodic qualitative studies of existing SBHCs and their services. By 1998, the School-Based Health Alliance took over those roles.

SBHCs numbered 1,135 in 45 states by 1998-99, with the expansion largely funded through more than $40 million from the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation and allocations by state governments.

Medicaid expansion in the 1990s also helped to shore up funding for SBHCs through coverage to low-income patients, along with congressional funding earmarked for SBHCs beginning in 1995 through the Healthy Schools, Healthy Communities program, which ended by 2005.

After that, funding for SBHCs was available from the Health Resources and Services Administration, as long as the grantees were federally qualified health centers. SBHCs also receive funding from third-party insurers and patient fees.

Through the Affordable Care Act in 2010, Congress appropriated $200 million over four years toward construction, renovation and equipment for SBHCs. The U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) distributed that money in 520 awards across the country.

By 2017, there were at least 2,317 SBHCs.

The Biden administration’s HHS in 2021 awarded $5 million in grants to expand school-based healthcare in the U.S. It continued this grant program the next year in May 2022, awarding $25 million in grants to 125 SBHCs. In 2023, HHS awarded another $25 million to 77 health centers for school-based service expansion.

Congress and President Joe Biden in June 2022 also passed the Bipartisan Safer Communities Act, which allowed HHS to award $50 million in grants to states “for the purpose of implementing, enhancing, or expanding the provision” of healthcare assistance through SBHCs using Medicaid or the Children’s Health Insurance Program.

The legislation charged the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services with expanding access to Medicaid healthcare services — including behavioral health services — in schools, and reducing the administrative burden for states and schools.

Since 2008, the number of telehealth SBHCs has also grown substantially, increasing from 7% of SBHCs to 19% from 2016-17.

Concerns over parental rights remain central to the debate over SBHCs today. Tanguay said that SBHCs can provide adolescents with confidential health services without parental consent, based on the assumption that some services, like family planning, could have negative consequences for the child if the parents were involved.

This often means that parents are denied access to their children’s health information due to confidentiality rules, but that information can be shared with providers including school nurses and other interested parties on the care team.

“It’s a very slippery slope that appears to eliminate barriers to sharing a student’s private health information, rather than protecting them,” she said.

While the early focus of SBHCs was on family planning and reproductive health, today the literature focuses more on their potential “to address lagging immunization rates” and to provide mental health services to children and teens facing a reported mental health crisis.

Groups like the AAP, a strong supporter of SBHCs, have used the mental health crisis to call on the Biden administration to fund expanded access to screening, diagnosing and treatment for children, arguing access to “school-based mental health care” should be a priority.

The administration responded with new policy measures, including the Bipartisan Safer Communities Act — which made $1 billion available for mental health services — and the American Rescue Plan Act. Both offer funding explicitly for school-based mental health services for students, KFF Health News reported.

Many of these resources have funded the expansion of SBHCs.

Pivotal Ventures Senior Manager of the Adolescent Mental Health strategy Sara Bathum indicated the corporation’s interest in mental health was a key motivation for its funding to the alliance.

“School-Based Health Alliance’s unique approach embeds mental health resources for youth and families within existing centers of care, making it easier to access trusted, culturally responsive support. We are proud to partner with them in this important effort in these communities and look forward to seeing their impact,” she said.

“Mental health is clearly a significant focus of these centers,” Johnson said. “But Parents should be very concerned about how these centers treat mental health issues.”

Johnson gave the example of a case in Maine where a federally funded school-based health center reportedly gave prescription anti-depressant pills in a plastic baggie to a 17-year-old girl without her parents’ knowledge or consent.

Pharma vs. Parents in the SBHC Rollout

The School-Based Health Alliance calls itself the “national voice for school-based healthcare.” It consults for organizations seeking to start SBHCs — helping them secure funding, providing technical support and even providing direct funding. It also tracks and lobbies for SBHC-friendly policies on the local, state and federal levels.

In addition to Gates and Scott, SBHA funders include Merck, maker of the Gardasil human papillomavirus (HPV) vaccine. Merck funded SBHA’s “vaccine toolkit” along with a 2023 SBHA program to increase vaccinations through child wellness visits.

Military think tank Rand Corporation also is a funder. Previous funders include Gilead and insurance giants Kaiser Permanente and Aetna.

Tanguay said the alliance’s ties to Big Pharma are concerning, given that SBHCs are such a“ windfall” for Pharma, particularly if they provide a way around parental consent.

She said:

“Big Pharma is a trojan horse that if given the opportunity, will have direct access to our children at school without the need for parental involvement.

“It’s no surprise that Big Pharma is supporting SBHCs because the goal is to diagnose and medicate as many students as possible for the sake of ‘improving’ the health of the child. Big Pharma’s business model anticipates that the more prescriptions written the more money they will make.”

The alliance’s board members also have ties to major healthcare conglomerates, and their resumes often highlight their success in vaccinating low-income people of color against COVID-19.

Board member Mark Masselli is CEO of the Moses Weitzman Health System, formerly Community Health Center, in Connecticut, which boasts of having administered over 500,000 COVID-19 vaccines and winning “national acclaim for its educational messages addressing vaccine hesitancy among people of color.”

Board member Alexandra Quinn, former Kellogg Foundation fellow, co-founded the Vaccine Equity Cooperative during the COVID-19 pandemic, to vaccinate people of color, largely by training “trusted messengers” to promote the idea that the vaccines are “safe and effective” — a strategy advocated and funded by federal public health institutions.

Another board member, Dr. Gillian Barclay, is the vice president of Global Public Health & Scientific Affairs at Big Pharma’s Colgate Palmolive, and previously worked at the Kellogg Foundation and World Health Organization.

Board member Cecilia Oregón works at healthcare giant Kaiser Permanente, where she is an advocate for universal internet access (digital equity) to get people telehealth access.

Robert Boyd, the alliance’s president and CEO, has been instrumental in getting federal appropriations for new and expanded SBHCs. In the meantime, Johnson said, the onus is on parents to advocate for state laws that ensure that SBHC expansion happens in a way that is regulated and offers protection for parents and children.

“In New Hampshire, for instance, a proposed bill regarding the establishment of SBHCs includes a provision that would require parents to be present when services are provided,” she said.

“I believe that requiring a parent’s presence is a win-win — the parent can share information about the child’s health history and any current treatments/medications and can also participate in and consent to any additional treatments.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Brenda Baletti Ph.D. is a reporter for The Defender. She wrote and taught about capitalism and politics for 10 years in the writing program at Duke University. She holds a Ph.D. in human geography from the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill and a master’s from the University of Texas at Austin.

Featured image is from CHD

To End the War in Ukraine, Expose Its Core Lie

January 22nd, 2024 by Ted Snider

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The essential argument used to avoid negotiation and continue support for the war in Ukraine is based on a falsehood. That falsehood, repeated by President Joe Biden, is that when Vladimir Putin decided to invade, he intended to conquer all of Ukraine and “annihilate” it.

Its falsity has been exposed multiple times by military experts, who have pointed out, both before and after the invasion, that Russia could not have intended to conquer all of Ukraine because it did not invade with sufficient forces to do so. Indeed, this was a key reason why senior Ukrainian officials, and even President Volodymyr Zelensky himself, argued just days before the invasion that it would not occur.

The mistake that most analysts at the time made (these authors included), was to assume that since the troops mobilized by Russia did not suffice for a full scale occupation of Ukraine, no military operation, not even a limited one, was in the offing. It was only later that Western political leaders turned this mistake to their propaganda advantage by insisting that Russia had always intended to first take Kiev, then all of Ukraine, and ultimately even attack NATO.

But if basic military logic is taken into account, the fact that Putin committed only 120,000190,000 men to his campaign and did not mobilize more resources until months later, after Kiev rejected the Istanbul peace deal, indicates that his objectives in Ukraine were limited and revolved around guaranteeing the security of the populations of Donbass and Crimea from Ukrainian assaults and Russia from NATO expansion. Given that Ukraine had cut off Crimea’s water and electricity years before, this required a land bridge to the region; hence, the illegal annexations of the Kherson and Zaporozhye regions.

We also have indirect confirmation that territory was not his objective from an unimpeachable source: NATO General Secretary Jens Stoltenberg, who stated that Putin invaded Ukraine to prevent NATO’s expansion. This would explain why, as soon as these goals were within reach when Ukrainian officials initialed the draft of the Istanbul Agreement in March 2022, Putin halted his assault and withdrew Russian forces from Kiev, rather than move further into Ukraine.   

This background is important, because the argument for increasing Western military support for Ukraine relies so heavily on the claim that Russia always intended to expand further, attack NATOand reestablish the Russian empire.

But, as noted scholar John Mearsheimer has pointed out,

“there is no evidence in the public record that Putin was contemplating, much less intending to put an end to Ukraine as an independent state and make it part of greater Russia when he sent his troops into Ukraine on February 24th.”

It was never one of Putin’s stated goals, nor was it ever taken seriously by the Ukrainian leadership. David Arakhamia, the head of Ukraine’s negotiating team in Belarus and Istanbul, recently revealed that the “key point” for Russia was Ukraine not joining NATO, and “everything else was simply rhetoric and political ‘seasoning.’”

Putin himself has consistently said that “this conflict is not about territory…[it] is about the principles underlying the new international order.” We should not take him at his word, but it is still worth asking: had Putin’s ambitions been territorial, would he have waited until 2014 to annex Crimea? Would the upper house of Russia’s parliament have rescinded Putin’s temporary authority to use troops in Ukraine in June 2015? Would he have opposed the 2014 independence referendums in Donetsk and Lugansk?

Looking back even further, if Putin had truly wanted to incorporate parts of the former Soviet Union, he had an ideal opportunity to do so in August 2008, when Russian troops were but an hour’s drive from the Georgian capitol of Tbilisi. He could have simply recognized the independence of Abkhazia and South Ossetia, and then annexed them to Russia, but he did not. Reviewing Putin’s current behavior, therefore, former U.S. Deputy Undersecretary of Defense Stephen Bryen concludes that

“Russia has no intention of expanding outside of the Ukraine conflict area.”

The false narrative about Russian intentions has served its essential purpose of rallying Western countries behind Ukraine. Continuing to insist on it now, however, risks involving NATO directly in the conflict, and threatens Ukraine’s very survival.

If the challenge the West faces in this conflict is defined as “existential,” then what choice does NATO have but to send its own military forces in to prevent Ukraine’s defeat? President Biden implied as much when he said,

“If Putin takes Ukraine, he won’t stop there. It’s important to see the long run here. He’s going to keep going…Then we’ll have something that we don’t seek and that we don’t have today: American troops fighting Russian troops.”

At some point, a decision will have to be made to either greatly expand the West’s commitment, or abandon Ukraine to its fate. Alas, President Biden’s request for $61 billion in additional funding for 2024 does neither, since Ukraine needs at least five time that amount to win, according to its top military commander. With the Ukrainian counteroffensive already running out of steam due to a lack funding, lack of weaponry, and unsustainable losses, Ukraine will likely soon be facing a Russian counteroffensive.

Before such an assault, however, Russia might offer Ukraine new peace terms, albeit far less advantageous than the ones it offered in March 2022. If Ukraine balks, Russia will press its overwhelming advantage and take more territory, which it does not really want (for a good discussion of why, see former Ukrainian diplomat Rostislav Ishchenko), in order to force Ukraine to the negotiating table.

At that point, the West will be faced with a fateful choice: either accept Ukraine’s surrender or send in NATO troops. Either scenario is likely to lead to sharp divisions in the NATO alliance, since Hungary, Slovakia, and Turkey have all indicated that they want a peaceful resolution to the conflict, not escalation.

The one thing that escalation cannot guarantee, however, is Russia’s defeat. That is because, by confirming Putin’s narrative that NATO is intent on destroying Russia, his support both within Russia and around the world would likely skyrocket. A more divided West would thus be facing a more united Russia, this time supported openly by the BRICS countries, as well as many other major international actors currently on the sidelines. This would effectively turn the tables on America’s strategy of using Ukraine to contain China’s global ambitions. Instead, it would now be Russia and its allies using Ukraine to contain the global ambitions of the United States.

It was, in no small part, the West’s original false narrative about Russia’s goals in Ukraine that has led us to this dismal outcome; European security weakened, the specter of nuclear war, Ukraine destroyed, and America’s global standing undermined. It has already been used once before to scuttle the Istanbul Agreement, which could have ended the war before hundreds of thousands died. For peace negotiations to become an acceptable alternative to mutual annihilation, this falsehood must be exposed and discarded.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Ted Snider is a regular columnist on U.S. foreign policy and history at Antiwar.com and the Libertarian Institute, and is a frequent contributor to Responsible Statecraft, The American Conservative, and other outlets. He can be contacted at [email protected]

Nicolai N. Petro is Professor of Political Science at the University of Rhode Island, and the author of The Tragedy of Ukraine: What Classical Greek Tragedy Can Teach Us About Conflict Resolution (Berlin and Boston: De Gruyter, 2023).

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Introduction

This essay will explore the arbitrary merger of state and corporate power that has been brought about by the World Economic Forum (WEF).

We will first briefly examine the history of the WEF and its original emphasis on stakeholder capitalism.

We will then look briefly at its founder, composition, funding, legal status, mission statement, and original code of ethics.

Then, by viewing selected content from its May, 2022 annual meeting, we will expose the WEF’s gradual appropriation of the treaty-based roles[1] of intergovernmental agencies such as the United Nations and the World Health Organization. 

Of particular concern are the geo-political topics of war, future pandemics, and climate change. 

The WEF acts on the belief that whereas these global issues require global solutions, only a centralized private-public entity[2] with “corporate agility” is capable of responding in effective and timely ways.  

From this belief, it tackles global problems through the aggressive, ongoing Young Global Leaders program attended by many sovereign heads of state.

Highly concerning is a published list of 1400 all-country graduates of the WEF young global leaders’ program from 1993-2022.[3]

In thus influencing the decisions of elected leaders, the WEF interferes with the democratic processes within nation-states.  

Correspondingly, it interferes with the historic relationships between nations and their treaty-founded intergovernmental agencies. 

The World Economic Forum also shapes economic policies over such rapidly emerging issues as central bank digital currencies (CBDC’s), which are briefly examined in light of their inherent danger to the independence of nation-states.

1971: The WEF Origins in “Stakeholder Capitalism”

The term “stakeholder capitalism” was coined by WEF founder Klaus Schwab in 1971 and was originally the primary raison d’être of the World Economic Forum. 

To quote Prof. Schwab,

“stakeholder capitalism is a form of capitalism in which companies seek long-term value creation by taking into account the needs of all their stakeholders, and society at large.”[4]

What is a stakeholder?

“A stakeholder is a party that has an interest in a company and can either affect or be affected by the business. The primary stakeholders in a typical corporation are its investors, employees, customers, and suppliers.

However, with the increasing attention on corporate social responsibility, the concept has been extended to include communities, governments, and trade associations.

A common problem that arises for companies with numerous stakeholders is that the various stakeholder interests may not align… The most efficient companies successfully manage the interests and expectations of all their stakeholders.”[5]

Unfortunately, the World Economic Forum did not stop there.

Founder, Composition, Funding, and Legal Status of the WEF

1. Who is Klaus Schwab?  In 1971, German engineer and economist Klaus Schwab founded the World Economic Forum, a non-profit Swiss-based NGO.  Schwab draws an annual salary of about one million Swiss francs from the WEF, which does not pay taxes.[6]

Before starting the WEF, Schwab was on the managing board of engineering monolith, Sulzer Escher Wyss AG, Zurich, from 1967-1970.[7]

The World Economic Forum was not simply Schwab’s brainchild, but was actually born out of a CIA-funded Harvard program headed by Henry Kissinger and pushed to fruition by John Kenneth Galbraith and Herman Kahn, who together recruited the young Schwab.

In one document[8], Schwab mentor and nuclear warrior Herman Kahn “suggests subverting democracy by training only a certain group in society as potential leaders, with those pre-selected few who are groomed for power being able to define what our shared values as a society should be. Maybe Herman Kahn would agree with the World Economic Forum’s Young Global Leader scheme, which is the exact manifestation of his original suggestion.”[9]

From new research published in February, 2021:

When Klaus Schwab joined Sulzer Escher-Wyss in 1967 and started the reorganisation of the company to be a technology corporation, the involvement of Sulzer Escher-Wyss in the darker aspects of the global nuclear arms race became immediately more pronounced…With the arrival of the eager Mr. Schwab also came the company’s participation in the illegal proliferation of nuclear weapons technology…

It was eventually revealed, thanks to a review and report carried out by the Swiss authorities and a man named Peter Hug, that Sulzer Escher-Wyss began secretly procuring and building key parts for nuclear weapons during the 1960s. The company, while Schwab was on the board, also began playing a critical key role in the development of South Africa’s illegal nuclear weapons programme during the darkest years of the apartheid regime. Klaus Schwab was a leading figure in the founding of a company culture which helped Pretoria build six nuclear weapons and partially assemble a seventh.[10]

2. Composition: WEF meetings are attended by invitation only, most notably by 100 corporate “Strategic Partners”, which include massive oil, automotive, pharmaceutical, media, big tech and aerospace companies, and banks.[11] Also invited are government leaders (who do not pay to attend), civic society leaders, and mass media.

3. Funding: Although the WEF does not disclose its individual funding sources, its 2021-2022 Annual Report reveals that 2.6% comes from memberships, 7.5% from “participation”, 14.8% from “other”, 12.1% from direct funding (public institutions and foundations), and 62.7% from its corporate partnerships (which include the Pfizer and Moderna pharmaceutical companies).[12]

4. Legal Status: “From the point of view of international law, international NGOs have no existence as such.”[13]

However, this does not preclude the WEF from consolidating power by indoctrinating politicians worldwide.

The Mission Statement of the WEF

The WEF lists no specific goals on its website, but under Our Mission is the rhetoric of a grandiose ideology:

Screenshot from WEF

The World Economic Forum is the International Organization for Public-Private Cooperation.

The Forum engages the foremost political, business, cultural and other leaders of society to shape global, regional and industry agendas.

It is independent, impartial and not tied to any special interests. The Forum strives in all its efforts to demonstrate entrepreneurship in the global public interest while upholding the highest standards of governance. Moral and intellectual integrity is at the heart of everything it does.

Our activities are shaped by a unique institutional culture founded on the stakeholder theory, which asserts that an organization is accountable to all parts of society. The institution carefully blends and balances the best of many kinds of organizations, from both the public and private sectors, international organizations and academic institutions.

We believe that progress happens by bringing together people from all walks of life who have the drive and the influence to make positive change.[14]

Under its letterhead appear the words, “Committed to Improving the State of the World.”

The WEF Code of Ethics, 1973-2020

The original 1973 WEF code of ethics defined corporate stakeholder responsibilities, which included the statement, “The management has to serve society. It must assume the role of a trustee of the material universe for future generations.”[15]

In 2006, the United Nations produced “Principles for Responsible Investment,” a report to prioritize environmental stewardship.[16]  In this report, the ESG (Environmental, Social, and Governance) concept of non-financial corporate management standards first appeared.

ESG standards were embraced by the WEF, which in 2019 published The Davos Manifesto 2020, highlighting core sustainable reporting ESG metrics “structured to align with the UN’s 2030 Agenda for sustainable development.”[17]

So far, so good.  But much more was in the works.

WEF Mission Creep 

In 2022, the WEF prioritized four geo-political areas to reorder the planet:  Climate Change, War and Peace, Pandemic Preparedness, and Digital Agency.

The scope of these four areas was revealed through the agenda titles for the World Economic Forum annual meeting in Davos, May 23-26, 2022.[18]

Three of the priority topics that were heavily weighted with corporate input – Climate, War, and Pandemics – were competing on a parallel track with intergovernmental agencies that have treaty responsibility for them. 

Who within WEF planned this?  

It is not clear who creates the annual agendas for the approximate 2500 delegates – whether Klaus Schwab himself, the WEF board of trustees, the managing board, or the executive committee.[19]

Whatever the case, the May 23-26, 2022 session titles below wrapped the WEF discussions in rhetoric that did little to advance truly effective action. 

Regarding corporate action, the WEF-adopted ESG principles, while high-sounding, have not constrained Big Oil’s CO2 emissions that the world must stop producing.  Nor have they constrained the vast, emissions-heavy production of armaments that feed the permanent war economy.  

Neither have ESG principles been applied to reduce the disastrous pharmaceutical funding that corrupts public health regulatory agencies such as the World Health Organization,[20] and the US-based FDA[21] and CDC[22].

In short, today’s most serious global problems exist precisely because of increasing corporate dominance over the elected world order.

***

The Critiques under the four topics below illustrate the weak and irresolute actions planned at Davos in May, 2022.

The Democratic Alternatives offer possible actions for the intergovernmental agencies that were created by collective humanity to address global issues.  These agencies were originally funded only by tax dollars and therefore operated without conflict-of-interest interference.

(Note that the *starred* sessions were compulsory.)

1. WEF Climate Change Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Unlocking Carbon Markets
  • What Role for Carbon Dioxide Removal Technologies?
  • Embracing Climate Adaptation Action
  • Unlocking Digital Innovation for Net Zero
  • Climate Transition in Emerging Economies
  • *Press Conference:  Speeding up the Road to Net Zero*
  • Accelerating Corporate Investment in Nature
  • Unlocking the Potential of Blue Carbon
  • Financing Net Zero:  Moving from Commitment to Action
  • Climate Action Starts at Home
  • The Path to Decarbonizing Aviation
  • Investing in Climate Adaptation in Fragile Contexts

A Nuclear Option?

  • Putting Health at the Heart of Climate Action
  • Staying on Course for Climate Action

Critique  

By late 2021, the climate change consensus among published climate scientists in peer-reviewed science journals had reached 99%.[23]

This consensus had been growing for a long time.  If the 1980’s climate model projections of global warming are compared to post-projection observations, the two sets of figures closely match over time.[24]

We are bankrupting the Earth by not acting.  It is imperative that besides individual pledges – to plant trees and adopt ESG – specific, agreed, and published declarations of essential climate actions must emerge from WEF’s annual meetings.

However, a month before the May, 2022 meeting in Davos, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change reported that status quo interests had prevented urgent action on climate change.[25]

Do the WEF session topics impart a sense of urgency?

Sadly, the climate topics list looks like a university course prospectus.  There is not a single proposal to the world’s national and corporate leaders that would urgently and orderly phase out the fossil fuels that cause 65% of greenhouse gases.[26]

However, as a token action, the WEF inspired their “young global leaders” in the Netherlands (Prime Minister Mark Lutte, formerly of Unilever), in Canada (Prime Minister Justin Trudeau, a former high school drama teacher), and in Sri Lanka and the United States, to spark riots in July 2022 by regulating farmers’ use of agricultural fertilizer – based on the paltry 6% of greenhouse gas emissions caused by nitrous oxide.[27]

This unelected intrusion into national affairs, while signaling nobility of purpose, severely hampered farmer productivity.  Only one WEF strategic partner was negatively impacted – the fertilizer company Yara International[28] – while Big Oil, spewing 65% of greenhouse gases, stayed on the sidelines unscathed.

At best this token measure was a delaying tactic. 

Corporate delaying tactics also haunt the world agency responsible for advancing scientific knowledge about climate change, the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC) of the United Nations, with its 195-member states.  

Most notably, IPCC annual conference summits have failed to transition the $5.9 trillion in annual global fossil fuel subsidies to renewable energy (IMF figure for 2020[29]).  

Because the fossil fuel industry could not survive without its yearly tax-based $5.9 trillion infusion – roughly $11 billion a day – it is known as the “zombie” industry, or the walking dead.[30]

Fossil-fuel subsidies are one of the biggest financial barriers hampering the global shift to renewable energy.  They are inefficient and inequitable.  In developing countries, the subsidies benefit the richest 20 percent. Transferring them to renewables would cut emissions and contribute to job creation, economic growth, health care and equality[31] – and yet they failed to make the cut at Davos 2022. 

Democratic Alternative:  Schedule a redirection of the $5.9 trillion in global subsidies away from the fossil fuel industry towards renewable energy 

A global transition to responsible energy financing suggests an environmental law approach such as the ancient Public Trust Doctrine (PTD), which requires government stewardship of “the common wealth” – the natural resources upon which society depends for the benefit of existing and future generations.

This doctrine has been traced to the ancient societies of Europe, Asia, Africa, and Muslim countries – and to Native America, where stewardship of nature has been central to indigenous governance from time immemorial.

A trust’s assets (its res) are owned by two parties:  the beneficiaries, who have beneficial ownership of the assets, and the trustees, who are the legal owners.

The essence of a trust is a fiduciary relationship that imposes on trustees a duty to act for the benefit of beneficiaries.  In the Public Trust Doctrine, government acts as a trustee, with its management responsibility and accountability similar to oversight of an estate or investment account.   

In her book “Nature’s Trust,” Professor Mary Christina Wood of the University of Oregon wrote: 

“The res of Nature’s Trust consists of ecological assets, natural wealth that must sustain all foreseeable future generations of humanity. It amounts to humanity’s survival account – the only one it has. Government trustees must protect trust resources for the benefit of present and future generations.”[32]

The Atmospheric Trust Litigation (ATL) attempts to do this.  It “‘simply applies the public trust doctrine to the atmosphere,’ says Wood. This doctrine concerns ‘resources that the public relies on for its very survival,’ and ‘the atmosphere certainly qualifies.’”[33]

The international PTD movement is counting on domestic judiciaries to play their role. Prof. Wood explains further:

“As a legal doctrine, the public trust compels protection of those ecological assets necessary for public survival and community welfare. The judicial role is to compel the political branches to meet their fiduciary obligation through whatever measures and policies they choose, as long as such measures sufficiently reduce carbon emissions within the required time frame.”[34] 

The ideas above describe the function of the PDT within the nation. The intention is that judiciaries around the world will do this in their own countries as a support to the international treaty system – especially with regard to Atmospheric Trust Litigation.”

Indeed, a recent article in transnational legal theory concludes “that global PTDs are emerging from recent legislation, litigation and treaties.”[35]

A high priority of transnational public trusts would be to undertake a global transition of fossil fuel subsidies to renewables at 7-8%/year for 10 years until the transition is complete.

Sovereign governments working together through intergovernmental organizations could achieve this transition, perhaps after developing a national legislation template for mandating a scheduled transfer of fossil fuel subsidies to solar, wind, nuclear, geothermal, and tidal energy projects. 

But the first thing would be to identify (or create) a global intergovernmental organization to devise a framework for the Public Trust Doctrine and the Atmospheric Trust Doctrine, promoting the two ancient doctrines as the philosophical and legal bases for earth management – tax-supported and constitutionally immune from status quo interests such as the World Economic Forum.

2.  War and Peace Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Economic Weaponry:  Uses and Effectiveness of Sanctions
  • Responding to the Humanitarian Crisis in Ukraine
  • *Special Address by Volodymyr Zelensky, President of Ukraine*
  • *Spirit of Resilience: Ukrainian Voices*
  • A Discussion with the Klitschkos (Ukrainian boxer brothers)
  • Russia:  What Next?
  • Cold War 2.0
  • *Special Address by Jens Stoltenberg, Secretary-General, NATO*
  • NATO in the Nordics
  • Return to War
  • A Conversation with Dmytro Kuleba, Minister of Foreign Affairs of Ukraine
  • Press Conference: Minister Dmytro Kuleba
  • Kyiv after the Onslaught
  • Ukraine: Reporting from the Frontlines

Critique 

It is a striking irony that the World Economic Forum, a globalization entity paying lip service to peace and cooperation, devoted 14 sessions to supporting one side of a costly war that throughout 2022 the West had declined to negotiate.

The entire Davos audience was required to attend three of these pro-Western sessions about the Ukraine conflict:

  • *Special Address by Jens Stoltenberg, Secretary-General, NATO*
  • *Special Address by Volodymyr Zelensky, President of Ukraine*
  • *Spirit of Resilience: Ukrainian Voices*
  • Who benefits from sustaining such a war with Russia?

The WEF has not campaigned against the arms industry.  Indeed, it partners with massive arms producers such as US-based Honeywell and Boeing.[36]

Relevant to this conflict is U.S. control within NATO: “NATO’s military operations are directed by the Chairman of the NATO Military Committee and split into two Strategic Commands, both long commanded by U.S. officers, assisted by a staff drawn from across NATO.”[37]

Further relevant is that a week after Davos 2022, at the June 2-5, 2022 Bilderberg meeting in Washington – which The Guardian referred to as “a high-level council of war” – both the Secretary-General of the NATO military alliance, Jens Stoltenberg, and Klaus Schwab were in attendance.[38]

How is peace to be pursued when it is clear that the World Economic Forum is solidly aligned with the US-NATO position against Russia? 

The responsibility for world peace is cited as the first Purpose of the 1945 United Nations Charter: 

To maintain international peace and security, and to that end: to take effective collective measures for the prevention and removal of threats to the peace, and for the suppression of acts of aggression or other breaches of the peace, and to bring about by peaceful means, and in conformity with the principles of justice and international law, adjustment or settlement of international disputes or situations which might lead to a breach of the peace.[39]

The key sense of this statement being:  to take measures for “the suppression of acts of aggression…to bring about adjustment or settlement of international disputes or situations which might lead to a breach of the peace.”

This means that before President Putin invaded Ukraine, his longstanding dispute against efforts to bring the Ukraine into NATO could have been addressed and possibly settled through the UN.

International relations scholar Prof. John Mearsheimer wrote in The Economist that “NATO’s reckless expansion provoked Russia,” and that “many prominent American foreign-policy experts have warned against NATO expansion since the late 1990s.”[40] 

It is clear that the WEF, by supporting the NATO military alliance in its drive to incorporate Ukraine (both at Davos and immediately after at Bilderberg), is what is meant by “public-private partnership” – which is not a partnership at all, but a group of wealthy corporations interfering with the apparatus of states, shielded by the rhetoric of 14 anti-Russian propaganda sessions, and by the silent presence of major U.S.  munitions manufacturers.

Throughout the conflict, the captured Western media has spurred popular support for the US-backed proxy war with Russia[41], and the provision of ever more armaments to “rescue” war-torn Ukraine.

Within such a vested-interest dynamic, the WEF-NATO alignment can never undertake a peace-keeping role and will only escalate conflicts, while defense contracts bloom on.

Democratic Alternative 

By international law the United Nations remains the one democratically created transnational agency to mediate international conflicts and to keep the world peace – although it does need reform to better enable this role.  

An example of where the UN could do better:  On December 14, 2022, a UN Assembly vote adopted the resolution, “Towards a New International Economic Order,” which concerns a well-known 1979 book published by UNESCO proposing “the establishment of a peaceful world order” based on international law.[42] 

Voting in favour were 123 non-NATO countries of the world, while 50 countries, including all 30 NATO countries except Turkey (which abstained), voted against the resolution. This was not reported in the Western media.[43]

UN General Assembly resolutions are regarded as recommendations, and are not binding, but they do reflect a consensus of national values, which one authority believes the UN is capable of negotiating.

Dr. Alfred de Zayas, former UN independent expert on the promotion of a democratic and equitable international order, tweeted on June 16, 2022:

Essentially the Ukraine war constitutes a civil war among US and European powers, while China, India and most African and Latin American states observe.  Here the United Nations should play a role in integrating the values of all States in an evolving new world order.[44]

Columbia University economist and policy analyst, Dr. Jeffrey Sachs, has also reviewed the Ukraine situation:

The main point for mediation is that all parties have legitimate interests and legitimate grievances…

Peace will come when the US backs away from further NATO enlargement towards Russia’s borders; Russia withdraws its military forces from Ukraine and backs away from the unilateral annexation of Ukrainian territory; Ukraine backs away from its attempts to retake Crimea and from its repudiation of the Minsk II framework; and all parties agree to secure the sovereign borders of Ukraine under the UN Charter and backed by the guarantees of the UN Security Council and other nations.[45]

Thus, it appears that increased popular support for an enhanced UN value-integration role – throughout legacy media and social media – would help to reduce conflict in our world. 

We end by pointing to readings on United Nations procedural reform, and legacy media ethical reform.[46]

3. Pandemic Preparedness Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • *Press Conference: Pfizer and Partners Announce Accord for a Healthier World* (featuring Bill Gates and Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, along with some African national leaders)  
  • Equitable Responses to Ending the Pandemic
  • Growing up in the Pandemic
  • Preparing for the Next Pandemic
  • A Conversation with Albert Bourla, CEO of Pfizer

Critique  

The self-appointed World Economic Forum and its Big Pharma interests have been intruding on the role and responsibility of the UN-founded intergovernmental organization, the World Health Organization, created in 1948.

  1. In prioritizing pandemic preparedness, the WEF sessions did not mention Covid-19’s very high infection survival rate (as shown in the Bulletin of the World Health Organization[47]), which would not have qualified as a “pandemic” under the classical definition.[48]

Nor did the sessions mention the highly significant difference in immunity between the young and the old, which should have led to focused elderly protection rather than universal lockdowns.

  1. A 2011 article entitled “Health is more than influenza,” referred to repeated H5NI avian health scares, where “the pandemic policy was never informed by evidence, but by fear of worst-case scenarios,” leading to “the stocking of largely useless antivirals.” The author observes:

“The pharmaceutical industry and the media only reacted to this welcome boon. We therefore need fewer, not more “pandemic preparedness” plans or definitions. Vertical influenza planning in the face of speculative catastrophes is a recipe for repeated waste of resources and health scares, induced by influenza experts with vested interests in exaggeration.”[49]

  1. The WEF emphasis on pandemics and vaccines is bizarrely disproportional to the overall context of health, as defined by the World Health Organization Constitution:

“Health is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being and not merely the absence of disease or infirmity.”[50]

The Constitution emphasizes informed public opinion, nutrition, and environmental factors.[51]

  1. Although risk factors such as obesity and Vitamin D deficiency were present in at least 78% of US hospitalizations[52][53],  the relevance of the whole field of WHO and nationally sponsored health, nutrition, and fitness education simply did not exist for the WEF corporate assembly.

Instead, the sessions were aimed only at the global prevention of infectious diseases, using only vaccinations. 

  1. A complicating factor is that Big Pharma has been financing not only the WEF itself, but also major public health regulatory agencies: WHO[54], FDA[55], and CDC[56].
  1. Throughout the pandemic, the overwhelming evidence supporting cheap repurposed drugs[57] in the early treatment of Covid-19 has been entirely overlooked by the WEF – but not by the U.S. military: 

Canadian physician Dr. Chris Shoemaker reported in December 2022 that after 15 years of study following SARS Cov-1 (2002-2004) the US military research agency, DARPA 

“specifically knew and specifically recommended, and passed on the information to the CDC, that Ivermectin in particular was the absolute number one product to be used in the event of a coronavirus pandemic. It was fully known that Ivermectin, and certainly Hydroxychloroquine as well, were highly antiviral and immunomodulatory – and those two things were the key:  to modulate the immune response, plus to be antiviral as well. Those elements were both totally proven in vitro and in vivo with animals. And, of course, we knew it was completely safe for humans because these medications had been used for 35-40 years in humans.”[58]

Tragically, in the case of Covid-19 policy, there was to be no competition with vaccines.  

How could this be?

Seldom if ever mentioned in the media is that the FDA cannot legally grant an Emergency Use Authorization for an experimental drug or vaccine if an “adequate, approved, and available alternative” already exists.[59]

It is upon this hidden reality that a vast underground media-and-FBI-censored “science war” over Covid policy played out – which has fatefully come to light through Elon Musk’s Twitter Files.[60]

Democratic Alternative

As witnessed by the compulsory WEF press conference with Bill Gates and Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla, corporate control of the Covid-19 pandemic is moving towards corporate control of future pandemics. 

What is to be done about this profit-driven seizure of global health leadership and policy? 

Author and trend forecaster Dr. Chris Martenson has suggested the following remedial actions:

  1. No more revolving doors. Working in any decision-making capacity at any health agency means zero money or employment from any related industry for a period of 10 years post exiting your position.
  2. No more funding the FDA through pharma “fees.” 
  3. Eliminate the so-called randomized control trial standard. Observational data is equally good if done right and ten times better than a scammed RCT.
  4. Create a parallel body to the FDA which is equally funded and charged with using any combination of therapies or repurposed drugs to address any particular disease. Drug companies would no longer be tasked with “beating placebo” – they’d have to better the cost/safety/efficacy profile of an existing approach, e.g., statins would be up against diet, exercise, meditation and red wine. Vaccines would have to go head-to-head against ivermectin, hydroxychloroquine, zinc, and Vitamin D.[61]

In other words, get Big Money out of public health agencies and let the people’s taxes support a progressive health system rather than a vaccine industry. 

4. Digital Agency Topics, Davos, May 23-26, 2022

  • Ushering in a Safer Digital Future
  • *Press Conference:  Launching Digital Foreign Direct Investment Initiative*
  • Remittances for Recovery:  A New Era of Digital Money
  • *Press Conference:  Pioneering Ways to Strengthen Digital Trust with a Label*
  • Central Bank Digital Currencies
  • Strategic Outlook on the Digital Economy
  • Unlocking Capital at Scale for Digital Inclusion
  • Advancing Digital Cooperation
  • Serving up Digital Services

A Central Bank Digital Currency (CBDC) is essentially electronic cash in the form of a “digital banknote”. Like traditional fiat currencies, it gives holders a direct claim on the central bank and allows businesses and individuals to make electronic payments and transfers.

The pandemic has been the single largest catalyst in the move away from cash, causing a surge in digital payment volume. This move towards digital currencies has also been aided by consumer convenience, and by the development of user profiles on digital vaccine certificates.

However, CBDC’s have the potential for population control through their capacity for electronic surveillance and their programmability for financial inclusion/exclusion. 

One analyst has summarized this downside, which citizens and national governments should understand:

“Given the ubiquity of credit and debit cards, payment apps and other online payment systems, digital money has been bound to happen for some time. The risk isn’t the electronic part, that’s inevitable – it’s the fact that a central bank will oversee the digital currency.

From my vantage point, it’s impossible to overstate the risk presented by CBDC. Whether it’s a utopian vision based on good intentions or a sinister plot to crush our sovereignty, the result may be the same: control. A Central Bank Digital Currency has all the downsides of fiat money, plus the added layers of surveillance and programmability overseen by the state.”[62]

The movement towards digital currencies does not stop with individual central banks. In October, 2022, following an 18-month experiment on technologies and currencies, the financial messaging system SWIFT laid out a blueprint for a global central bank digital currency network.[63]  This information should be known by citizens of all countries, within the context of surveillance and programmability, and the decision should be a democratic one, through parliaments or referenda.

Conclusion

More than 20 years ago, while discussing who was eligible for Davos, Klaus Schwab told Forbes: “Forget it if you’re retired. Even if your former job was running France or General Electric, you must be in power. ‘No oldies.’”[64]

Twenty years later, the spectre of unelected power threatens peoples of the world with centralized control on a global scale.

What this power has done to the status of democracy is astutely summarized by Nick Buxton of the Transnational Institute:

Less well known is the fact that WEF since 2009 has been working on an ambitious project called the Global Redesign Initiative, (GRI), which effectively proposes a transition away from intergovernmental decision-making towards a system of multi-stakeholder governance. In other words, by stealth, they are marginalising a recognised model where we vote in governments who then negotiate treaties which are then ratified by our elected representatives, with a model where a self-selected group of ‘stakeholders’ make decisions on our behalf.

Advocates of multi-stakeholder governance argue that governments and intergovernmental forums, such as the UN, are no longer efficient places for tackling increasingly complex global crises. The founder of WEF, Klaus Schwab, says “the sovereign state has become obsolete”. WEF has created 40 Global Agenda Councils and industry-sector bodies, with the belief these are the best groups of people to develop proposals and ultimately decisions related to a whole gamut of global issues from climate change to cybersecurity.

Corporations are put at the heart of this model, because they provide in the view of Klaus Schwab and corporate elites, the possibilities of “agile” governance, drawing on the private sector’s experience of “adapting to a new, fast-changing environment”. Governments are encouraged to tackle every issue by allying with private sector in public-private partnerships. And a few carefully selected civil society representatives are invited in to legitimise the process. Questions of how issues are framed, who is chosen, from what sectors, for whose benefit, and accountable to whom are brushed under the carpet.[65]

The Transnational Institute, unlike the WEF, has a wise and specific mission statement much more likely to meet the UN’s Sustainable Development Goals:

The Transnational Institute (TNI) is an international research and advocacy institute committed to building a just, democratic and sustainable world. For nearly 50 years, TNI has served as a unique nexus between social movements, engaged scholars and policy makers.

TNI’s mission is to strengthen international social movements with rigorous research, reliable information, sound analysis and constructive proposals that advance progressive, democratic policy change and common solutions to global problems. In so doing, TNI acts as a unique nexus between social movements, engaged scholars and policy makers.[66]

The World Economic Forum, by contrast, is about power and money, not wisdom.  

Wisdom is the lived experience of the people.

Fortunately, there are signs that public awareness is beginning to triumph over the stealth of the self-appointed World Economic Forum.

In June 2022, the WEF quietly removed the publicly-despised words, “You will own nothing and be happy,” from its website.[67]

It is not too late.  Humanity still has a choice between two fundamental approaches to governance: The corporate power approach versus the slow and careful human consensus approach through intergovernmental agencies.  

Imperfect as it may be, democratic consensus will give us – in the words of Charles Eisenstein – “the more beautiful world our hearts know is possible.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Elizabeth Woodworth is highly engaged in climate change science and activism. She has published 42 articles on Global Research, is co-author of “Unprecedented Climate Mobilization”, “Unprecedented Crime: Climate Science Denial and Game Changers for Survival,” and co-producer of the COP21 video “A Climate Revolution For All.” She is author of the popular handbook on nuclear weapons activism, “What Can I Do?” and the novel, “The November Deep”. For 25 years, she served as head medical librarian for the BC Government. She holds a BA from Queen’s and a Library Sciences Degree from UBC.

She is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Notes

[1] The United Nations Charter is considered a treaty (https://www.un.org/en/about-us/un-charter). The preamble and Article 69 of the WHO Constitution provide that WHO be a specialized agency of the UN (https://www.who.int/about/history/). 

[2] The WEF finances their meetings and sets their agendas, thereby making the partnerships “private-public.”

[3] Malone Institute (https://maloneinstitute.org/wef).

[4] World Economic Forum, “What is stakeholder capitalism?” 22 January 2021(https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2021/01/klaus-schwab-on-what-is-stakeholder-capitalism-history-relevance/).

[5] Jason Fernando, “What Are Stakeholders: Definition, Types, and Examples,” Investopedia, 29 June 2022 (https://www.investopedia.com/terms/s/stakeholder.asp).

[6] https://www.srf.ch/news/schweiz/geld-fuer-sicherheit-am-wef-knurrende-zustimmung-vom-staenderat-zu-wef-geldern

[7] https://www.weforum.org/about/klaus-schwab

[8] Hudson Institute, “Ancillary Pilot Study for the Educational Policy Research Center Program. Final Report,” 28 June 1968 (https://archive.org/details/ERIC_ED024124/page/n20/mode/1up?q=europe; https://ia801308.us.archive.org/6/items/ERIC_ED024124/ERIC_ED024124.pdf).

[9] Johnny Vedmore, “Dr. Klaus Schwab or: How the CFR Taught Me to Stop Worrying and Love the Bomb,” Unlimited Hangout, 10 March 2022 (https://unlimitedhangout.com/2022/03/investigative-reports/dr-klaus-schwab-or-how-the-cfr-taught-me-to-stop-worrying-and-love-the-bomb/.)

[10] Johnny Vedmore, “Nazi Industrialism, Technocracy, Social Engineering: A History of Klaus Schwab’s Family Values,” SOTT: Signs of the Times, 28 February 2021 (https://www.sott.net/article/449477-Nazi-Industrialism-Technocracy-Social-Engineering-A-History-of-Klaus-Schwabs-Family-Values).

[11] WEF Strategic Partners (https://www.weforum.org/communities/strategic-partnership-b5337725-fac7-4f8a-9a4f-c89072b96a0d#P). 

[12] WEF Annual Report, 2021-2022, Revenue and Costs, p. 88 (https://www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_Annual_Report_2021_22.pdf.)

[13] Union of International Associations, ed., “Legal status of international NGOs: overview and options,” 1988, 1996 (https://www.laetusinpraesens.org/docs/statapp1.php).

[14] https://www.weforum.org/about/world-economic-forum

[15] World Economic Forum, “Davos Manifesto 1973: A Code of Ethics for Business Leaders,” 2 December 2019  (https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2019/12/davos-manifesto-1973-a-code-of-ethics-for-business-leaders/).

[16] SECRETARY-GENERAL LAUNCHES ‘PRINCIPLES FOR RESPONSIBLE INVESTMENT’ BACKED BY WORLD’S LARGEST INVESTORS, 27 April 2006 (https://press.un.org/en/2006/sg2111.doc.htm).

[17] World Economic Forum, Davis Manifesto 2020: The Universal Purpose of a Company in the Fourth Industrial Revolution,” 2 December 2019 (https://www.weforum.org/agenda/2019/12/davos-manifesto-2020-the-universal-purpose-of-a-company-in-the-fourth-industrial-revolution/); Betsy Atkins, “Demystifying ESG: Its History & Current Status,” Forbes, 8 June 2020 (https://www.forbes.com/sites/betsyatkins/2020/06/08/demystifying-esgits-history–current-status/?sh=402b97612cdd.)

[18] https://www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2022/programme

[19] The WEF governance structure is at https://www.weforum.org/about/leadership-and-governance.

[20] Julia Crawford, “Does Bill Gates have too much influence in the WHO?” SWI:Swissinfo.ch, 10 May 2021 (https://www.swissinfo.ch/eng/politics/does-bill-gates-have-too-much-influence-in-the-who-/46570526.) The Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, and agencies it funds such as the GAVI Alliance, together fund WHO 15-20%. 

[21] John LaMattina, “The Biopharmaceutical Industry Provides 75% of The FDA’s Drug Review Budget. Is this a problem?” Forbes, 28 June 2018 (https://www.forbes.com/sites/johnlamattina/2018/06/28/the-biopharmaceutical-industry-provides-75-of-the-fdas-drug-review-budget-is-this-a-problem/?sh=26c06a6649ec).

[22] Judith Garber, “CDC ‘disclaimers’ hide financial conflicts of interest,” Lown Institute, 6 November 2019 (https://lowninstitute.org/cdc-disclaimers-hide-financial-conflicts-of-interest/.)

[23] Mark Lynas, et al, “Greater than 99% consensus on human caused climate change in the peer-reviewed scientific literature,” Environ. Res. Lett., 19 October 2021 (https://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/1748-9326/ac2966).

[24] IPCC Report, AR6, Working Group 1, Ch. 1, Figure 1.9, p. 185 (https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar6/wg1/downloads/report/IPCC_AR6_WGI_Chapter01.pdf). See also:  https://www.realclimate.org/index.php/climate-model-projections-compared-to-observations/ and  https://www.bloomberg.com/opinion/articles/2020-01-30/1988-global-warming-forecast-by-james-hansen-proved-mostly-true?leadSource=uverify%20wall  

[25] Eamon Barrett, “’Status quo’ interests have prevented urgent action on climate change,” Fortune, 6 April 2022 (https://fortune.com/2022/04/06/ipcc-report-2022-climate-change-mitigation/).

[26] United States EPA, Global Greenhouse Gas Emissions Data, 25 February 2022  (https://www.epa.gov/ghgemissions/global-greenhouse-gas-emissions-data).

[27] Ibid.

[28] IMARC, “Top 9 Largest Fertilizer Companies in World 2022-2027,” 15 November 2021 (https://www.imarcgroup.com/fertilizer-companies). 

[29] “Globally, fossil fuel subsidies were $5.9 trillion or 6.8 percent of GDP in 2020 and are expected to increase to 7.4 percent of GDP in 2025.”  IMF, “Fossil Fuel Subsidies,” (https://www.imf.org/en/Topics/climate-change/energy-subsidies).

[30] International Institute for Sustainable Development, “Zombie Energy:  Climate benefits of ending subsidies to fossil fuel production,” IISD, February 2017, iv (http://www.iisd.org/sites/default/files/publications/zombie-energy-climate-benefits-ending-subsidies-fossil-fuel-production.pdf). 

[31] United Nations, “Five ways to jump-start the renewable energy transition now,” [2022] (https://www.un.org/en/climatechange/raising-ambition/renewable-energy-transition). 

[32] Mary Christina Wood, “Nature’s Trust: Environmental Law for a New Ecological Age,” Cambridge University Press, 2014, p. 143.

[33] Fen Montaigne, “A Legal Call to Arms to Remedy Environment and Climate Ills,” Yale Environment 260, 3 January 2014 (https://www.countercurrents.org/montaigne030114.htm.) 

[34] Mary Christina Wood, “Atmospheric Trust Litigation Across the World,” In: Charles Sampford, et al., Fiduciary Duty and the Atmospheric Trust, Routledge, 2012, 112.

[35] Joseph Orangias, “Towards global public trust doctrines: an analysis of the transnationalisation of state stewardship duties,” Transnational Legal Theory, 01 December 2021 (https://www.tandfonline.com/doi/full/10.1080/20414005.2021.2006030).

[36] https://www.weforum.org/organizations/boeing-company,  https://www.weforum.org/organizations/honeywell

[37] “Who Controls NATO?” 10 September 2022 (https://governmentfaq.com/who-controls-nato).

[38] “Bilderberg reconvenes in person after two-year pandemic gap,” The Guardian, 4 June 2022 (https://www.theguardian.com/world/2022/jun/04/bilderberg-reconvenes-in-person-after-two-year-pandemic-gap).

[39] United Nations Charter (full text), effective 24 October 1945  (https://www.un.org/en/about-us/un-charter/full-text). 

[40] John Mearsheimer, “Why the West is principally responsible for the Ukrainian crisis,” The Economist, 19 March 2022 (https://www.economist.com/by-invitation/2022/03/11/john-mearsheimer-on-why-the-west-is-principally-responsible-for-the-ukrainian-crisis).

[41] Monica Duffy Toft, “Ukraine:  A Classic Proxy War,” CounterPunch, 21 October 2022 (https://www.counterpunch.org/2022/10/21/ukraine-a-classic-proxy-war/). 

[42] https://unesdoc.unesco.org/ark:/48223/pf0000035806 

[43] United Nations, “General Assembly Takes Up Second Committee Reports, Adopting 38 Resolutions, 2 Decisions,” 14 December 2022 (https://press.un.org/en/2022/ga12482.doc.htm).

[44] https://twitter.com/Alfreddezayas/status/1537419260129120256?s=20&t=EY2y3l8oUnMjlC3xnbjBSw Website: http://bit.ly/11Q2e6j 

[45] Jeffrey Sachs, “A Mediator’s Guide to Peace in Ukraine,” 5 December 2022 (https://www.commondreams.org/views/2022/12/05/mediators-guide-peace-ukraine).

[46] Google Scholar search results, for United Nations Security Council international law reform, https://scholar.google.com/scholar?hl=en&as_sdt=0%2C5&q=United+Nations+Security+Council+international+law+reform&btnG= , and Legacy Media ethical reform, https://scholar.google.com/scholar?hl=en&as_sdt=0%2C5&q=Legacy+media+ethical+reform&btnG=

[47] Ioannidis J. “The infection fatality rate of COVID-19 inferred from seroprevalence data,” Bull World Health Organ., Epub Oct. 14, 2020 (https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33716331/). The British Medical Journal, citing this article, reported: “Clearly, mortality is age-stratified from covid-19. The corrected median estimates of IFP [Infection Fatality Rate] for people aged lower than 70 years is currently 0.05%, [2] which, for the population less vulnerable to deaths, is similar to influenza. However overall estimates for covid-19 are higher [i.e., 0.23%], due to the higher fatality rate in elderly people.” BMJ October 6, 2020 (https://www.bmj.com/content/371/bmj.m3883/rr).

[48] Christina Sathyamala, “COVID-19: A Biopolitical Odyssey,” The Institute of Social Studies, Erasmus University, Rotterdam, “Working Paper No. 667, p. 10, December 2020 (https://pure.eur.nl/en/publications/covid-19-a-biopolitical-odyssey ).

[49] Luc Bonneuxb and Wim Van Dammec, “Health is more than influenza,” Bull World Health Organ. 2011 Jul 1; 89(7): 539–540 (https://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC3127278/).  

[50] https://www.who.int/about/governance/constitution

[51] https://apps.who.int/gb/bd/PDF/bd47/EN/constitution-en.pdf?ua=1

[52] Berkeley Lovelace Jr. “CDC study finds about 78% of people hospitalized for Covid were overweight or obese,” CNBC, 8 March 2021 (https://www.cnbc.com/2021/03/08/covid-cdc-study-finds-roughly-78percent-of-people-hospitalized-were-overweight-or-obese.html).

[53] Dieter De Smet, et al., “Serum 25(OH)D Level on Hospital Admission Associated With COVID-19 Stage and Mortality,” Am J Clin Pathol., 2021 Feb 11;155(3):381-388 (https://pubmed.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/33236114/).

[54] Julia Crawford, “Does Bill Gates have too much influence in the WHO?” SWI:Swissinfo.ch, 10 May 2021.

[55] John LaMattina, “The Biopharmaceutical Industry Provides 75% of The FDA’s Drug Review Budget. Is this a problem?” Forbes, 28 June 2018. 

[56] Judith Garber, “CDC ‘disclaimers’ hide financial conflicts of interest,” Lown Institute, 6 November 2019.

[57] This home page shows over 2000 early Covid treatment studies: (https://c19early.org/).

[58] Dr. Chris Shoemaker, Interview, circa December 12, 2022, 0:29 at https://twitter.com/ZN2_______/status/1602417793609396224?s=20&t=inNOCD9vLInCurZ6gigIag; also https://media.gab.com/system/media_attachments/files/122/948/504/playable/99f2ba7cbe095648.mp4.

[59] US FDA. “Emergency Use Authorization of Medical Products and Related Authorities: Guidance for Industry and Other Stakeholders,” January 2017 (https://www.fda.gov/regulatory-information/search-fda-guidance-documents/emergency-use-authorization-medical-products-and-related-authorities).

[60] https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Twitter_Files 

[61] Dr. Chris Martenson, CEO of the Peak Prosperity website; private communication to author, 7 December, 2022.

[62] Josh Stylman, “From Covid to CBDC: The Path to Full Control” Brownstone Institute, 21 November 2022 (https://brownstone.org/articles/covid-to-cbdc-to-full-control/). 

[63] Marc Jones, “SWIFT sets out blueprint for central bank digital currency network,” Reuters, 5 October 2022 (https://www.reuters.com/technology/swift-sets-out-blueprint-central-bank-digital-currency-network-2022-10-05/).

[64] Forbes, “Power Broker,” 15 November 1999 (https://www.forbes.com/global/1999/1115/0223108a.html?sh=282a91147e11.)

[65] Nick Buxton, “Davos and its Danger to Democracy,” Transnational Institute, 18 January 2016 (https://www.tni.org/en/article/davos-and-its-danger-to-democracy). 

[66] https://www.tni.org/en

[67] Baxter Dmitry, “WEF Caught Scrubbing ‘You Will Own Nothing and Be Happy’ Post From Internet,” NewsPunch, 9 June 2022 (https://newspunch.com/wef-caught-scrubbing-you-will-own-nothing-and-be-happy-post-from-internet/).

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

When one hears and sees Israel’s Prime Minister Netanyahu, declaring the absolute supremacy of his Zionist tribe and its goals of ‘taking back’ the State of Israel – via the slaughter of any and all Palestinian ‘animals’ whose home land is the Gaza Strip – one is confronting face to face, a clinically insane individual whose medical condition, if it were to be officially assessed, would be described as ‘psychopath’.

In a properly functioning society such a person would be hospitalised and made to undergo special psychological and medical treatment, or would be sent to an asylum where he would not be a threat to the outside world.

However, we are not living in a properly functioning society. We are living in a time where those in charge of all the main arteries of global decision making are either sub human, clinically insane, or both.

This is not a situation anyone would choose as their preferred form of governance. But on the other hand, it has been permitted to come about due to a widespread abdication of the responsibility we all share, to deal with lies, deceptions and basic thuggery taking place much closer to home. And which, due to our failure to deal with them    now form an integral part of the globalist agenda shaping every aspect of our lives.

Failing to confront injustice in one’s own backyard is the same as failing to treat the early signs of a sickness in one’s body. The end result, in both cases, is to suffer far worse consequences down the road.

But now, like it or not, we are further down that very road and staring us in the face is a monster we have no way of hiding from. 

A monster, I contend, that is at least 50% our own making. The outward expression of a fear of confronting inner demons – and an unwillingness to stand courageously in defence of fundamental moral values which constitute the implacable foundation stones of a sane society.

The other 50% of that which stands behind the existence of this monster, comes from something extra terrestrial hatched by outside forces beyond our immediate control. And outside the capacity of the majority of mankind to recognise or identify – and therefore fail to recognise as a real threat to their futures.

But two events of unparalleled significance have started to change this: Covid and Gaza. 

Suddenly, right in the foreground, we witness figureheads holding high levels of office, mercilessly condemning hundreds of thousands of human beings to a life of highly visible depravation, agony and death. And this, with utter impunity and not a trace of guilt; but with an air of someone quite alien and possessed.

This is a state of deep psychosis. Someone suffering it can justly be described as ‘clinically insane’.

When the World Economic Summit and the Bilderberg club convene each year, the venue is filled with insane megalomaniacs discussing how to impose their rampant megalomania on the rest of us. 

Their insanity comes dressed up in various guises of which the current favourites are

  • Artificial Intelligence replacing human intelligence by 2035
  • Artificial lab food replacing real food grown in soil by circa 2030
  • ‘Net Zero’ carbon replacing oxygen by 2050
  • The confiscation of our personal assets – so as to make us ‘happy’ – by 2030
  • The removal of any degree of privacy, freedom of speech and human rights, also by around 2030
  • A Central Bank Digital Currency to replace physical bank notes, by circa 2026
  • War machines programmed to self select ‘enemy collateral’ at the push of a button, 2025?

After which time the ‘Transhuman’ AI computer cyborg entity is supposed to become ascendant  – and real men and women pretty much obsolete. Except those useful as slaves and play things for the psychos. 

This is only an abbreviated summary of some key points that, as most of us know already, the monster has in store for us unless knocked off course. I have outlined them in order to illustrate how the psychopath agenda has no basis in rational thinking, human empathy or any form of justice.

It is cold, metallic and schematic. It thrives on chaos, the blood of innocents and sacrificial offerings to Masonic and Luciferian extra terrestrial overlords.

Now, having digested this essentially indigestible Hieronymus Bosh portrait of the dire state of our planet, we need to consider what options we warm hearted humans have to get through this global ‘Dark Night of the Soul’ and emerge victorious.

Facing us very directly in the Spring of 2024, is a major plank in the deep state totalitarian agenda – but also a unique opportunity for ‘we the resistance’: The WHO ‘Pandemic Preparedness Plan.’ We need to specifically put our best energies into ensuring the defeat of this planned fascist take over of human health.

Success here will constitute a huge set back for the architects of human suffering – and give us new momentum for further victories to come.

The WHO plan is ready to roll out should there be majority acceptance of its proposal to enshrine itself as the central controlling agent of all planetary health decisions.

However, in ‘we the people’s’ favour is the fact that we got a huge eye opening ‘initiation kick’ via the great 2021/22 Covid deception; all be it a tragic and ongoing one. 

The rate of uptake of booster shots has declined dramatically in the last six months in almost all countries. There is a marked level of distrust and cynicism concerning official proclamations about what one ‘must do to be safe’. Cynicism is an essential part of breaking ranks with a captured status quo. We must now build on it – bravely and fast.

In store for us in plans being hatched by the combined pharmaceutical and military industrial industrial project – to be enforced by the WHO –  is a threefold more drastic ‘lock down’ program than we suffered in 2021/22. 

According to courageous activist Dr Bret Weinstein, closing the gate on 2021/22 errors of judgement by big pharma, will involve the redefinition of ‘a public health emergency’ and the re-mandating of the mRNA vaccine as the most effective weapon for dealing with the next human culling operation.

Additional remedies, reports Weinstein, will require citizens to endure ‘gene therapy technology’; a ban on the use of other medicines; highly restricted travel – and much more.  All within the context of a general overriding of the constitution of individual nation states. 

The psychos and their corporate henchmen are going all out to cut off a growing level of bottom-up suspicion concerning the motives of those in high office.

If the momentum of growing awareness can move up a notch and be turned into a significant scale rejection, our chances of an enhanced level of people’s resistance will be greatly increased and significantly strengthened. 

The greatest danger to the realisation of such positive progress is what Weinstein identifies as “People’s willingness to expect to loose their rights when a health emergency is called.”

‘People’s willingness to expect to loose their rights’. 

For the psychos, maintaining such a level of mass indoctrination is the key to moving their sick agenda forward and locking into place a global totalitarian regime which places mankind under permanent house arrest.

This year, 2024, could prove decisive in the battle ‘humans-v-psychos’. 

Our task is clear: rip away the already decaying veil behind which hide our sickly tormentors, laying bare those who only know to deceive mankind into slavish submission to their demented prison camp.

Be bold, good people, we know we are gifted with the powers necessary to fight for that day when the light finally penetrates the darkness and we who honour and treasure our unique inheritance – burst through, declaring a glorious victory for freedom, truth, love and justice!

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Julian Rose is an organic farmer, writer, broadcaster and international activist. He is author of four books of which the latest ‘Overcoming the Robotic Mind’ is a clarion call to resist the despotic New World Order takeover of our lives. Do visit his website for further information www.julianrose.info

He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The threat of a new pandemic and so-called “misinformation.” The future of democracy. The future impact of artificial intelligence (AI) in society. The “green agenda.”

These were just some of the topics on the agenda at the annual meeting of the World Economic Forum (WEF) in Davos, Switzerland, which concluded today.

Some of the highlights of this year’s meeting included warnings of how a yet-unknown “Disease X” may cause the next pandemic, discussions on how AI could lead to the rapid development of new vaccines, and talk about how AI could either fall victim to — or filter out — so-called “misinformation” and “disinformation.”

‘We don’t want to wait a year before we get the vaccine’

Warnings were accompanied by more optimistic — from the perspective of the meeting’s participants — outlooks about the role AI could play in tackling future pandemics, such as through the rapid development of new vaccines.

Jeremy Hunt, the U.K.’s chancellor of the Exchequer, said during a Thursday panel discussion — in which Pfizer CEO Albert Bourla participated — that “when we have the next pandemic, we don’t want to have to wait a year before we get the vaccine.”

“If AI can shrink the time it takes to get that vaccine to a month, then that is a massive step forward for humanity,” Hunt said.

Digital ID ‘Very Necessary’ for Tracking the Unvaccinated

During another Thursday panel discussion, Queen Máxima of the Netherlands said that digital ID is “very necessary” for the provision of a range of public services — and suggested that it can be used to track the unvaccinated.

Digital ID “is very necessary for financial services, but not only. It is also good for school enrollment, it is also good for health — who actually got a vaccination or not,” she said.

Bourla elaborated on the possibilities he sees for AI in the realm of healthcare.

Answering a question from CNN journalist Fareed Zakaria, Bourla said,

“Our job is to make breakthroughs that change patients’ lives. With AI, I can do it faster and I can do it better.”

One example identified by Bourla was the role AI played in developing Paxlovid, a prescription oral medication marketed as a treatment for COVID-19.

“It was developed in four months,” Bourla said, whereas development of such a drug “usually takes four years.” He said AI helped significantly reduce the amount of time needed for the “drug discovery” process, where “You really synthesize millions of molecules and then you try to discover within them, which one works.”

He credited this breakthrough with saving “millions of lives.”

“I truly believe that we are about to enter a scientific renaissance in life sciences because of this coexistence of advancements in technology and biology,” Bourla said. “AI is a very powerful tool. In the hands of bad people [it] can do bad things for the world, but in the hands of good people [it] can do great things for the world.”

World Health Organization Director-General Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus warned on Wednesday during the “Preparing for Disease X” panel discussion that the world must prepare for a future pandemic, which may be caused by a yet-unknown “Disease X.”

Panelists warned that “Disease X” — which is included in the WHO’s list of “priority diseases” — could “result in 20 times more fatalities than the coronavirus pandemic.”

Aside from “Disease X,” Tedros and other participants on the panel also discussed the need for a “pandemic agreement” and the urgency of having it approved at this year’s World Health Assembly, to be held between May 27 and June 1 in Geneva.

‘We’re going to have digital doctors, digital people’

During the “Technology in a Turbulent World” panel, panelists offered predictions as to other ways in which AI is likely to become integrated into people’s lives.

Marc Benioff, chair and CEO of Salesforce, said that while “AI is really not at a point where we’re replacing human beings, it’s really at a point where we’re augmenting them.”

He cited, as hypothetical examples, the possibility that WEF participants could ask an AI application such as ChatGPT “what’s some good questions I could ask” during their panel, or that radiologists could use AI “to help read my CT scan into my MRI.”

“We’re just about to get to that breakthrough where we’re going to go, ‘Wow, it’s almost like it’s a digital person,” Benioff said. However, reflecting the theme of this year’s WEF meeting — “Rebuilding Trust” — he added, “When we get to that point, we’re going to ask ourselves, ‘Do we trust it?’”

“We’re going to have digital doctors, digital people, these digital people are going to merge and there’s going to have to be a level of trust,” Benioff said.

Similarly, Sam Altman, CEO of OpenAI — which maintains a partnership with Microsoft — said that AI will help “everyone’s job … operate at a little bit higher of a level of abstraction.”

“We will all have access to a lot more capability and we’ll still make decisions. They may trend more towards curation over time, but we’ll make decisions about what should happen in the world,” he said.

Julie Sweet, chair and CEO of Accenture, also expressed optimism over AI’s future role, saying that AI is “massively going to improve social services.”

To build “trust,” Benioff called for more regulation, alluding to the social media ecosystem and “misinformation” on such platforms.

“We have to also turn to those regulators and say, ‘Hey, if you look at social media over the last decade, it’s been kind of a f***ing s**t show.’ It’s pretty bad. We don’t want that in our AI industry. We want to have a good healthy partnership with these moderators and with these regulators.”

Altman suggested that one way to develop such “partnerships” is to train AI to locate and identify information from certain preferred sources.

He said:

“What we want to do with the content owners, like The New York Times and deals that we have done with many other publishers, and we’ll do more over time, is when a user says, ‘Hey, ChatGPT, what happened at Davos today?,’ we would like to display content, link out, show brands of places like The New York Times or the Wall Street Journal or any other great publication and say, ‘Here’s what happened today. Here’s this real-time information.’”

Bourla also called for more regulation of AI, saying that while he was “certain right now that the benefits clearly outweigh the risks,” he feels “we need regulation right now.”

Hunt, however, said that minimal regulation is the best approach at this time.

“I think we need to be light touch because … it’s such an emerging stage. You can kill the golden goose before it has a chance to grow,” he said.

AI Could be Used to Educate Students About ‘Misinformation’

WEF leaders also addressed the future role of AI in education, in particular during the WEF’s “Education Meets AI” panel on Thursday.

According to Forbes, panelists, including government officials from Slovenia and the United Arab Emirates, suggested that AI will provide “novel opportunities for deeply personalized learning and tutoring.”

Ahmad bin Abdullah Humaid Belhoul Al Falasi, minister of education of the United Arab Emirates, called this “democratic tutoring,” suggesting that AI would provide “scalable” tutoring “available to all” outside the classroom, which will supplement classroom teaching and which “leaves the hardest part — the soft skills — to teachers.”

Nzinga Qunta, an anchor with the South African Broadcasting Corporation, suggested that such tutoring would not be restricted in terms of age or physical space.

Panelists also provided reassurances that AI would not lead to the elimination of human jobs — but suggested that people won’t lose their jobs due to AI “but by people who know how to use AI,” Forbes reported.

The “risk of mis- and disinformation” was also highlighted during the discussion, with panelists suggesting that “critical thinking” can enable students to identify the “hazardous” risks of “misinformation” and “disinformation.”

‘Misinformation’ Can Lead to ‘Civil Unrest’

Misinformation” was indeed highly prominent on the agenda of this year’s WEF meeting. The WEF’s Global Risks Report, released Jan. 10, named “misinformation” and “disinformation” derived from AI as the top risk facing the world over the next two years, and the fifth-highest risk over the next decade.

According to the report, “Foreign and domestic actors alike will leverage misinformation and disinformation to widen societal and political divides” in the next two years, posing a risk to elections in countries such as the U.S., U.K. and India and a risk of “civil unrest” across the world.

“What’s more, false information and societal polarization are inherently intertwined, with potential to amplify each other,” according to Saadia Zahidi, the WEF’s managing director, for which “innovation and trustworthy decision-making” are required. However, she said this “is only possible in a world with alignment on the facts.”

‘There is a risk the wrong leaders are elected’

The WEF’s warnings about the “threat” of “misinformation” and “disinformation” is closely aligned with fears expressed by WEF meeting participants regarding how AI could impact democracy and the electoral process.

In recent days, a video went viral on social media showing WEF co-founder and chairman Klaus Schwab in a discussion with Sergey Brin, co-founder and former president of Google. Schwab suggested a hypothetical scenario where “you do not even have to have elections anymore” because AI “can already predict the winner” — a scenario Brin did not explicitly dismiss.

Even though that video was frequently presented in social media posts as originating from this year’s WEF meeting, it is actually from a discussion at the WEF’s annual meeting in 2017. Yet, other statements at this year’s meeting also referenced elections and governance.

During a panel discussion today on “Global Risks: What’s in the Mail?Haslinda Amin, Bloomberg News’ chief international correspondent for Southeast Asia, suggested “there is a risk the wrong leaders are elected” in this year’s elections in key countries.

Responding to Amin, Douglas L. Peterson, president and CEO of S&P Global, said this “is one of the top risks for this year” and added, “We also need to make sure we stay engaged through global institutions, like the UN, like NATO.”

And during his special address at the WEF meeting, António Guterres, the United Nation’s secretary-general, called for “effective mechanisms of global governance” as part of “a new multipolar global order.”

Building ‘International Economic Order’ Required to Tackle ‘Climate Crisis’

Numerous WEF meeting participants also warned about the risks posed by climate change — and used the opportunity to call for more money and investments for “green” initiatives.

Speaking earlier this week at the WEF meeting, John Kerry, U.S. special presidential envoy for climate, said 2023 “was literally the most disruptive, climate-disrupted, most climate consequential, negative year in human history,” and that as a result, there is no more “space for debate or, frankly, procrastination any longer.”

To respond to this, WEF meeting participants said more money is needed. For instance, Tharman Shanmugaratnam, president of Singapore, said “governments are going to have to invest significantly more than they’ve invested before.”

And according to Chrystia Freeland, deputy prime minister of Canada, government intervention is needed as part of the transition away from carbon — a process which she said will create “more jobs, more growth, more manufacturing.”

The price tag for such interventions, according to Christine Lagarde, president of the European Central Bank, is “no less than 620 billion per year to actually move the green transition further.”

When confronted on the streets of Davos Thursday by True North Media journalist Andrew Lawton, Lagarde dodged questions about whether central bank digital currencies, such as the digital euro introduced by Lagarde, could be used to control people.

“I’m not speaking because I’m in a quiet period,” was Lagarde’s response.

In another confrontation on Davos’ streets, Rebel News reporters targeted Philipp Hildebrand, vice chairman of BlackRock, one of the world’s largest investment firms, asking him a series of questions about BlackRock’s support for “ESG” — environmental, social and corporate governance.

Hildebrand did not respond to any of the reporters’ questions.

And Jake Sullivan, national security adviser of the U.S., tied several threads together, suggesting on Tuesday during a special address that “the international economic order” could be built or updated “in ways that … address the climate crisis.”

More than 60 heads of state and 1,600 business leaders were among this year’s 2,800 participants from 120 countries.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Michael Nevradakis, Ph.D., based in Athens, Greece, is a senior reporter for The Defender and part of the rotation of hosts for CHD.TV’s “Good Morning CHD.”

Featured image is from CHD

capitalism

The Transnational Capitalist Class. The Billionaires, The Trillionaires. “Stakeholder Capitalism” and the New World Order

By Rick Thomas, January 21, 2024

In 2011, the Great British Class Survey was conducted, in collaboration with academics from the University of Manchester, the London School of Economics, and the University of York. The British have always been obsessed with class, so it is not surprising that British academics would attempt something of this nature.

Reflections on Racism, “Coloniality of Power”, Mal-Development and Contemporary Capitalism

By Tina Renier, January 21, 2024

Several Caribbean countries including Jamaica and Belize have expressed an active interest in decolonising their constitutions and transition from a parliamentary democracy to a republic. While these efforts and proposals aimed at national self-determination are commendable, the racialization and colonial infrastructure of social institutions remain highly visible to social activists in Jamaica.

The World Economic Forum (WEF) –United Nations Partnership Constitutes “A Global Corporate Takeover”

By Jacob Nordangard, January 21, 2024

A reader of my latest Substack article, G20, BRICS, WEF and the “building of a just world and a sustainable planet”, notified me of an open letter, from September 2019, where over 400 civil society organisations and 40 international networks condemned the 2019 groundbreaking partnership between World Economic Forum and United Nations (which I became aware of in 2020 and have been trying to alert the world to in my books, articles, interviews, and lectures).

Thousands of Babies Being Born Into ‘Hell’ in Gaza, Says UNICEF

By Julia Conley, January 21, 2024

With the Israel Defense Forces continuing to block supplies from reaching shelters, refugee camps, and hospitals in Gaza, humanitarian workers are warning that there is “no end in sight” for the horrors facing an estimated 55,000 pregnant women as well as postpartum parents and newborns.

Attacks on the Houthis by the US and UK Have Escalated the Situation in the Red Sea Shipping Lane. Interview with Suat Delgen

By Suat Delgen and Steven Sahiounie, January 21, 2024

The Houthis in Yemen have been attacking ships in the Red Sea which are associated with Israel or the US in response to the ongoing genocide in Gaza being carried out by Israel, who is supported by the US with all weapons and funding. US President Joe Biden continues to refuse all international calls for a ceasefire in Gaza.

The Two Wars of the West: America Targets Europe as Well as the Middle East. Manlio Dinucci

By Manlio Dinucci, January 21, 2024

We are embroiled in two wars, in Europe and the Middle East, which have increasingly serious consequences for our living conditions and security.  

It’s All About Me: Netanyahu Rejects Palestinian Statehood

By Dr. Binoy Kampmark, January 21, 2024

The latest remarks from Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on January 18 suggest that the license also extends to ensuring that Palestinians will never be permitted a sovereign homeland, that they will be, in a perverse biblical echo, kept in a form of bondage, downtrodden, oppressed and, given what happened on October 7 last year, suppressed. 

Technocratic Victory for China? Cold War 2.0 in the Year of the Red Dragon

By Michael Welch, Patrick Wood, and Pepe Escobar, January 21, 2024

According to the U.S. Department of Defense 2022 National Defense Strategy, the People’s Republic of China “remains our most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades” and quoting President Biden’s National Security Strategy, the PRC is “the most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades.”

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea

By Lucas Leiroz de Almeida, January 21, 2024

In a recent statement, American retired General Philip Breedlove, former NATO Supreme Allied Commander Europe, stated that the West should send heavy weapons to Kiev to enable intense attacks on the Crimea region. According to Breedlove, only by attacking Russian positions in the Black Sea will Ukraine be able to make Moscow “rethink its posture”.

Evisceration of the United Nations Security Council. A Historical Analysis. The Gulf War

By Carla Stea, January 20, 2024

Calls for a ceasefire from around the world are ignored, and, most shamefully of all,  the United Nations Security Council, whose mandate requires it to uphold global peace and security, has, to date, remained impotent, failing to draft any resolution which would demand a cessation of the bombing; and despite the fact that United Nations workers themselves have also been killed as a consequence of the assault on Gaza, the Security Council has completely failed, as of this writing, to produce any resolutions which would halt this collective punishment of the Palestinians, which is now described as genocide.

Gaza: A Textbook Case of Genocide

January 22nd, 2024 by Raz Segal

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

[First published on GR in October 2023]

On Friday, Israel ordered the besieged population in the northern half of the Gaza Strip to evacuate to the south, warning that it would soon intensify its attack on the Strip’s upper half. The order has left more than a million people, half of whom are children, frantically attempting to flee amid continuing airstrikes, in a walled enclave where no destination is safe.

As Palestinian journalist Ruwaida Kamal Amer wrote today from Gaza, “refugees from the north are already arriving in Khan Younis, where the missiles never stop and we’re running out of food, water, and power.” The UN has warned that the flight of people from the northern part of Gaza to the south will create “devastating humanitarian consequences” and will “transform what is already a tragedy into a calamitous situation.”

Over the last week, Israel’s violence against Gaza has killed more than 1,800 Palestinians, injured thousands, and displaced more than 400,000 within the strip. And yet Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu promised today that what we have seen is “only the beginning.”

Israel’s campaign to displace Gazans—and potentially expel them altogether into Egypt—is yet another chapter in the Nakba, in which an estimated 750,000 Palestinians were driven from their homes during the 1948 war that led to the creation of the State of Israel. But the assault on Gaza can also be understood in other terms: as a textbook case of genocide unfolding in front of our eyes. I say this as a scholar of genocide, who has spent many years writing about Israeli mass violence against Palestinians. I have written about settler colonialism and Jewish supremacy in Israel, the distortion of the Holocaust to boost the Israeli arms industry, the weaponization of antisemitism accusations to justify Israeli violence against Palestinians, and the racist regime of Israeli apartheid. Now, following Hamas’s attack on Saturday and the mass murder of more than 1,000 Israeli civilians, the worst of the worst is happening.

Under international law, the crime of genocide is defined by “the intent to destroy, in whole or in part, a national, ethnical, racial or religious group, as such,” as noted in the December 1948 UN Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide. In its murderous attack on Gaza, Israel has loudly proclaimed this intent. Israeli Minister of Defense Yoav Gallant declared it in no uncertain terms on October 9th:

“We are imposing a complete siege on Gaza. No electricity, no food, no water, no fuel. Everything is closed. We are fighting human animals, and we will act accordingly.”

Leaders in the West reinforced this racist rhetoric by describing Hamas’s mass murder of Israeli civilians—a war crime under international law that rightly provoked horror and shock in Israel and around the world—as “an act of sheer evil,” in the words of US President Joe Biden, or as a move that reflected an “ancient evil,” in the terminology of President of the European Commission Ursula von der Leyen. This dehumanizing language is clearly calculated to justify the wide scale destruction of Palestinian lives; the assertion of “evil,” in its absolutism, elides distinctions between Hamas militants and Gazan civilians, and occludes the broader context of colonization and occupation.

The UN Genocide Convention lists five acts that fall under its definition. Israel is currently perpetrating three of these in Gaza:

“1. Killing members of the group.

2. Causing serious bodily or mental harm to members of the group.

3. Deliberately inflicting on the group conditions of life calculated to bring about its physical destruction in whole or in part.”

The Israeli Air Force, by its own account, has so far dropped more than 6,000 bombs on Gaza, which is one of the most densely populated areas in the world—almost as many bombs as the US dropped on all of Afghanistan during record-breaking years of its war there. Human Rights Watch has confirmed that the weapons used included phosphorous bombs, which set fire to bodies and buildings, creating flames that aren’t extinguished on contact with water. This demonstrates clearly what Gallant means by “act accordingly”: not targeting individual Hamas militants, as Israel claims, but unleashing deadly violence against Palestinians in Gaza “as such,” in the language of the UN Genocide Convention. Israel has also intensified its 16-year siege of Gaza—the longest in modern history, in clear violation of international humanitarian law—to a “complete siege,” in Gallant’s words. This turn of phrase that explicitly indexes a plan to bring the siege to its final destination of systematic destruction of Palestinians and Palestinian society in Gaza, by killing them, starving them, cutting off their water supplies, and bombing their hospitals.

It’s not only Israel’s leaders who are using such language. An interviewee on the pro-Netanyahu Channel 14 called for Israel to “turn Gaza to Dresden.” Channel 12, Israel’s most-watched news station, published a report about left-leaning Israelis calling to “dance on what used to be Gaza.” Meanwhile, genocidal verbs—calls to “erase” and “flatten” Gaza—have become omnipresent on Israeli social media. In Tel Aviv, a banner reading “Zero Gazans” was seen hanging from a bridge.

Indeed, Israel’s genocidal assault on Gaza is quite explicit, open, and unashamed. Perpetrators of genocide usually do not express their intentions so clearly, though there are exceptions. In the early 20th century, for example, German colonial occupiers perpetrated a genocide in response to an uprising by the Indigenous Herero and Nama populations in southwest Africa. In 1904, General Lothar von Trotha, the German military commander, issued an “extermination order,” justified by the rationale of a “race war.” By 1908, the German authorities had murdered 10,000 Nama, and had achieved their stated goal of “destroying the Herero,” killing 65,000 Herero, 80% of the population. Gallant’s orders on October 9th were no less explicit. Israel’s goal is to destroy the Palestinians of Gaza. And those of us watching around the world are derelict in our responsibility to prevent them from doing so.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Palestinians in Gaza’s smallest refugee camp have once again found themselves digging the bodies of their relatives out from under rubble, hours after Israeli forces announced their withdrawal from the area.

Witnesses in the Maghazi refugee camp say many of the residents were shot at close range by Israeli soldiers “in cold blood”.

Piles of broken concrete and scenes of widespread destruction are evidence that homes were not spared in Israeli attacks, which included missile strikes and heavy artillery shelling.

Israeli soldiers have been conducting ground operations in northern, central, and parts of southern Gaza, for more than three months.

Maghazi camp has come under Israeli attack several times over the last few weeks.

In one of the deadliest attacks last month, more than 100 people were killed, mostly displaced women and children.

Dozens more have been reported killed in the camp in the past several days.

Ambulances have been unable to navigate destroyed roads and infrastructure in order to recover the bodies.

The camp normally houses about 30,000 people, according to the United Nations Relief and Works Agency for Palestinians in the Near East (UNRWA).

But the population of the camp rose to at least 100,000 as thousands more frightened Palestinians came there seeking shelter from Israel’s relentless bombardment in other parts of the besieged enclave.

Click here to read the full article on Al Jazeera.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles. 

Featured image: The UN says nearly 1.9 million people have now been displaced in Gaza. [AbdelHakim Abu Riash/Al Jazeera]

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the “Translate Website” drop down menu on the top banner of our home page (Desktop version).

Visit and follow us on Instagram at @crg_globalresearch.

First published on August 25, 2021

***

As a tsunami of crocodile tears engulfs Western politicians, history is suppressed. More than a generation ago, Afghanistan won its freedom, which the United States, Britain and their “allies” destroyed.

In 1978, a liberation movement led by the People’s Democratic Party of Afghanistan (PDPA) overthrew the dictatorship of Mohammad Dawd, the cousin of King Zahir Shar. It was an immensely popular revolution that took the British and Americans by surprise.

Foreign journalists in Kabul, reported the New York Times, were surprised to find that “nearly every Afghan they interviewed said [they were] delighted with the coup”. The Wall Street Journal reported that “150,000 persons … marched to honour the new flag …the participants appeared genuinely enthusiastic.”

The Washington Post reported that “Afghan loyalty to the government can scarcely be questioned”. Secular, modernist and, to a considerable degree, socialist, the government declared a programme of visionary reforms that included equal rights for women and minorities. Political prisoners were freed and police files publicly burned.

Under the monarchy, life expectancy was thirty-five; one in three children died in infancy. Ninety per cent of the population was illiterate. The new government introduced free medical care. A mass literacy campaign was launched.

For women, the gains had no precedent; by the late 1980s, half the university students were women, and women made up 40 per cent of Afghanistan’s doctors, 70 per cent of its teachers and 30 per cent of its civil servants.

So radical were the changes that they remain vivid in the memories of those who benefited. Saira Noorani, a female surgeon who fled Afghanistan in 2001, recalled:

“Every girl could go to high school and university. We could go where we wanted and wear what we liked … We used to go to cafes and the cinema to see the latest Indian films on a Friday … it all started to go wrong when the mujahedin started winning … these were the people the West supported.”

For the United States, the problem with the PDPA government was that it was supported by the Soviet Union. Yet it was never the “puppet” derided in the West, neither was the coup against the monarchy “Soviet backed”, as the American and British press claimed at the time.

President Jimmy Carter’s Secretary of State, Cyrus Vance, later wrote in his memoirs: “We had no evidence of any Soviet complicity in the coup.”

In the same administration was Zbigniew Brzezinski, Carter’s National Security Adviser, a Polish émigré and fanatical anti-communist and moral extremist whose enduring influence on American presidents expired only with his death in 2017.

On 3 July 1979, unknown to the American people and Congress, Carter authorised a $500 million “covert action” programme to overthrow Afghanistan’s first secular, progressive government.  This was code-named by the CIA Operation Cyclone.

The $500 million bought, bribed and armed a group of tribal and religious zealots known as the mujahedin. In his semi-official history,Washington Post reporter Bob Woodward wrote that the CIA spent $70 million on bribes alone. He describes a meeting between a CIA agent known as “Gary” and a warlord called Amniat-Melli:

“Gary placed a bundle of cash on the table: $500,000 in one-foot stacks of $100 bills. He believed it would be more impressive than the usual $200,000, the best way to say we’re here, we’re serious, here’s money, we know you need it … Gary would soon ask CIA headquarters for and receive $10 million in cash.”

Recruited from all over the Muslim world, America’s secret army was trained in camps in Pakistan run by Pakistani intelligence, the CIA and Britain’s MI6. Others were recruited at an Islamic College in Brooklyn, New York – within sight of the doomed Twin Towers. One of the recruits was a Saudi engineer called Osama bin Laden.

The aim was to spread Islamic fundamentalism in Central Asia and destabilise and eventually destroy the Soviet Union.  

In August, 1979, the US Embassy in Kabul reported that “the United States’ larger interests … would be served by the demise of the PDPA government, despite whatever setbacks this might mean for future social and economic reforms in Afghanistan.”

Read again the words above I have italicised. It is not often that such cynical intent is spelt out as clearly.  The US was saying that a genuinely progressive Afghan government and the rights of Afghan women could go to hell.

Six months later, the Soviets made their fatal move into Afghanistan in response to the American-created jihadist threat on their doorstep. Armed with CIA-supplied Stinger missiles and celebrated as “freedom fighters” by Margaret Thatcher, the mujahedin eventually drove the Red Army out of Afghanistan.

Calling themselves the Northern Alliance, the mujahedin were dominated by war lords who controlled the heroin trade and terrorised rural women. The Taliban were an ultra-puritanical faction, whose mullahs wore black and punished banditry, rape and murder but banished women from public life.

In the 1980s, I made contact with the Revolutionary Association of the Women of Afghanistan, known as RAWA, which had tried to alert the world to the suffering of Afghan women. During the Taliban time they concealed cameras beneath their burqas to film evidence of atrocities, and did the same to expose the brutality of the Western-backed mujahedin. “Marina” of RAWA told me, “We took the videotape to all the main media groups, but they didn’t want to know ….”

In 1996, the enlightened PDPA government was overrun. The President, Mohammad Najibullah, had gone to the United Nations to appeal to for help. On his return, he was hanged from a street light.

“I confess that [countries] are pieces on a chessboard,” said Lord Curzon in 1898, “upon which is being played out a great game for the domination of the world.”

Image on the right: “Photo Op”. Credit: Imperial War Museum/Peter Kennard & Cat Philips (2005)

The Viceroy of India was referring in particular to Afghanistan. A century later, Prime Minister Tony Blair used slightly different words.

“This is a moment to seize,” he said following 9/11. “The Kaleidoscope has been shaken. The pieces are in flux. Soon they will settle again. Before they do, let us re-order this world around us.”

On Afghanistan, he added this:

“We will not walk away [but ensure] some way out of the poverty that is your miserable existence.”

Blair echoed his mentor, President George W. Bush, who spoke to the victims of his bombs from the Oval Office:

“The oppressed people of Afghanistan will know the generosity of America. As we strike military targets, we will also drop food, medicine and supplies to the starving and suffering … “

Almost every word was false. Their declarations of concern were cruel illusions for an imperial savagery “we” in the West rarely recognise as such.

In 2001, Afghanistan was stricken and depended on emergency relief convoys from Pakistan. As the journalist Jonathan Steele reported, the invasion indirectly caused the deaths of some 20,000 people as supplies to drought victims stopped and people fled their homes.

Eighteen months later, I found unexploded American cluster bombs in the rubble of Kabul which were often mistaken for yellow relief packages dropped from the air. They blew the limbs off foraging, hungry children.

In the village of Bibi Maru, I watched a woman called Orifa kneel at the graves of her husband, Gul Ahmed, a carpet weaver, and seven other members of her family, including six children, and two children who were killed next door.

An American F-16 aircraft had come out of a clear blue sky and dropped a Mk82 500-pound bomb on Orifa’s mud, stone and straw house. Orifa was away at the time. When she returned, she gathered the body parts.

Months later, a group of Americans came from Kabul and gave her an envelope with fifteen notes: a total of 15 dollars. “Two dollars for each of my family killed,” she said.

The invasion of Afghanistan was a fraud. In the wake of 9/11, the Taliban sought to distance themselves from Osama bin Laden. They were, in many respects, an American client with which the administration of Bill Clinton had done a series of secret deals to allow the building of a $3 billion natural gas pipeline by a US oil company consortium.

In high secrecy, Taliban leaders had been invited to the US and entertained by the CEO of the Unocal company in his Texas mansion and by the CIA at its headquarters in Virginia. One of the deal-makers was Dick Cheney, later George W. Bush’s Vice-President.

In 2010, I was in Washington and arranged to interview the mastermind of Afghanistan’s modern era of suffering, Zbigniew Brzezinski. I quoted to him his autobiography in which he admitted that his grand scheme for drawing the Soviets into Afghanistan had created “a few stirred up Muslims”.

“Do you have any regrets?” I asked.

“Regrets! Regrets! What regrets?”

When we watch the current scenes of panic at Kabul airport, and listen to journalists and generals in distant TV studios bewailing the withdrawal of “our protection”, isn’t it time to heed the truth of the past so that all this suffering never happens again?

*

Note to readers: Please click the share buttons above or below. Follow us on Instagram, @crg_globalresearch. Forward this article to your email lists. Crosspost on your blog site, internet forums. etc.

John Pilger’s 2003 film, Breaking the Silence, is available to view at http://johnpilger.com/videos/breaking-the-silence-truth-and-lies-in-the-war-on-terror.

Featured image: George W. Bush visits Hamid Karzai, who participated in the Mujahideen in the past and led the puppet government that replaced the Taliban.


waronterrorism.jpgby Michel Chossudovsky
ISBN Number: 9780973714715
List Price: $24.95
click here to order

Special Price: $18.00

In this new and expanded edition of Michel Chossudovsky’s 2002 best seller, the author blows away the smokescreen put up by the mainstream media, that 9/11 was an attack on America by “Islamic terrorists”.  Through meticulous research, the author uncovers a military-intelligence ploy behind the September 11 attacks, and the cover-up and complicity of key members of the Bush Administration.

The expanded edition, which includes twelve new chapters focuses on the use of 9/11 as a pretext for the invasion and illegal occupation of Iraq, the militarisation of justice and law enforcement and the repeal of democracy.

According to Chossudovsky, the  “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.

September 11, 2001 provides a justification for waging a war without borders. Washington’s agenda consists in extending the frontiers of the American Empire to facilitate complete U.S. corporate control, while installing within America the institutions of the Homeland Security State.

Coalizão para Inovações em Preparação para Epidemias (CEPI) está fazendo parceria com a Jurata Thin Film Inc. para desenvolver um filme de mRNA semelhante a um ‘wafer’ que pode ser armazenado em temperatura ambiente e colocado sob a língua para administração de vacina sem agulha.

A parceria começará com um investimento de US$ 1,2 milhão para ajudar a Jurata a desenvolver sua plataforma proprietária de vacinas, que, segundo a empresa, estabiliza tecnologias de vacinas de nanopartículas lipídicas contendo mRNA em uma película fina.

Jurata afirma que a película foi projetada para ser “termoestável”, produzida e armazenada em temperatura ambiente e permanecer estável por três anos, eliminando a necessidade de armazenamento refrigerado com uso intensivo de energia exigido pelas atuais vacinas de mRNA.

A película pode ser colocada dentro da bochecha ou sob a língua para administrar a vacina. Também pode ser reidratado com solução aquosa e administrado por via nasal ou por outros meios que não necessitem de passagem pelo trato digestivo.

Jurata e a CEPI consideram a tecnologia fundamental para levar vacinas às pessoas pobres em todo o mundo. “Se for bem sucedida”, disse a CEPI no seu comunicado de imprensa , a tecnologia “ajudará a expandir o acesso a vacinas de mRNA em regiões mal servidas e a avançar a resposta global a futuros surtos de doenças infecciosas emergentes”.

No entanto, os cientistas que falaram com o The Defender disseram que o “sucesso” parecia improvável tão cedo. Eles também disseram que a tecnologia pode causar problemas além dos sérios riscos conhecidos da tecnologia existente de transfecção de mRNA.

Brian Hooker, Ph.D., diretor sênior de ciência e pesquisa da Children’s Health Defense (CHD), disse:

“As vacinas requerem armazenamento refrigerado (principalmente refrigeração) e as vacinas de mRNA são especialmente suscetíveis a danos causados ​​pelo calor durante o transporte e armazenamento. Uma plataforma termoestável eliminaria completamente a necessidade de refrigeração e seria um enorme avanço na eliminação dos “requisitos da cadeia de frio” no fornecimento de vacinas ao mundo em desenvolvimento e também constituiria uma grande poupança de custos na implantação global.”

“Mas, fora os outros problemas óbvios com as vacinas de mRNA, eu ficaria preocupado que o mRNA não fosse tão termoestável como se supõe e isso induziria mutações na sequência e outros danos ao código genético”.

Jurata é uma pequena empresa de biotecnologia que desenvolve películas para administração de vacinas e outras terapêuticas. Seus fundadores também fundaram a Bamboo Therapeutics, uma empresa de biotecnologia de terapia genética adquirida em 2016 pela Pfizer em um negócio avaliado em US$ 827 milhões.

Vacinas termoestáveis ​​e sem agulha são uma “pista falsa” 

Jurata é o quinto parceiro anunciado como parte da chamada de propostas da CEPI de janeiro de 2022 para inovações na fabricação de vacinas termoestáveis. A empresa disse que mais anúncios estão no horizonte.

Recentemente, organizações como a Organização Mundial da Saúde (OMS), a Gavi, a Vaccine Alliance e a Fundação Bill & Melinda Gates, entre outras, elogiaram os benefícios potenciais das tecnologias de administração de vacinas sem agulha, incluindo adesivos de microarranjos, canetas e agora micropelículas (microfilmes) como “inovador”, “que muda o jogo” e “o futuro da vacinação”.

Eles afirmam que estas tecnologias têm o potencial de tornar as vacinas acessíveis a áreas remotas, particularmente no Sul Global, onde falta infraestrutura para o armazenamento refrigerado necessário para as vacinas, especialmente para vacinas de mRNA que requerem temperaturas ultrafrias de -20 graus Celsius para – 80 C.

Eles também afirmam que estas tecnologias podem “ajudar a promover a aceitação da vacina em áreas de hesitação vacinal” e reduzir a necessidade de fornecedores, permitindo que as pessoas autoadministrem vacinas.

Nos termos do acordo com a CEPI, Jurata comprometeu-se a garantir o fornecimento de vacinas para o Sul Global, produzindo um volume de vacinas “necessário para atender às necessidades de saúde pública”, estabelecendo preços acessíveis para os países do Sul Global e potencialmente transferindo a tecnologia para os fabricantes do Sul Global. 

As tecnologias termoestáveis ​​sem agulhas estão a ser amplamente promovidas, embora poucos ensaios clínicos sobre qualquer uma destas tecnologias tenham sido concluídos e nenhuma vacina deste tipo tenha ainda sido aprovada pelos reguladores.

Cientista da equipe do CHD J. Jay Couey, Ph.D., disse ao The Defender que acha que o hype em torno de tais tecnologias é uma “pista falsa” destinada a fazer o público pensar que quaisquer problemas com essas vacinas são questões técnicas de armazenamento ou método de entrega – em vez da ameaça muito mais séria representada pelas próprias tecnologias de transfecção de mRNA.

Apesar de todo o incentivo em torno de novos métodos de administração de vacinas , o primeiro ensaio clínico de adesivos de vacina em crianças para a vacina contra sarampo e rubéola testado na Gâmbia só foi partilhado em Maio pela Micron Biomedical durante a conferência Microneedles 2023 em Seattle.

O ensaio de Fase 1/2 apresentou resultados “promissores”, embora até à data os resultados do ensaio não tenham sido publicados numa publicação revista por pares.

Apesar da investigação limitada, a Fundação Gates concedeu em Novembro à Micron Biomedical 23,6 milhões de dólares para financiar a primeira produção em massa de tecnologia de vacina sem agulha. Os Centros de Controle e Prevenção de Doenças também fizeram parceria com a Micron.

A CEPI afirma que espera utilizar o seu financiamento para impulsionar o desenvolvimento de tais vacinas.

“Estamos realmente procurando ver uma mudança radical na forma como algumas dessas vacinas podem ser armazenadas e entregues”, disse Ingrid Kromann, diretora interina de Fabricação e Cadeia de Fornecimento de Vacinas da CEPI, em um comunicado à imprensa sobre a oportunidade de financiamento .

Dos US$ 17,5 milhões que a CEPI está dedicando ao desenvolvimento de vacinas termoestáveis, ela já concedeu US$ 2 milhões à Tiba Biotech para sua plataforma de entrega de nanopartículas de RNA e US$ 4,3 milhões à Vaxxas para ensaios pré-clínicos em um adesivo de microarray, US$ 3,6 milhões à Gennova Biopharmaceuticals para auto-amplificação da plataforma de mRNA e US$ 1,6 milhão para AvaxziPen — uma plataforma sem agulha para fornecer formulações de vacinas em doses sólidas por meio de um aplicador de caneta.

No caso do microfilme de Jurata, o financiamento do CEPI apoiará ensaios pré-clínicos.

Dado que a tecnologia de mRNA se tornou “uma das ‘estrelas brilhantes’ tecnológicas durante a pandemia de COVID-19”, disse Kromman, vacinas termoestáveis ​​com entrega fácil como a de Jurata serão fundamentais para “avançar no plano de preparação para pandemias da CEPI para acelerar a velocidade e a escala de nossa resposta a futuras epidemias e pandemias e aumentar o acesso a doses de vacinas.”

‘Mais uma iniciativa apoiada pelo controligarca’

A CEPI descreve-se como “uma parceria global inovadora entre organizações públicas, privadas, filantrópicas e da sociedade civil” lançada no Fórum Econômico Mundial (WEF) em Davos em 2017, “para encurtar o tempo de resposta às epidemias através da criação de vacinas que possam ser libertadas rapidamente assim que ocorrer um surto.”

Fundação Gates cofundou a CEPI com um investimento de US$ 460 milhões. O Wellcome Trust e o WEF também são financiadores. O CEO da CEPI, Dr. Richard J. Hatchett, foi anteriormente diretor interino da Autoridade de Pesquisa e Desenvolvimento Biomédico Avançado dos EUA.

Explicando porque fundou a CEPI, Bill Gates disse:

“Infelizmente, embora haja um risco substancial de epidemias, não existe um mercado natural para vacinas. É preciso que os governos criem a estrutura de incentivos adequada. Se você puder prever quais serão os patógenos e conseguir armazenar vacinas, então isso seria uma resposta muito boa.”

Os funcionários da Fundação Gates ocupam cargos com e sem direito a voto no conselho da CEPI, assim como os funcionários da OMS.

“A CEPI é mais uma iniciativa apoiada pelo ‘Controligarca’ que procura minar a soberania nacional e a autonomia individual sob o pretexto de filantropia e de salvar vidas”, Seamus Bruner , autor de “Controligarcas: expondo a classe bilionária, seus acordos secretos e o conspirar globalista para dominar sua vida”, disse ao The Defender.

“Eles fazem isso aproveitando crises – reais e fabricadas – para transferir a tomada de decisões dos representantes eleitos para os chamados especialistas e organizações supranacionais como a Organização Mundial da Saúde, que são financiadas e controladas por uma elite não eleita – e, portanto, irresponsável –”, Bruner disse.

O financiamento atual faz parte do plano de preparação para pandemias de 3,5 mil milhões de dólares da CEPI , lançado em Março de 2021 para desenvolver tecnologias que aumentem a velocidade e a escala do desenvolvimento de vacinas para pandemias emergentes, de modo a que os tempos de desenvolvimento de vacinas possam ser reduzidos para 100 dias.

Historicamente, as vacinas levaram de 10 a 15 anos para serem desenvolvidas . As vacinas mRNA COVID-19 foram desenvolvidas no âmbito da Operação Warp Speed ​​em menos de um ano.

O número de eventos adversos relatados no Sistema de Notificação de Eventos Adversos de Vacinas (VAERS) apenas com as vacinas contra a COVID-19 não tem precedentes na história da vacina, com 1.872.034 eventos relatados até 24 de novembro.

Investigadores da Correlation Research in the Public Interest estimam que as vacinas estão causalmente ligadas a aproximadamente 17 milhões de mortes em todo o mundo.

A missão da CEPI no âmbito do seu plano de preparação é financiar o desenvolvimento de “plataformas de resposta rápida para desenvolver vacinas contra a ‘Doença X‘” – o nome substituto da OMS para uma doença que é atualmente desconhecida ou não existe, mas que tem o potencial de ser devastadora para a humanidade.

O espectro da Doença X fez parte da justificativa para a Assembleia Mundial da Saúde aumentar o orçamento da OMS em 20% em Junho.

A CEPI argumenta que “quanto mais rápido uma vacina eficaz for desenvolvida e implementada, mais rapidamente uma potencial ameaça pandémica poderá ser contida e controlada se for utilizada”.

“O regime interminável de medicamentos e terapias genéticas em que o CEPI está a trabalhar – administrados através de injeções e outros mecanismos – pode acabar por ser voluntário. Mas se Controligarcas como o principal benfeitor individual da CEPI, Bill Gates, conseguirem o que querem, eles serão obrigatórios”, disse Bruner.

Brenda Baletti, Ph.D.

Ex-comandante da OTAN defende bombardeamento da Crimeia.

January 21st, 2024 by Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

Recentemente, o apoio ocidental à Ucrânia tem diminuído, deixando os responsáveis ​​do regime preocupados com o futuro das capacidades de combate de Kiev. No entanto, apesar desta tendência, ainda existem figuras públicas no Ocidente que apelam a uma nova escalada e ao envio de mais armas pesadas para a Ucrânia.

Numa declaração recente, o general americano reformado Philip Breedlove, antigo comandante da OTAN na Europa, afirmou que o Ocidente deveria enviar armas pesadas para Kiev para permitir ataques intensos à região da Crimeia. Segundo Breedlove, só atacando as posições russas no Mar Negro é que a Ucrânia conseguirá fazer com que Moscou “repense a sua postura”.

Breedlove classificou a Crimeia como o “centro de gravidade” e “o terreno decisivo da guerra”. Para ele, a chave para “derrotar” a Rússia é atingir a Crimeia tanto quanto possível. Ele acredita que quanto mais ataques na região, mais a Rússia será afetada e forçada a recuar em toda a zona de conflito. Assim, face ao iminente esgotamento das capacidades militares da Ucrânia, o general aconselha que a OTAN volte a enviar armas a um nível massivo, principalmente mísseis de longo alcance que permitam ataques profundos à Crimeia.

“Se permitirmos que a Ucrânia seja capaz de atacar a Crimeia – de forma generalizada, persistente e precisa – a Rússia será forçada a repensar a sua postura naquele país. Ataque-os a todos, ataque-os repetidamente e destrua-os”, disse ele.

A opinião de Breedlove há muito é compartilhada por outros oficiais. Neutralizar as posições russas na Crimeia tem sido uma ambição ucraniana desde 2022, tendo ocorrido vários ataques mal sucedidos na região. Um dos principais objetivos é destruir a ponte Kerch, considerada a chave logística da Crimeia. Não por acaso, Kiev lançou ataques terroristas na ponte, matando civis, mas não causando grandes danos à infra-estrutura.

Não só isso, mas o próprio General Breedlove já se tornou conhecido pela sua posição radical em relação à Crimeia. Em Outubro do ano passado, publicou um artigo num meio de comunicação ocidental afirmando que bombardear a Crimeia era necessário para alcançar a “vitória ucraniana”. Ele apelou abertamente à destruição da ponte Kerch, rotulando-a de “alvo legítimo”. Na altura, também criticou todos os argumentos dos analistas sobre a necessidade de tomar precauções com estes ataques para evitar uma escalada do conflito. Breedlove parece não se importar com a possibilidade de um aumento das hostilidades, afirmando que é necessário infligir danos à Crimeia, independentemente dos efeitos secundários.

“Várias pessoas com quem falei disseram que ‘derrubar’ [destruir] a ponte de Kerch seria um grande golpe para a Rússia. A ponte Kerch é um alvo legítimo (…) Sou engenheiro civil formado e conheço construção de pontes. Todas as pontes têm os seus pontos fracos e, se forem direcionadas para o local certo, podem tornar a ponte de Kerch inutilizável durante um período de tempo. Mas se quisessem derrubar a ponte, isso exigiria uma operação de bombardeamento mais dedicada (…) Ouço muitas pessoas a perguntarem se é correto a Ucrânia tomar medidas tão agressivas e se o Ocidente apoiaria isso, mas eu não consigo entender esse argumento”, disse na época.

Também é necessário esclarecer que o cálculo estratégico por trás deste tipo de opinião está absolutamente errado. Acredita-se que, ao aumentar a pressão sobre a Crimeia, os ucranianos obrigarão os russos a concentrar esforços na região, negligenciando as linhas de defesa no campo de batalha e facilitando o avanço territorial de Kiev. Com isso, seria supostamente possível que as tropas ucranianas chegassem ao Mar Negro avançando no terreno, revertendo o atual cenário militar.

No entanto, esta mentalidade parece ingênua. A reação russa a possíveis ataques recorrentes à Crimeia não seria através de qualquer mudança abrupta na situação nas linhas da frente, mas sim através de um aumento exponencial de bombardeamentos contra alvos estratégicos em toda a Ucrânia. A doutrina militar de Moscou estabelece a artilharia como o principal fator num cenário de combate. A cada tentativa ucraniana de intensificar os combates, os russos reagem com artilharia pesada, neutralizando instalações militares, infraestruturas críticas e centros de decisão inimigos.

Na prática, a Ucrânia está num impasse, pois sofre cada vez mais perdas cada vez que tenta reverter a situação. O país não consegue mudar o cenário, tendo como alternativa apenas as negociações de paz nos termos russos – o que a OTAN obviamente não permite que Kiev faça. Além disso, é improvável que a aliança atlantista retome o envio de armas de longo alcance em grandes quantidades num futuro próximo, uma vez que os EUA estão profundamente envolvidos no conflito do Médio Oriente, diminuindo o seu interesse na frente ucraniana.

: Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

 

Artigo em inglês :

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea, 19 de Janeiro de 2023

InfoBrics.

Imagem : InfoBrics

*

Lucas Leiroz, jornalista, pesquisador do Center for Geostrategic Studies, consultor geopolítico.

Você pode seguir Lucas Leiroz em: https://t.me/lucasleiroz e https://twitter.com/leiroz_lucas

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

There is a concept which is called ubiquitous. This word is used in  relation to the following concepts:

  • existing everywhere at the same time,
  • always everywhere,
  • prevalent,
  • sprouts without planting,
  • immanent.

Historically, the Telecommunications world was familiar with this concept because people were able to communicate regardless of distance by means of various telecommunications technologies.

Today the “ubiquitous” concept has become extensive with the advent of Artificial Intelligence.

Thereafter artificial intelligence exists everywhere, we run across it at any moment maybe without realizing. 

Artificial intelligence has become widespread in the last several years. But the idea underlying this technology is not new. English mathematician Alan Turing was the first person who put forward the artificial intelligence idea. Turing wrote an article titled “Computing Machinery and Intelligence” in the 1950 October issue of the Mind Magazine. In this article Turing opened a philosophical discussion on the “Can machines think?” question and rejected the oppositions to the argument of “machines thinking”.

In our country, worldwide known Turkish mathematician and scientist Cahit Arf was dealing with the same subject in his conference presentation titled “Can machine think and how can it think?” given within the scope of Public Conferences organized by Erzurum Atatürk University in the year 1959.

In his conference presentation, Cahit Arf was comparing the human brain with machines and saying that it is possible to design a machine which can develop itself. But he ended his conference presentation by emphasizing his concerns about the machine’s inability to make decisions taking into account the aesthetics qualifications.

“The notion which characterizes these qualifications is that all of them contains an uncertainty element and there is no certain rule that they strictly obey. There are natural events external to humans, with uncertain characteristics. These are events taking place inside atoms. As such, if the events taking place in a relatively small amount of atoms, can be made effective in the operation of machines, we can hope that the machines can resemble human brain in terms of aesthetics. … But I believe that it is impossible to do this, not even after many centuries.”

The concerns of Cahit Arf is still valid today, even though the technology is evolving at an exponential pace. 

Artificial Intelligence (AI) was officially born in 1956, the year of a highly notable summer conference held at Dartmouth College in New Hampshire, USA.

A group of mathematicians and computer scientists dreamed about a new research area during their meetings which lasted 8 weeks.

John McCarthy, then a young professor at Dartmouth, had coined the term “artificial intelligence” when he wrote his proposal for the workshop, which he said would explore the hypothesis that “every aspect of learning or any other feature of intelligence can in principle be so precisely described that a machine can be made to simulate it.”

“There have been three important events in the past.

The first is the formation of the universe.

The second is the formation of the beginning of life.

And the third, with the same degree of importance, is the emergence of artificial intelligence.”

Those are the words of Edward Fredkin, Computer Scientist at MIT who died at the age of 88 last year, in a BBC interview.

This evaluation made by Fredkin about the importance of artificial intelligence, is not an exaggerated, unsupported argument only valid in the computer scientists’ world. The artificial intelligence concept, after being first used in 1956, has been a subject on which many researchers from different disciplines have been working on intensively. The point arrived, destination and the prospects about the future is quite contentious because of the different opinions and discrete approaches to the subject.

Stephen Hawking, one of Britain’s pre-eminent scientists, who was well aware of the importance of research about the artificial intelligence and in fact was in need of a primitive form of artificial intelligence in his communication with the world, has been skeptical about the development of artificial intelligence, saying that the primitive forms of artificial intelligence developed so far have already proved very useful, but he fears the consequences of creating something that can match or surpass humans. He told the BBC:

“The development of full artificial intelligence could spell the end of the human race.”

According to Hawking, it would take off on its own, and re-design itself at an ever increasing rate, but humans, who are limited by slow biological evolution, couldn’t compete, and would be superseded.

The probability of developing very robust autonomous weapons or new ways of oppressive methods in authoritarian regimes by using artificial intelligence were the threats which Hawking emphasized. 

In the September 30, 2021 dated issue of the IEEE Spectrum Magazine, which is published by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers), the world’s largest technical professional organization dedicated to advancing technology for the benefit of humanity, there was an article titled

The Turbulent Past and Uncertain Future of Artificial Intelligence” putting forward the question “Is there a way out of AI’s boom and bust cycle?”

In this article, we see that the studies in the artificial intelligence area was developing like waves, sometimes stopping and drawing back, and sometimes doing sprints.

Artificial intelligence became a wide interdisciplinary science only after 1980’s and artificial intelligence applications in industry started increasing.

The artificial intelligence development which again entered into a pause period towards the end of 1980’s, have gained a momentum during the second half of 1990’s with Internet becoming widespread.  During the pandemics, artificial intelligence with its diverse applications, has been a rescue in many areas. Such that, while world economies are shrinking, there was no decline in the investment made in artificial intelligence area.  

With the internet, many programs based on artificial intelligence has proliferated all around the globe.

When the efficiency provided by artificial intelligence applications has been proven, use of artificial intelligence in industry has increased.

On the other hand, while the return of investment made on artificial intelligence areas increased and the stock market values went fly high, global capital investments started to flow into the field of AI. 

This flow of global capital in the billions of dollars level –coupled with the enthusiasm of companies and people working in this area which makes the technology jump–, indicated that a point of no return had been reached.

To give an example to the flow of capital to the artificial intelligence area, Open AI company, who started the ChatGPT service, which has been trained to provide a comprehensive answer following the instructions given with a prompt, towards the end of 2022, has reached to a value of nearly 100 billion dollars, before it completed its first ten years. 

Among the scientific disciplines underlining artificial intelligence are logic, statistics, cognitive psychology, decision theory, neurology, linguistics, cybernetics and computer engineering.

If we try to list the fields effected by artificial intelligence, from security to defense, from industry to trade, from agriculture to transportation, from health to education, from domestic affairs to foreign affairs, from entertainment to shopping, from work life to daily life, comprises every field of life that you can think of.

During the US Senate Foreign Relations Committee Hearing, titled “US Leadership on Artificial Intelligence in an Era of Strategic Competition” dated November 15, 2023, Nathaniel Fick, who was one of the witnesses, stated that responsible technological innovation is increasingly a foundational source of geopolitical power.

In this hearing the Senate discussed the steps to be taken for US leadership on artificial intelligence in an era of geopolitical competition and how to get the best of artificial intelligence in foreign relations. In fact the artificial intelligence is changing the world. In the coming years we can assume that every technology we use is somehow related to artificial intelligence. Well then, are we ready to this revolutionary change that affects our life style, the way we do business, the way we communicate with other people and the world which we live in?

We are talking about a system which learns from data, it is such a system that it stores huge amount of data in its memory and learns with a huge speed, develops non-stop, makes comments about the future, apart from the technologies humans invented so far, makes decisions by itself and it is the first technology which creates new ideas, learning from the old data, speculates about the future and do all this with a specific accuracy.

It is reported that artificial intelligence is somehow creating logic by solving the algorithms within the data.

It is capable of understanding emotions by means of multi-modality but it does not have emotional capability.

Think of a machine or a creature, very rational, which learns quickly and understands but has no feelings, wouldn’t it be very scary?

On the other hand, there is the possibility of making mistakes.

We invented this technology and we are developing it, but for now we don’t know how it gives us those answers.

During its process, we don’t know the criterion and algorithms it uses to come to a solution. Humans can only affect a part of artificial intelligence machine learning process, they don’t make up the algorithm, the machine decides by itself and this is a character that doesn’t exist in the technologies invented up to now. We are encountering a technology developing by itself the first time in history. 

Can we rely on the mechanisms of the market to manage the opportunities and challenges of artificial intelligence, of course it is not possible to give an affirmative answer to this question.

Alongside its potential opportunities, artificial intelligence bears risks and even lethal threats, therefore it is essential to organize this area by regulations and beyond that it needs state leadership in each country and above all international governance.

The ITU  (International Telecommunication Union) which was established in the year 1865 to formulate the regulations in the telecommunications sector and today has become the specialized organization of the United Nations in information and communication technologies, has started working on artificial intelligence regulations since 2017.

The Secretary General of United Nations António Guterres has announced the establishment of AI Advisory Board for supporting the artificial intelligence governance efforts of the international community, towards the end of last year.

The Board hold its first meeting on October 27, 2023 and published its first interim report in December, 2023. In the AI Advisory Board consisting of two co-chairs and 37 members, unfortunately there is no representative from our country. In Europe, national, regional or international, every institution have organized to work on artificial intelligence. European Union is well ahead in artificial intelligence regulations.

On the other hand, The House and Senate in USA have accelerated their artificial intelligence governance efforts. In order to keep its leadership position in the world, USA is in pursuit of leadership in artificial intelligence and recognizes China and Russia as its competitors in this field. Well, what is the situation of our country in artificial intelligence, this topic will be examined in the next article. 

While these regulation studies are going ahead, the artificial intelligence technology is developing exponentially.

The question of alignment of world and humanity to this exponential development of artificial intelligence is occupying minds.

In order to slow down the development of artificial intelligence, many organizations including the United Nations and hundreds of business world leaders have made calls for moratorium.

But it is clear that it is impossible to stop a technology which has become the center of gravity for finance capital and has become pervasive on the one hand and started to play a dominant role in the geopolitical struggle of world powers on the other hand.

Furthermore, if we consider the failure of the United States in preventing the disasters and genocide created by natural intelligence at the present time, UN’s urgent call for moratorium in 2021, related to artificial intelligence sales and use until sufficient security measures are taken, has no meaning. 

It is impossible to examine all the aspects of artificial intelligence in one article because the subject is so extensive. It is necessary to follow the developments in this field constantly, remaining up to date and be ready for the race and it is a very fast speed race. It is in the national interest of our country to follow carefully the development of this unprecedented technology, which is still in its infant period. Let’s end this article with the words of famous historian Yuval Harari about artificial intelligence.

“Artificial intelligence is still just a tiny baby, we haven’t seen anything yet. Artificial intelligence has been deployed in the real world since about 10 years. If you think about biological evolution, the evolution of life on earth took something like 4 billion years, 4 billion to reach to these plants and to reach us, the human beings. AI is in the stage of amoebas, it’s like 4 billion years ago and the first living organisms are scrolling out of the organic soup. And ChatGPT and all the others, they are the amoebas of the AI world. What would T-Rex look like? And how long will it take for the AI amoebas to evolve into the T-Rex. And it won’t take billions of years, maybe just take a few decades or few years. Because the evolution of it is at a completely different time scale than the evolution of organic beings. Because AI itself works on a different time scale, AI is always on, the computers in general are always on, humans and other organisms, they live, they develop by cycles, they need to rest some time, AI never needs to rest.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on ATASAM.

Featured image is from ATASAM

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Dear Dr. Benita Bunjun,

I have grown to appreciate our educator-student, mentor-mentee and mother-daughter relations over the years. Our relations have blossomed beautifully in a world plagued by multiple, ongoing crises. You have left an indelible mark on post-graduate studies, living and working experiences while being in Canada and upon my return transition to Jamaica, my homeland for healing and recovery.

Like many racialized international students and post graduate workers, my original perceptions about Canada were shaped primarily by prominent discourses (“hear-say”) of Canada being a beacon of international humanitarian standards and an active promotor of equity, diversity and inclusion (EDI) in movements and social spaces.

However, our friendly meetings, our rigorous, scholarly dialogue, my lived experiences and observations have unsettled and de-mystified the grounds of this national fallacy. You have exposed me to the contributions of critical race, intersectional feminist thinkers such as Professor Sherene Razack, Sara Ahmed, Robyn Maynard and Professor Sunera Thobani.

As an African-Caribbean woman, I have always felt as a “body out of place” in academia and other institutions within Canada which is a white settler colonial society. I never knew why until you personally challenged to expand my social analysis beyond the statement: “racialized, international students/post graduate workers are exploited or discriminated against” and instead, we (I) should shift the focus of my analysis to the mechanics or techniques of power associated with “white supremacist”, patriarchal politics in the configuration of institutions including the Canadian state. After all, it is Deborah Brock et. al (2019:5) who have also validated the importance of unpacking the centre by emphasizing,

“to exclusively focus on the marginalized without interrogating the centre is to risk reproducing a pattern that defines the margins as the location of the problem”.

Brock’s et. al (2019) assertion therefore means that instead of examining silencing, erasure, social marginalization, precariousness, invisibility/hyper-visibility and the absent-present phenomenon among vulnerable groups in isolation, we should examine how power relations is organized around systems of domination that perpetuate these problems. It is not sufficient to look at the symptoms of the problems in isolation from the “centre” which shapes the systemic, institutional, epistemological- political, discursive, socio-economic, cultural and psycho-affective structures embedded in dialectical relations of domination and subjugation.

We see whiteness and “coloniality of power” imbricated in the organisation of the global political economy where capitalism is the most predominant system of economic relations, which is inextricably connected to racism, the derogation of women’s rights  and the exploitation of labour to generate profits.

A 2024 Oxfam International report has illustrated that world’s five richest men (all white) have more than doubled their fortunes to $869 billion while the world’s poorest 60%- almost five billion people have lost money and billionaires’ wealth have grown three times (3x) faster than global inflation.

Screenshot of the Oxfam article

On the other hand, across 52 countries, the average real wages of nearly 800 million workers have fallen. Oxfam notes that it will take 230 years to end poverty! (Neate, 2024; Riddel et. al, 2024). Oxfam International’s recent report does not only reinforce the alternative, popular notions that trickle-down economics does not work but it also underscores the androcentric dimensions of whiteness that is intricately involved in life-taking or life-sucking activities rooted in visceral, colonial and neo-liberal, capitalist violence. The life taking capacities of this dominant version of development have caused alternatives to development thinkers and eco-feminist, Vandana Shiva (2010; 2016) and Eduardo Gudynas (2011) to label development as mal- development and dominant economic practices and policies in favour of the world’s elite as “zombie capitalism” because there have been numerous attempts to repair and revive exploitative, extractive and unsustainable modes of development.

The life-taking/blood-sucking capacities of power systems are not only limited to macro-economics of development but also the micro coordination of public spaces in our everyday interactions that are frequently taken for granted as “normal”. As you have pointed in your powerful edited collection, ‘Academic Well Being of Racialized Students’, Canadian classrooms and universities continue to be troubling sites of racial exclusion, white entitlement and a glaring absence and underrepresentation of critical race scholarship and scholars (Bunjun, 2021, p.3).

Your original, scholarly contribution is an extension of Professor Sherene Razack’s (2002) three-dimensional framework on spatial theory and Sara Ahmed’s (2000; 2012) conceptual framework on spatial determinism. Professor Sherene Razack (2002:8) defines spaces as material, symbolic and representational. Material space refers to spaces that are constituted as a result of unequal economic relations produced by capitalism while symbolic spaces refer to lived experiences and differences in social meanings associated with spaces and representations of spaces refers to names, images and symbols associated with spaces (Razack, 2002, p.8).

From a materialist perspective, Canadian universities and classrooms are products of unequal economic relations in which neo-liberal capitalist economy prioritizes commodification of knowledge for profit generation and the utilization of diversity and inclusion as not only a containment zone for insurgency but also a way of maintaining marketability and academic imperialism.

From a symbolic perspective, many racialized, international students and post graduate workers express feelings and lived experiences of painful alienation and trauma in Canadian classrooms and universities both due to passive and active forms of violence. Additionally, Canadian classrooms and universities persist in the deliberate marginalization and omission of brutal histories predicated on the Atlantic Slave Trade, chattel slavery of Peoples of African descent, a system of indentureship and servitude among South Asian peoples, mass displacement, theft, genocide and land dispossession of indigenous peoples. The brutality of these histories that prevail in the contemporary construction of Canadian universities and classroom spaces are evident in the names of former slave traders and masters such as James McGill, McGill University and Lord Dalhousie, Dalhousie University.

The 2019 Dalhousie report which was written by Professor Afua Cooper and other well renowned academics have illustrated that Canadian classrooms are marked with racist and sexist graffiti on walls long before students enter these spaces. The Dalhousie report goes beyond the material aspects of coloniality which assess the economic imperative of white supremacist politics by looking at other important dimensions such as the ideological and semiotic modes of whiteness and coloniality. Consequently, this is where Sara Ahmed’s conceptual framework on spatial determinism becomes increasingly relevant to this discussion. Ahmed (2000; 2012) argues that spatial determinism refers to the fact spaces are not empty or unoccupied but are shaped by social relations and histories and these histories and social relations determine our interactions, encounters and lived experiences within these spaces prior to our entry in them. Ahmed (2012) also explains that one of the reasons racialized identities continue to be socially constructed as and treated as “bodies out of place” is because of conditional hospitality of the “multi-cultural”, settler-colonial nation who welcomes international students or migrants, generally on the condition that they give something back to the nation- loyalty to or proximity to the ideology of state formation and national identity.

Conditional hospitality also extends to border imperialist, immigration policies that operate under the shroud of humanitarianism and good will when in fact these immigration policies set the precedence for the precarious labour-citizenship nexus of racialized, international students and post-graduate workers whereby the fate of the future rests solely on their temporary legal status which makes them susceptible to dehumanising treatment by institutions.

We see a deeply troubling concern with respect to border imperialism and conditional hospitality in other parts of the world such as the United Kingdom under the Rishi Sunak’s conservative government administration. Last year, Rishi Sunak had proposed an illegal migration bill to ban refugees and is best known by the slogan “stop the boats” and this year, the Sunak-led government in the UK has passed a policy that will prevent international students from migrating with their families to the UK. The anti-black/Asian/indigenous/racialized racisms and long held xenophobic sentiments are not only compatible with conservative/right wing political ideologies but they also illustrate that borders are not only geographic or physical walls that are constructed to exclude, police, surveil and punish those who are considered as “Others” but borders are also existential, social walls to demarcate differences.

On the contrary, the centre right Prime Minister Andrew Holness-led government in Jamaica deported many of our Haitian brothers and sisters last year on the grounds of illegal entry and while there have been several outcries from reparations activists, social advocates, movements, unorthodox academic thinkers about the mass deportation of Haitians, the government of Jamaica remains unphased and unconcerned.

The life-taking/blood-sucking capacities of whiteness, coloniality, mal-development and zombie capitalism operates in different ways, transnationally from Canada to Jamaica.

In Jamaica, a former colony of Britain where neo-colonial and neo-liberal capitalist relations persists, the mechanics of “whiteness:” is manifested through what Barbara Heron (2007:44) coins as “planetary consciousness”.

Planetary consciousness is defined as the global obligation that white men and women feel in relation to saving or civilizing those who they regard as the Other from countries of the Global South and it also refers to the assumption that they are experts on every global issue (Heron, 2007).

In the Jamaican context, we see whiteness and coloniality manifested in the faces of power of international development or non-profit organizations, the preference of Northern expertise on development challenges that plague the Global South, the deployment of language that positions people from the Global South as deficits and the use of foreign aid or official development assistance (ODA) to permeate ongoing imperial encounters.

This is evident in a 2022 (Economic and Social Survey of Jamaica) report which explains that official development assistance (ODA) far exceeds loan repayments and budgetary allocations towards public, social services such as health and education.

We see whiteness and coloniality embedded in the national and transnational movement and advocacy for reparative justice for Peoples of African descent where representatives of global empires issue half-baked, empty statements of apologies atoning for their active participation in the enslavement of African peoples but no serious acknowledgement to the social, economic and political development issues outlined in CARICOM’s 10-point plan for reparations and no momentum towards attention towards evidence-based, international human rights law intersecting with other disciplines making a plausible case for reparations.

Several Caribbean countries including Jamaica and Belize have expressed an active interest in decolonising their constitutions and transition from a parliamentary democracy to a republic.

While these efforts and proposals aimed at national self-determination are commendable, the racialization and colonial infrastructure of social institutions remain highly visible to social activists in Jamaica.

We (I) notice the lack of transparency and accountability of the newly formed, Constitutional Reform Committee (CRC) whose primary role is to inform and engage with the public on its three-year strategic plan to reform Jamaica’s constitution and help in the transition to a republic.

We (I) also notice the declining public trust in democracy and political leadership despite celebrating 61 years of independence or dependence, I should say.

Declining public trust in democracy and political leadership can be attributed to social and economic development woes ranging from a high cost of living crises, low consecutive records of growth, social marginalization from public service delivery, exorbitant crime and violence rates and high actual and perceived corruption. In fact, the 2023 World Justice Project report conducted in 14 Caribbean countries illustrate that 81% of citizens regionally believe that recruitment in the public sector is based on friends and family ties rather than merit and nationally in Jamaica, this percentage of corruption perception in the public sector stands at 78%. Moreover, 66% of Jamaicans believe that politicians are the most corrupt social group in society.

Mal-development and zombie capitalism continue to be pertinent features of Jamaican development strategies where there is the revival of failed policies that have not and never been favourable for the majority of our population who are disenfranchised and disenchanted with governance. Our government administration boasts about economic growth and record low employment under the shroud of prosperity but fails to tell the nation why our Human Development Index points out that we have large disparities in life expectancy, income and access to social and economic opportunities. Our government administration boasts that it is working for our people when in fact, it has increased the salaries of the political directorate by over 200% while inflation outpaces salary increases of the island’s disgruntled public sector workers who have gone on several strikes and protests for a living wage, not a minimum wage.

Our government administration boasts at COP 28 Climate Summit that Jamaica is not a mere by-stander in the fight against climate change when in reality, its economic development strategy is based on privatisation and deregulation of industries that contribute to pollution and environmental degradation.

Our government administration boasts about its strong foreign policy coordination and decision-making when in fact, a country like Jamaica that was once vocal on anti-apartheid struggles in South Africa and championing the cause of autonomous paths to development for countries of the Global South have now abstained or voted neutral on the escalation of the Israel-Palestinian conflict. Like Canada, Jamaica is also silent and silence is a metaphor of complicity or support for war crimes and humanitarian catastrophe. My mentor, friend and mother, continue to walk well on this journey. I salute you as I end my lengthy agitation on the varied injustices that fracture our world today as I speak from my unique social and geo political locations.

With love and power,
Tina Renier

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Tina Renier is an independent researcher based in Jamaica. She is a regular contributor to Global Research. Her areas of research interests are international development, with special emphasis on labour and development, education and development and women, gender and development.

Sources

Ahmed, S. (2000). Strange Encounters: Embodied Others in Post-Coloniality. London and NY: Routledge.

Ahmed, S. (2012). On Being Included: Racism and Diversity in Institutional Life. USA: Duke University Press.

Brock, D. et. al. (2019). Power and Everyday Practices. Toronto: Toronto University Press. p. 5.

Bunjun, B. (2021). Academic Well-Being of Racialized Students. Halifax and Winnipeg: Fernwood Publishing. p.3.

Gudynas, E. (2011). Burn Vivir, Today’s Tomorrow. Development, 54(4), pp. 441-447.

Heron, B. (2007). Desire for Development: Whiteness, Gender and the Helping Imperative. Waterloo, Ontario: Wilfred Laurier University Press.p.44.

Neate, R. (15 January 2024). World’s five richest men double their money as the poorest get poorer. The Guardian. Retrieved.

Razack, S. (2002). Race, Space and the Law: Unmapping a White Settler Society. Toronto, Ontario: National Library of Canada.

Riddel, R. (15 January 2024). Inequality Inc: How Corporate Power divides our world and the need for a New Era of Public Action. Oxford, UK: Oxfam International.

Shiva, V. (2010; 2016). Staying Alive: Women, Ecology and Development. California: North Atlantic Books.

Featured image is from PIxabay

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

In 2011, the Great British Class Survey was conducted, in collaboration with academics from the University of Manchester, the London School of Economics, and the University of York. The British have always been obsessed with class, so it is not surprising that British academics would attempt something of this nature.

The survey polled 161,400 people, and in a fit of obviousness, they concluded,

“We demonstrate the existence of an ‘elite’, whose wealth separates them from an established middle class.”

They also concluded that class distinctions had broadened into a multitude of seven classes. This is an expansion of the Marxist model of class division of capitalists and workers that has dominated academic circles for at least a hundred years.

According to Karl Marx:

  1. Capitalist bourgeoisie — If you control the means of production this is you.
  2. Worker — Oppressed and exploited proletariat with no control of the means of production. Sells his or her labor for profit.

The survey included “unusually detailed questions based on social, cultural and economic capital.”

For the economic capital section, the survey asks how much money you make and how much money you have in the bank, plus the value of your house.

Secondly, to determine your cultural capital, it asks what kind of cultural activities you participate in. This is based on high brow culture—preference for interests such as classical music, historic architecture, museums, art galleries, jazz, theatre and French restaurants. And the other, for emergent culture—appreciation and participation in such activities as video games, social networking, sports, hanging out with friends, working out at the gym, and rap or rock concerts.

Thirdly, social capital was measured using the position generator originated by Nan Lin, an American sociologist, in 2001, which measures the range of social connections. People were asked if they knew anyone in several dozen occupations.

Seven Classes

The study found there are seven distinct classes:

  1. a wealthy elite
  2. a prosperous salaried middle class consisting of professionals and managers
  3. a class of technical experts
  4. a class of new affluent workers
  5. an aging traditional working class
  6. a precariat characterized by very low levels of capital and ongoing precarious economic insecurity
  7. a group of emergent service workers

This is an incomplete list in my humble opinion, because it fails to mention the homeless who are a separate class of non-persons, comparable to the Dalit caste in India. Homeless people have virtually no rights and squeeze out a fragile existence as urban nomads.

The most interesting group #7, the precariat, are the working poor who often fall into homelessness, when things go sideways in the economy or in their personal lives. The word precariat is a neologism of the words precarious and proletariat, coined by economist, Guy Standing, in his book, The Precariat: The New Dangerous Class.

The survey claims that the Elite class has a “mean household income of £89k (152K CDN), almost double that of the next highest class, and the average house price is £325k (556k CDN), considerably higher than any other class.” However, this elite class is only the upper middle class. The real elites make far more money than a meagre £89k per year. Many of them make that much in a day.

Other sociologists have gone further to sub-divide the wealthy into several categories:

Millionaires or High-Net-Worth Individual (HNWI) – those with $1 million or greater in investible assets. There are approximately 15 million HNWIs in the world according to the World’s Wealthiest Cities Report 2023 by Henley & Partners.

Multimillionaires or Ultra-High-Net-Worth-Individuals (UHNWI) – those with $30 million or greater net worth. There are 211,275 UHNW individuals in the world, with a total combined net worth of US$29.7 trillion.

Billionaires – According to Forbes, there are 2,640 billionaires in the world who are collectively worth about $12 trillion. The number of billionaires has been doubling every 10 years. In 2013, there were 1426 billionaires, worth $5.5 trillion. In 2003, there were 476 billionaires worth just $1.4 trillion.

Trillionaires – This class does not even exist in the media or academic circles. Above the billionaire class are the invisible trillionaires, who are never mentioned by Forbes, or any other list of the wealthy. Nobody really knows how much they are worth. Generally speaking, it is assumed by the alternative community, that people like the Rothschilds and the Rockefellers are at the top of this list, and the best guess is that there are about 300 trillionaire families at the top of the heap. These families are mostly American, British and European aristocracy, with a handful of Russian oligarchs and Hong Kong Chinese thrown in for good measure. They include the DuPont, Astor, Cabot, Oppenheimer, Schiff, Warburg, Russell, Onassis, Morgan, Kennedy, Bush, Clinton, Vanderbilt, and virtually, the entire European monarchy.

“The Vacuum Cleaner Class”

This elite class of families are “a vacuum that cleaner class” who have crawled over the whole planet, vacuuming up enormous wealth in the last couple of decades. The economic crisis of 2008 and the pandemic of 2019 created opportunities for the uber wealthy to buy up more property, banks, real estate and stocks.

Another study conducted in 2011 by the University of Zürich applied mathematical models to the top 43,060 transnational corporations. The study concluded that a “super-entity” of 147 corporations control 40% of the world’s wealth. These corporations exhibit very high levels of interconnectedness—directors sit on multiple boards and each of these corporations have heavily invested $403 billion in each other. Out of these 147, the top 17 have $41.1 trillion in assets and operate in virtually every nation on Earth.

The majority of these corporations are American, and most are financial institutions.

 

The Transnational Capitalist Class

Referring to the upcoming WEF in 2024, Tracy Francis, a senior partner at management consulting firm, McKinsey & Co, claims the value of the Davos meeting is in

“the human interaction of a multitude of different types of entities—start-ups, nonprofits, governmental organizations, business. There’s a lot of talk about a new world order, but I do think that just being together in person and exchanging ideas increases connectivity.”

Davos is the yearly conclave for the Transnational Capitalist Class (TCC), a term coined by Leslie Sklair, in his book of the same title. The strength of the TCC lies not only in their phenomenal wealth, but in their ability to interconnect and create think tanks and policy-making networks. The Transnational Institute describes the main purpose of the World Economic Forum is

“to function as a socializing institution for the emerging global elite, globalization’s “Mafiocracy” of bankers, industrialists, oligarchs, technocrats and politicians. They promote common ideas, and serve common interests: their own.”

The WEF has forged an agreement with the United Nations to “accelerate the implementation of the 2030 Agenda for Sustainable Development” by deepening institutional coordination and collaboration between the UN and the WEF.

Much more disturbing is that the agreement grants transnational corporations preferential and deferential access to the UN System at the expense of States and public interest actors.

This “preferential access,” gives corporations special oversight privileges, making them, in conjunction with the WEF, a higher executive authority. “This agreement between the UN and WEF formalizes a disturbing corporate capture of the UN. It moves the world dangerously towards a privatized and undemocratic global governance,” said Gonzalo Berrón of the Transnational Institute.

Stakeholder Capitalism

Contrary to the epic rants of many in the alternative community, who swear on their grandmothers’ graves, that we are experiencing a global communist takeover—what is actually happening is the creation of a transnational capitalist techno-state.

Klaus Schwab, the author and finisher of Stakeholder Capitalism (not Stakeholder Communism) has been advocating his peculiar brand of capitalism for five decades. Communism is when the workers control the means of production. Capitalism is when the capitalists control the means of production.

Schwab and the World Economic Forum portray Stakeholder Capitalism in warm and fuzzy tones:

“The stakeholder model Schwab suggests, is one where government, business, and individuals collaborate.”

“Various stakeholders of an economy don’t only look after their own interests, but that of society as whole, leading to a system of stakeholder capitalism”.

Stakeholder Capitalism is essentially the attempt to bring all the stakeholders to the bargaining table. The World Economic Forum is the bargaining table. The stakeholders are any individual, corporation, nation, city, NGO or entity with wealth, power and global influence. Some of the main institutions that sit at the table are the UN, World Bank, BIS, IMF, G20, WHO and NATO.

This week, January 15-19, the WEF syndicated crime extravaganza will go down in Davos, Switzerland. Approximately 3000 stakeholders will fly in private jets to attend the annual conclave. According to the WEF website, members will include:

  • 60 heads of state (national crime bosses)
  • all major international organizations (private control grid)
  • the Forum’s 1000 partners-in-crime
  • as well as civil society leaders (gangsters-in-training)
  • foremost experts (paid liars)
  • young changemakers (useful idiots)
  • social entrepreneurs (propaganda artists)
  • and the (always compliant) media

This transnational oligopoly of crime bosses will sit with Godfather Klaus Schwab.

They will schmooze, plot and scheme, and finally, come to agreements on a multitude of global policy issues that will impact the future of our planet.

None of these policy decisions will have any consultation with the public. In fact, most of these decisions will be made in back-door meetings. The public will not even be informed of the existence of these policies, until after these agreements are signed and ratified by orgs like the United Nations, WHO, and the G20.

The Transnational Capitalist Class Question

The most pressing question of our time is how do we reign in the Transnational Capitalist Class, who answer to no one, are unelected, and have so much wealth and power that they are virtually omnipotent globally? Combined with this is the difficulty of access to them and their institutions, which have increasingly become deaf to the world around them. They are insulated by their wealth—they fly around in private jets, live in gated communities and sail in private yachts. They live above the law, accountable to no one except themselves.

The foremost goal of many conservatives is to preserve the nation-state system at all costs. Most conservatives view national sovereignty as a sacred cow, along with the free market. Many believe we need a Libertarian utopia where no one pays taxes, the market is unregulated, government is local, decentralized, and ideally as minimal as possible.

This is most likely never going to happen. The world is interconnected with trade, transportation, media and communication at an unprecedented level, never before witnessed in world history. It cannot be unconnected. The reason the TCC has been able to achieve their goals is because of this global interconnectedness.

Evolution Versus Revolution

A quick review of about twelve thousand years of human history reveals a gradual evolution from tribal clans to farming villages to market towns to city-states to feudal kingdoms to parliamentary monarchy to the nation-state system that began in 1648 with the signing of the Westphalian Treaties.

There are many forces outside of the control of the TCC, such as gravity, mortality and evolution. The transition to a global system of government is the next stage in the political evolution of our planet.

Evolution is not just biological—it occurs on all levels. Human beings have experienced the evolution of our political, economic, cultural and social systems over thousands of years. The unprecedented explosion of science and technology that occurred through the Scientific Revolution was also outside the control of the TCC, despite their obvious success at exploiting and profiting from this revolution.

The nation-state system is deteriorating, and being replaced by a multipolar system, not because the TCC are the causal agents of this transition, albeit they are actively embracing this change in order to further their goals and agendas. Those who are clinging for dear life to the lifeboat of national sovereignty are destined to be cast adrift on the oceans of change.

It does not matter what system of government is put in place, whether it is a municipal, provincial, federal or even a global government. What matters is if the freedom and rights of the citizens are protected and enforced. Without freedom of speech, assembly, press, worship and transit, We the People have nothing. Even democracy can be totalitarian if the elections are only a choice between various tyrants.

What is needed is some serious judo, using the full weight of the TCC against them, or more accurately with them. An interconnected network of citizens needs to be created on an unprecedented level—a movement of unparalleled solidarity, unity and commitment. This means breaking down the traditional ideological barriers between the left and right, conservative and liberal, Republican and Democrat. It also means speaking with One Voice, and directly challenging the Transnational Capitalist Class.

A New Social Contract

A new Social Contract needs to be signed and ratified, between We the People and the TCC. So far, there is no social contract with the TCC, and they have no desire to have one. They want a stakeholders’ contract only, that ensures their rights, but none for the rest of the planet. Their ultimate goal is to eradicate all rights and freedoms on Earth.

It is virtually impossible to unseat them from their Halls of Power. A violent revolution on a global scale against the armies of NATO, along with the vast security apparatus of the TCC would be a formidable challenge, and unlikely to be met with any success, unless the revolutionaries directly confront the members of the aristocratic global family with appropriate force.

Force is not violence.

The employment of unified, constant and unrelenting social force upon the architects of the new world order is an achievable goal. The battle needs to be taken to their private residences and their private offices. The TCC must be forced through social pressure to hand over the keys of the kingdom to the people.

Almost all previous social movements were national in character, such as the black civil rights movement in the United States. The women’s suffrage movement had more of an international flavour, but the right to vote was a national challenge, that each nation undertook in order to enshrine women’s rights in national charters. We have a global challenge to force the TCC to obey the rights of citizens across the entire global spectrum.

Clauses and agreements need to be inserted in all the policies of the WEF, UN, WHO, G20 and the rest of the TCC network. The rights and freedoms of all citizens of the Earth need to be protected, not only by the rule of law, but also enforced by the people. Any government, whether it is local or a world government, must guarantee the safety and security of its people. If the TCC wants legitimacy as a global government, it must guarantee peace and prosperity. There can be no peace and prosperity without the guarantee of civil rights.

Organizations like the WEF need to be pressured to allow representatives from across the spectrum of classes, who are not currently represented. The WEF needs to be forced to become a more democratic institution, where attendees from the other various classes are permitted.

Sound far-fetched? Maybe it is, but so far, the efforts to oppose the WEF have not been successful. Ordinary citizens are not allowed entrance to the meetings. The fee for attendance is over $70,000, which makes attendance exclusive only to the Transnational Capitalist Class.

How are we going to negotiate with them, if we are not even allowed in the door? We need to get our foot in the door, even if it means kicking the door down. Schwab and his mafia bosses must not be permitted to continue with their plans for enslaving the entire planet. Unless we crash the Davos party, it will be caviar, steak and lobster on the menu for them, and insects for us.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Rick Thomas is a musician, activist and the author of How to Defeat the New World Order. For social activism: VictoryCanada.today and for all articles: Substack. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

A reader of my latest Substack article, G20, BRICS, WEF and the “building of a just world and a sustainable planet”, notified me of an open letter, from September 2019, where over 400 civil society organisations and 40 international networks condemned the 2019 groundbreaking partnership between World Economic Forum and United Nations (which I became aware of in 2020 and have been trying to alert the world to in my books, articles, interviews, and lectures).

The letter described this as a global corporate takeover. In the words of one of the key organisers Gonzalo Berrón from the Transnational Institute:

This agreement between the UN and WEF formalises a disturbing corporate capture of the UN. It moves the world dangerously towards a privatised and undemocratic global governance.

Only six months later this partnership would rear its ugly head. Transnational Institute wrote in their strategic plan for 2021-25 that:

The Covid-19 global pandemic has been used as a pretext for the implementation and normalisation of digital identification systems and tracker applications and to further entrench the notion that we pose a threat to each other.

It was very sound criticism that can only be applauded. But TI hasn’t understood the whole picture. The Institute’s mission is to “strengthen international social movements with rigorous research, reliable information, sound analysis and constructive proposals that advance progressive, democratic policy change and common solutions to global problems.”[1]

This means, among other things, that they are totally committed to the catastrophic climate change narrative.

Decades of greenhouse gas emissions and destructive environmental practices have driven ecosystems to a breaking point, and threaten to trigger catastrophic global heating. The pace of this is alarming, making climate the top threat for young people everywhere.[2]

I would also add that “common solutions to global problems” is often problematic since we live in a very diverse world. It is not easy to apply the same one-size-fits-all solutions on all nations.

As I uncovered in book Rockefeller: Controlling the game; Climate Change is a problem that has been defined and promoted since the fifties by the same forces that gave us the digital identification systems, as well as WEF. These players are also firm believers in global solutions to global problems, and they know how to rig the game.

As exemplified by Rockefeller Brothers Funds Sustainable Development Review 2005-2010:

The RBF has supported “allied voices for climate action” that include businesses, investors, evangelicals, farmers, sportsmen, labor, military leaders, national security hawks, veterans, youth, and governors and mayors. Each of these constituencies has an important role to play.[3]

And how independent is the Transnational Institute? In their Annual Report for 2020 it is stated that they receive 50% of their income from the Dutch Government, 19% from other governments, and 14% from the European Union. They also receive funding from philanthropic foundations like Asia Foundation, European Cultural Foundation, the George Soros founded Foundation for the Promotion of Open Societies and drumroll, The Rockefeller Foundation and Rockefeller Brothers Fund.

Grants from RBF to Transnational Institute

This gives the impression of a controlled opposition that speaks up against the rise of a global corporatocracy but doesn’t really challenge their power. You can’t win if you believe the fairy tales your enemy has created, while receiving money out of their pockets.

WEF will, in the meantime, do everything to further a transition of the UN-system that suits their purpose. As WEFs President Börge Brende said to UN Secretary General António Guterres in Davos this week:

We are also very much looking forward to your Summit of the Future in September and you can count on us, also for our full support.

They don’t care about open letters that questions their authority.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Notes

[1] www.tni.org/en/mission

[2] www.tni.org/files/2024-01/TNI%20strategic%20plan-2021-2025.pdf

[3]  www.rbf.org/sites/default/files/sustainabledevelopmentprogramreview.pdf

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

With the Israel Defense Forces continuing to block supplies from reaching shelters, refugee camps, and hospitals in Gaza, humanitarian workers are warning that there is “no end in sight” for the horrors facing an estimated 55,000 pregnant women as well as postpartum parents and newborns.

Tess Ingram, a communications specialist for the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF), told reporters Friday that nearly 20,000 babies have been born in the three months since Israel began its bombardment of Gaza—an assault that has ostensibly been in response to Hamas’ October 7 attack on southern Israel but has disproportionately targeted civilians in the enclave, with women and children making up 70% of the 24,762 people killed so far.

“Becoming a mother should be a time for celebration,” Ingram said. “In Gaza, it’s another child delivered into hell… Seeing newborn babies suffer, while some mothers bleed to death, should keep us all awake at night.”

Only nine of Gaza’s 35 hospitals are operational, and Agence France Presse reported that Emirati Hospital in Rafah is now providing care for “the vast majority of pregnant women in Gaza” as more than one million people have been displaced to the southern city since the war began.

Doctors and nurses at the hospital, who normally treat 30-40 pregnant patients daily, are caring for as many as 400 pregnant people, postpartum mothers, and newborns every day, the humanitarian group CARE told HuffPost. Emirati’s only operating room, where two to three C-sections are normally performed each day, is now being used for nearly 20 C-sections per day.

Overcrowding has forced hospital staff to discharge new mothers within three hours of having a Caesarean section—many of which are being performed without anesthesia or properly sanitized medical equipment, leading to a heightened risk of infection.

“‘Will I survive childbirth? Will my child survive? What will happen to my other children?’ These are very real dangers pregnant women and young mothers in Gaza have faced for the past 100 days, with no end in sight,” Hiba Tibi, acting deputy regional director for the Middle East and North Africa for CARE, said last week.

After childbirth, mothers and their vulnerable newborns are returning to “inhumane” conditions in makeshift shelters or overcrowded camps, where a lack of food and safe drinking water is placing “approximately 135,000 children under two at risk of severe malnutrition,” Ingram told reporters.

A woman named Fedaa Issa told the Middle East Eye this week about her experience returning to a makeshift tent in Khan Younis immediately after giving birth to her daughter on December 2.

“In the camp, she lacked the sanitation facilities to help her through the first few days and weeks of Aya’s life, and there was no proper sense of privacy,” MEE reported. “Issa said that she and other women had no access to sanitary towels and instead risked infection by rewashing pieces of cloth in dirty water.”

Without proper nutrients in her diet, Issa was unable to breastfeed and had to rely on formula to feed her newborn—which her family is struggling to afford.

“Humanity cannot allow this warped version of normal to persist any longer,” said Ingram. “Mothers and newborns need a humanitarian cease-fire.”

Ingram relayed to reporters the story of a woman she met in Gaza, Mashael, who was pregnant when her home was hit by an airstrike last month.

With her husband trapped under rubble for several days, Mashael realized after the bombing that her baby had stopped moving.

“She says she is sure now, about a month later, that the baby is dead,” Ingram said, but Mashael has not been able to see a doctor to confirm the miscarriage or get treatment. “The situation of pregnant women and newborns in the Gaza Strip is beyond belief, and it demands intensified and immediate actions.”

According to CARE, healthcare workers have seen a 300% increase in miscarriages since Israel’s assault began.

Humanitarian groups say conditions have worsened in the last month, despite the passage of a U.N. Security Council resolution demanding increased aid for Gaza.

“Whatever marginal improvement there has been,” Refugees International president Jeremy Konyndyk told HuffPost, “it’s nowhere near the scale that’s required at this point. Where there are improvements, they’re modest and fragile—they could be undone by Israeli military actions or Israeli political decisions.”

The Biden administration, which is helping to fund and arm the IDF and has vehemently defended its assault on Gaza as “self-defense,” has said it is “pressing” Israel to allow humanitarian aid into Gaza, where an average of just 100 aid trucks have been allowed in per day since October. About 500 trucks carried goods and supplies into the enclave daily before the current Israeli assault.

Despite the United States’ insistence that it is pushing Israeli officials, a State Department document this week said the IDF is still denying requests to move food and medicine into northern Gaza, where 300,000 people are still living.

Konyndyk, who previously worked in the Obama and Biden administrations, told HuffPost that as long as Israel’s bombardment continues, Gaza residents and those struggling to care for them “need the humanitarian equivalent of shock and awe.”

“When the U.S. government is defending their record on this, their basic argument is they’re making some incremental improvements,” said Konyndyk. “That’s like saying, ‘We got three more buckets to fight the forest fire.’ Whatever improvement that reflects, the pace of it is far, far outmatched by the rate of deterioration in the humanitarian situation.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Julia Conley is a staff writer for Common Dreams.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The Houthis in Yemen have been attacking ships in the Red Sea which are associated with Israel or the US in response to the ongoing genocide in Gaza being carried out by Israel, who is supported by the US with all weapons and funding. US President Joe Biden continues to refuse all international calls for a ceasefire in Gaza.

Biden has formed a military coalition to attack Yemen, the poorest country on earth, with famine and disease rampant. In an effort to understand the situation, Steven Sahiounie of MidEastDiscourse interviewed Suat Delgen.

Suat Delgen, a Defense Industry and Foreign Policy analyst, served for 16 years in the Naval Forces as a Staff Officer, undertaking project officer duties in various NATO and National Headquarters, as well as serving as a principal warfare officer and commanding officer on fast attack craft. 

Steven Sahiounie (SS):  The Houthis say they will continue attacking Israeli-associated ships until there is a ceasefire declared in Gaza. Can the US-led coalition against the Houthis succeed in stopping the attacks?

Suat Delgen (SD):  The United States, as a global maritime power, plays a crucial role in ensuring the security of global trade routes. In light of the Houthis’ attacks on Israeli-flagged ships and ships bound for Israel in the Red Sea and the Bab Al Mandeb Strait, these actions pose a significant challenge not only to regional stability but also to international maritime security, which the U.S. is keen to uphold.

The initiation of the multinational Operation Prosperity Guardian on December 19, 2023, marks an important step in addressing this challenge. However, the operation’s efficacy is constrained by its defensive nature and the limited rules of engagement, which do not extend to pre-emptive strikes against strategic Houthi targets. This limitation, in my opinion, contributed to the operation’s inability to fully deter Houthi attacks.

The situation took a significant turn with the UN Security Council’s adoption of Resolution 2722, which, while not authorizing direct military action against the Houthis, underscored the international community’s demand for a cessation of Houthi aggressions. Nevertheless, the subsequent direct military responses by the US and UK, bypassing the resolution’s framework, seem to have only escalated the situation. This response, in my analysis, has not only failed to deter the Houthis but also appeared to garner them increased public sympathy, as evident from the large-scale demonstrations in Sanaa.

From a military standpoint, the resource-intensive nature of countering Houthi attacks, particularly their use of cost-effective drones and missiles against expensive defense systems, presents a logistical and economic challenge. In my view, this imbalance could potentially lead to a strategic stalemate, where the reduction in the number of attacks might be achievable, but completely stopping them seems unlikely under the current strategy.

In conclusion, while the joint US-UK military operations might curtail the frequency of Houthi attacks to some extent, the prospect of completely halting these attacks appears slim. It is my belief that the resolution of this conflict will require not just military might but also diplomatic efforts that address the underlying political complexities. The US’s stance, especially considering its previous decision to delist the Houthis as a terrorist organization, suggests a potential preference for a non-escalatory approach. However, as with any conflict of this nature, the situation remains fluid and the outcomes uncertain.” 

SS:  Some experts fear the situation in the Red Sea might escalate into a large-scale conflict.  In your opinion,  do you think Iran might face off against USA?

SD:  In my opinion, the likelihood of the situation in the Red Sea escalating into a major conflict directly involving Iran and the USA is low. The strategic interests of the US in the Middle East, particularly with regard to its alliances with Gulf countries, play a crucial role in its decision-making process. A direct conflict, especially one that could be perceived as initiated by the US, risks jeopardizing these relationships and the broader stability of the region.

Moreover, the US has significant investments in regional integration projects, such as the IMEC corridor, which aims to enhance trade and transport links between India, the UAE, and Saudi Arabia. The success of such initiatives often hinges on regional stability and the support of key players like Saudi Arabia. As Saudi Arabia’s participation in the Abraham Accords for normalization with Israel is a critical aspect of this regional integration, the US is likely to avoid actions that could hinder this process. Therefore, in my opinion, while the US is committed to countering Iran’s influence in the region, it is more likely to pursue indirect measures rather than direct military confrontation. The aim would be to limit Iran’s regional sway without triggering a large-scale conflict, aligning with the US’s broader strategic objectives of maintaining stability and fostering diplomatic relations in the Middle East.

SS: Saudi Arabia declined the US invitation to join the collection against the Houthis. The Chinese-brokered deal between Saudi Arabia and Iran seems to be a success. In your view, will this act protect the Saudi oil industry?

SD:  The recent developments in Saudi-Iranian relations, particularly the normalization effort under Chinese mediation, represent a significant shift in the regional geopolitical landscape. In 2021, following the US decision to remove the Houthis from its terrorist list and to scale back support for the Saudi-led coalition, Saudi Arabia was compelled to explore alternative strategies to safeguard its national security and interests. This shift, in my opinion, has been instrumental in prompting Saudi Arabia to engage in normalization talks with Iran.

The cessation of Houthi attacks on Saudi oil facilities, a consequence of the Saudi-Iranian rapprochement, has evidently contributed to a more secure environment for the Saudi oil industry. This stability is crucial for uninterrupted oil production and exports, which are central to the Saudi economy. Additionally, the improved relations between Saudi Arabia and Iran potentially enhance the security of key maritime routes like the Persian Gulf and the Strait of Hormuz, which are vital for the global oil supply, including Saudi oil shipments.

However, it is important to note that the situation remains fluid. The long-term success of this normalization and its impact on the security of the Saudi oil industry will depend on the sustained commitment of both parties to this détente and the influence of other regional and global actors. While the current scenario presents a positive outlook for the security of Saudi oil production, the dynamics of regional politics necessitate a cautious approach in predicting future outcomes. 

SS: Reports say Israel’s economy has been affected by the Houthi attack. In your opinion, how much does this damage the Israeli economy?

SD:  The reported Houthi attacks on merchant ships in the Bab al-Mandeb Strait and their implications for container traffic in the Red Sea have undoubtedly affected Israel’s economy, particularly the operations at the port of Eilat. As one of Israel’s key ports, Eilat plays a vital role in trade, especially with the Far East, India, and Australia. The port’s significance in exporting minerals and importing goods like cattle and automobiles underscores its economic importance.

The reported figures, such as a 40% reduction in container traffic in Bab el Mandeb and an 85% drop in revenues at Eilat, highlight a substantial impact. However, it’s important to contextualize these numbers within the broader framework of Israel’s maritime trade. The shift of container traffic to other major ports like Ashdod and Haifa may mitigate some of the immediate economic impacts. These ports’ continued operation is critical in ensuring that Israel does not face significant supply problems.

Nonetheless, the situation at the port of Eilat represents a specific economic loss for Israel. The reduction in activity there, especially in automobile imports (EVC) and mineral exports, has immediate and tangible economic consequences. While the overall resilience of the Israeli economy may help in weathering these challenges, the situation underscores the broader economic vulnerabilities that arise from regional conflicts.

In conclusion, while the ports of Ashdod and Haifa continue to operate, mitigating some of the broader supply concerns, the impact on Eilat and the specific sectors it serves represents a notable economic setback for Israel. As in any conflict situation, the dynamics are fluid, and the long-term economic implications will depend on the duration and intensity of these disruptions.

SS: The Houthis are threatening the UAE and other countries that had a role in the coalition attack  on Yemen. In your opinion,  will  the situation in the  Red Sea escalate?

SD:  The adoption of UNSC Resolution 2722 has indeed heightened international pressure on the Houthis, which could influence their strategic calculations. Considering their ambition to consolidate power in Yemen and establish themselves as a regional actor, the Houthis might be cautious about escalating conflicts to a point where they confront the entire international community. However, their targeting of Israeli and US ships has been a tactic to increase their popularity and political support within Arab societies and Yemen. This aspect can’t be overlooked, as it plays into their regional political strategy. In the near term, adhering to UNSC Resolution 2722, such as releasing the Galaxy Leader ship, could be a strategic move to reduce immediate international pressure while maintaining their stance. Despite these maneuvers, I believe it is unlikely that the current tensions will escalate into a broader regional conflict involving major players like Iran and the UAE. Both Saudi Arabia and the UAE have demonstrated a cautious approach towards the Houthis, likely aiming to avoid further destabilization of the region.

In conclusion, while the Houthis may continue to pose a threat through sporadic targeting of US and Israeli ships, the overall situation in the Red Sea is more likely to be characterized by a cautious balance rather than outright escalation. This balance is precarious, however, and the actions of the Houthis, as well as the responses of regional and international actors, will be crucial in determining the future dynamics in the region.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on Mideast Discourse.

Steven Sahiounie is a two-time award-winning journalist. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image is from MD

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

First published on November 19, 2023

***

We are embroiled in two wars, in Europe and the Middle East, which have increasingly serious consequences for our living conditions and security.  

On the European front, what the Wall Street Journal calls “one of the largest acts of sabotage in Europe since World War II” was carried out in September 2022: the United States, assisted by Norway and Poland, blew up the Nord Stream, the main gas pipeline carrying cheap Russian gas to Germany and from there to other European countries.  The dynamics of this wartime action were reconstructed, based on precise evidence, by U.S. journalist Seymour Hersh and a German investigation. 

U.S. Secretary of State Blinken called the Nord Stream blockade “a huge strategic opportunity for years to come” and pointed out that “the U.S. has become the main supplier of liquefied natural gas to Europe,” gas that we European citizens pay much more for than what we used to import from Russia. 

At the same time, the U.S. is passing on to Europe the enormous cost of the NATO war in Ukraine against Russia. The European Commission is paving the way for Ukraine’s next entry into the EU, with the consequence that we European citizens will be the ones paying for the huge Ukrainian deficit.

On the Middle East front, the European Union supports the war by which Israel, with the United States and NATO behind it, attacks Palestine and fuels a regional conflict targeting Iran in particular.  Italy, which has been linked to Israel by a military pact since 2004, has provided the fighter jets on which Israeli pilots are trained, which bomb Gaza massacring civilians, and supports the Israeli military in various ways. In return, PM Netanyahu has promised PM Meloni that Italy will become an energy hub for shunting to Europe the gas Israel will send through the EastMed pipeline. 

The section of the offshore gas field, which Israel claims sole ownership of, is located largely in the territorial waters of the Palestinian Territory of Gaza and that of the West Bank.

Through the EastMed pipeline Israel will thus export to Italy and the EU the Palestinian natural gas it has seized by military force.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published in Italian on Il Manifesto.

Manlio Dinucci, award winning author, geopolitical analyst and geographer, Pisa, Italy. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Martin Griffiths, Undersecretary General of the United Nations for Humanitarian Affairs and Emergency Relief Coordinator, presented a documented report to the Security Council. Here are some excerpts:

“In Gaza, 134 United Nations Relief and Works Agency facilities for Palestinian Refugees were hit, and 148 UN staff were killed. Humanitarian relief centres were hit, even though they were identified and notified to the Israeli Forces. As ground operations move south, aerial bombardment has intensified in areas where civilians had been advised to relocate for their safety. More and more people are crammed into an increasingly smaller portion of the territory, only to find even more violence and deprivation, inadequate shelter, and the near absence of the most basic services. Rafah, where before the crisis the population was 280 thousand inhabitants, today hosts one million displaced people. And more people arrive every day.

Our efforts to send humanitarian convoys to the North have met with denials and the imposition of impossible conditions. Colleagues who managed to reach the North describe scenes of absolute horror: corpses abandoned on the roads, starving people blocking trucks in search of anything they can find to survive. And even if they manage to return home, they no longer have a home to live in.

Pressure is growing for the mass displacement of Palestinians to neighbouring countries. I want to emphasize that all people displaced from Gaza must be allowed to return as required by International Law. We are deeply alarmed by recent statements by Israeli ministers on plans to encourage the mass transfer of Palestinian civilians from Gaza to third countries, termed “voluntary transfer.”

These statements raise serious concerns regarding the possible mass forced transfer or deportation of the Palestinian population from the Gaza Strip, which would be strictly prohibited under International Law.

What we have seen since October 7th is a stain on our conscience. It will become an indelible mark on our humanity if we don’t act. I remain extremely concerned about the risk of further regional spread of this conflict. We cannot allow this situation to spread further: the consequences of a larger conflagration would be unimaginable”.

To Read the Complete statement by Martin Griffiths click Here 

Our thanks to Manlio Dinucci for having brought the above selection to our attention. 

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image source

It’s All About Me: Netanyahu Rejects Palestinian Statehood

January 21st, 2024 by Dr. Binoy Kampmark

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Israel has been given enormous license to control the security narrative in the Middle East for decades. This is not to say it is always in control of it – the attacks of October 7 by Hamas show that such control is rickety and bound, at stages, to come undone. What matters for Israeli security is that certain neighbours always understand that they are never to do certain things, lest they risk existential oblivion.

For instance, no Middle Eastern state will be permitted to acquire nuclear weapons on the Jewish State’s watch. Nuclear reactors and facilities will be struck, infected, or pulverised altogether (Osirak at Tuwaitha, Iraq; the Natanz site in Iran), with, or without knowledge, approval or participation of the United States.

This is a signature mark of Israeli foreign and defence policy: the nuclear option remains the greatest, single affirmation of sovereignty in international relations. To possess it, precisely because of its destructive and shielding potential, is to proclaim to the community of nation states that you have lethal insurance against invasion and regime change.  Best, then, to make sure others do not possess it.

Israel, on the other hand, will be permitted to develop its own cataclysmic inventory of weapons, platforms, and doomsday options, all the while claiming strategic ambiguity about the whole matter. In that strangulating way, Israeli policy resembles the thornily disingenuous former US President Bill Clinton’s approach to taking drugs and oral sex: he did not inhale, and oral pleasuring by one by another is simply not sex.

The latest remarks from Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu on January 18 suggest that the license also extends to ensuring that Palestinians will never be permitted a sovereign homeland, that they will be, in a perverse biblical echo, kept in a form of bondage, downtrodden, oppressed and, given what happened on October 7 last year, suppressed.  This is to ensure that, whatever the grievance, that they never err, never threaten, and never cause grief to the Israeli State. To that end, it is axiomatic that their political authorities are kept incipient, inchoate, corrupt and permanently on life support, the tolerated beggars and charity seekers of the Middle East.

At the press conference in question, held at the Kirya military base in Tel Aviv, Netanyahu claimed that,

“Whoever is talking about the ‘day after Netanyahu’ is essentially talking about the establishment of the Palestinian state with the Palestinian Authority.”

(How very like the Israeli PM to make it all about him.) The Israel-Palestinian conflict, he wanted to clarify, was “not about the absence of a state, a Palestinian state, but rather about the existence of a state, a Jewish state.”

With monumental gall, he complained that “All territory we evacuate, we get terror, terrible terror against us”. His examples, enumerated much like sins at a confessional, were instances where Israel, as an occupying force, had left or reduced their presence: Gaza, southern Lebanon, parts of Judea and Samaria (the West Bank). It followed that “any future arrangement, or in the absence of any future arrangement,” Israel would continue to maintain “security control” of all lands west of the Jordan River.  “That is a vital condition.”

As such lands comprise Israeli territory, Gaza and the West Bank, Palestinian sovereignty can be assuredly ignored as a tenable outcome in Netanyahu’s policed paradise. He even went so far as to acknowledge that this “contradicts the idea of sovereignty” as far as the Palestinians are concerned. “What can you do? I tell this truth to our American friends.”

As to sceptical mutterings in the Israeli press about the country’s prospects of defeating Hamas decisively, Netanyahu was all foamy with indignation. “We will continue to fight at full strength until we achieve our goals: the return of all our hostages – and I say again, only military pressure will lead to their release; the elimination of Hamas; the certainty that Gaza will never again represent a threat to Israel. There won’t be any party that educates for terror, funds terror, sends terrorists against us.”

This hairbrained policy of ethno-religious lunacy masquerading as sane military strategy ensures that permanent war nourished by the poison of blood-rich hatred and revenge will continue unabated. In keeping such a powder keg stocked, there is always the risk that other powers and antagonists willing to have a say through bombs, rockets and drones will light it. Should this or that state be permitted to exist or come into being? The answer is bound to be convulsively violent.

It is of minor interest that officials in the United States found Netanyahu’s comments a touch off-putting. US Secretary of State Antony Blinken had, it is reported, dangled a proposal before the Israeli PM that would see Saudi Arabia normalise relations with Israel in exchange for an agreement to facilitate the pathway to Palestinian statehood. Netanyahu did not bite, insisting that he would not be a party to any agreement that would see the creation of a Palestinian state.

Blinken, if one is to rely on the veracity of the account, suggested that the removal of Hamas could never be achieved in purely military terms; a failure on the part of Israel’s leadership to recognise that fact would lead to a continuation of violence and history repeating itself.

In Washington, State Department spokesperson Matthew Miller stated in the daily press briefing that “Israel faces some very difficult choices in the months ahead.” The conflict in Gaza would eventually end; reconstruction would follow; agreement from various countries in the region to aid in that effort had been secured – all on the proviso that a “tangible path to the establishment of a Palestinian state” could be agreed upon.

For decades, administrations in Washington have fantasised about castles in the skies, the outlandish notion that Palestinians and Israelis might exist in cosy accord upon lands stolen and manured by brutal death. Washington, playing the Hegemonic Father, could then perch above the fray, gaze paternally upon the scrapping disputants, and suggest what was best for both. But the two-state solution was always encumbered and heavily conditioned to take place on Israeli terms, leaving all mediation and interventions by outsiders flitting gestures lacking substance.

Now, no one can claim otherwise that Palestinian statehood is anything other than spectral, fantastic, and doomed – at least under the current warring regime. Netanyahu’s own political survival, profanely linked to Israel’s own existence, depends on not just stifling pregnancies in Gaza but preventing the birth of a nationally recognised Palestinian state.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. Binoy Kampmark was a Commonwealth Scholar at Selwyn College, Cambridge. He currently lectures at RMIT University. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). Email: [email protected]

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Horrendous implications. It would generate a final, total, unimaginable regional detonation, even dwarfing, exacerbating current nightmares all round.

Felicity Arbuthnot, Global Research, January 21, 2024

*

When Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammed al-Sudani arrived in New York City in September for the UN General Assembly, a delicate truce was in balance between the two foreign powers that loom over Baghdad.

Iraqi paramilitaries, backed by Iran, had frozen their attacks on US troops in the country. Iraq’s new leader arrived in New York City amid the lull. He was feted on a circuit of swanky receptions with western businessmen and diplomats on the sidelines of the General Assembly, as he pitched Iraq’s oil-rich but corruption-riddled economy as an investment destination.

Four months later, the Iraqi leader is condemning Iran and the US for launching deadly strikes in his country and his investment pitch to the global elite at Davos Switzerland is overshadowed by his call for the US military and its coalition partners to leave Iraq.

Since the Hamas-led attacks on 7 October and the war in Gaza, Iranian-backed militias have launched at least 70 attacks on US forces in Iraq.

In early January, the US hit back with its most powerful response yet, launching a drone strike in Baghdad that killed Mushtaq Taleb al-Saidi, also known as Abu Taqwa, a senior commander in the Popular Mobilisation Units, an umbrella organisation of Iraqi state-funded and Iran-aligned, Shia militias.

Baghdad hit out at the strike as “a violation of Iraq’s sovereignty”. But no sooner was Iraq chastising the US for the strike, when Iran launched a barrage of ballistic missiles into the Iraqi city of Erbil, killing four people, including a prominent Kurdish real estate developer and his one-year-old daughter.

Baghdad slammed Tehran’s allegation that the house struck in Erbil was an Israeli Mossad “spy centre”. At Davos, Sudani called the strike “a clear act of aggression”. Iraq has recalled its ambassador to Tehran and says it will file a complaint at the UN Security Council.

The dual rebukes of Iran and the US underscore the tightrope Baghdad is walking as the war in Gaza seeps out beyond the besieged Mediterranean enclave’s borders.

Across the region, Tehran and Washington are flexing their muscles, vying to outflank each other in a deadly proxy war. The shadowy conflict has taken on different flavours that reflect local and geopolitical realities.

In Lebanon, the US is trying to de-escalate fighting between Israel and Hezbollah, with both sides wary of being dragged into a wider conflict. Meanwhile, Iran-backed Houthi fighters in Yemen have made themselves targets of US air strikes as a response to their attacks on commercial shipping.

But the conflict is perhaps at its most intense, and complex, in Iraq.

“The Iraqi government is weak, divided and fundamentally can’t control conflict on its borders from foreign powers,” Renad Mansour, director of the Iraq Initiative at the Chatham House think-tank, told Middle East Eye.

“It emerged as the playground of choice, where the US and Iran can fight it out. The risk of escalation here is lower for both. And they can show force and compete for influence.”

Syria, Through Iraq 

For Iran and its Iraqi allies who dominate Baghdad’s government, the war in Gaza has presented an opportunity to drive home their goal of expelling the US from Iraq.

A former senior US official and an Iraqi official told MEE that there has been increased coordination between Iranian-backed paramilitaries in Iraq and Lebanese Hezbollah with that aim. According to media reports, a top Hezbollah official, Mohammad Hussein al-Kawtharani, arrived in Baghdad earlier this month to oversee the operations.

“Instead of attacking Israel, what we are seeing in Iraq are more attacks on US forces,” Andrew Tabler, a former Middle East director at the White House’s National Security Council, told MEE.

The pressure building in Baghdad to expel US troops has been underlined by Sudani’s public calls for an exit since the assassination of Abu Taqwa. If he follows through, experts say it would present a strategic victory for Iran.

Roughly 2,500 US troops are in Iraq to advise and train local forces as part of a coalition to defeat the Islamic State militant group.

They are mainly based in Baghdad and northern Iraq’s autonomous Kurdish region. The latter is especially important for providing logistical support to 900 US troops in northeastern Syria.

The US’s legal justification for being in Syria is also based on its agreement with Baghdad.

“Erbil is crucial for supporting Syria,” Tabler said, referring to the capital of Iraq’s autonomous Kurdistan region. “The US needs to have the ability to move troops and supplies on the overland route between the Iraqi frontier and Syria.”

Speaking in Davos on Thursday, Sudani said that

“ISIS is no longer a threat to the Iraqi people,” and that “the end of the international coalition mission is a necessity for the security and stability of Iraq”.

The Biden administration and Baghdad were already negotiating the future of the US-led coalition in Iraq before the war in Gaza erupted, a former senior US official told MEE, but the war changed Washington’s approach to the talks.

“It doesn’t look good to be discussing a drawdown when the Iranians are attacking US soldiers with missiles and drones. So there is a sense from the administration that we need to pause these talks.”

While the US continues to conduct small-scale raids against IS cells in the region, Washington views its military footprint in northeast Syria as a key counterweight to Iran and Russia, which back the Bashar al-Assad government in Syria.

“The US mission in northeast Syria depends on Iraq,” Joel Rayburn, a former US special envoy for Syria, told MEE.

‘Same Foxhole’

The US military presence in Iraq has ebbed and flowed since the invasion 20 years ago. In 2011, the US pulled all of its forces from Iraq, only for them to return in 2014 at the invitation of Baghdad to fight IS.

But in that period, Shia paramilitaries backed by Iran emerged as the most powerful armed groups in Iraq. Trained and funded by Iran, the Popular Mobilisation Units also fought IS.

Some groups, like Kata’ib Hezbollah, have been at the forefront of attacks on the US in Iraq. The group’s founder, Abu Mahdi al-Mohandes, was killed in the same US strike that assassinated the Iranian commander, Qassem Soleimani.

Today, the PMUs boast more than 150,000 fighters. They maintain vast patronage networks and many are incorporated into Iraq’s official state security apparatus, with the Iraqi government paying their salaries. They have been accused of kidnappings, assassinations and suppressing peaceful protests.

The inability of successive Iraqi governments to rein in the sweeping powers of the PMUs has sown discord between Baghdad and Washington. Not only have US forces come under attack from the paramilitary groups, but Washington funds Iraq’s security system. In 2022, Iraq received $250m in military aid from the US.

Despite sporadic outbursts of fighting between the paramilitaries and Iraq’s security services, “the cost of going against the militias for the Iraqi government is far higher than the cost of keeping them,” Abbas Kadhim, head of the Iraq Initiative at the Atlantic Council, told MEE.

“For Washington, it’s an urgency because they are under attack, but it’s not a crisis for the Iraqi state. The militias are fighting in the same foxhole as the Iraqi government.”

Pay Raise for Iranian Militias

Sudani is supported by the Coordination Framework, a coalition of Tehran-backed Shia political parties that are tied to many of Iraq’s paramilitaries. While Sudani negotiated a six-month truce that saw attacks on US forces in Iraq stop, the PMUs have gained more influence under his rule, experts say.

“Iran-backed militias have a more visible presence on Baghdad’s streets during Sudani’s tenure,” setting up new checkpoints, Michael Knights, a fellow at the Washington Institute for Near East Policy, wrote, adding that they have also deepened their business activities.

This year, Sudani’s government passed a three-year budget that allocated $700m more dollars to the PMUs, which will allow them to add almost 100,000 new fighters to their ranks, according to analysts.

But current and former US and Iraqi officials say Baghdad wants to maintain good relations with Washington.

Sudani has framed his call for quick exit of US-led coalition troops as necessary to preserve “constructive bilateral relations” with the US, which he told Reuters could include training and advising Iraqi security forces.

His comments are a reflection of the unique ties Baghdad maintains to both Washington and Tehran.

The Dollar Trap

Iran and Iraq share a thousand-mile border.  The two Shia-majority countries have an estimated ten million border crossings annually, with many Iranian pilgrims visiting shrines in Karbala and Najaf. Iraq is the second most important destination for Iranian exports and is dependent on Iran for about 35 to 40 percent of its power needs.

Iran has never shied away from flexing its economic weight over its neighbour. But Iraq’s finances are also intricately tied to the US.

The second largest producer in the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries, Iraq depends on its oil revenue to fund its government – including to pay the salaries of Iranian-backed paramilitaries. The proceeds from Iraq’s oil sales are deposited in the US Federal Reserve Bank of New York.

A recent US crackdown on money laundering in Iraq has helped fuel a currency crisis in Iraq, showcasing the immense sway Washington has over Iraq’s finances because of its dependence on the dollar. The US has also backed Sudani’s appeal for international investments in Iraq.

When Baghdad threatened to expel US-led coalition forces from Iraq after the 2020 assassination of Soleimani, the Trump administration threatened to cut Iraq’s access to its dollar reserves and stop issuing sanctions waivers for Iraq to buy Iranian energy, former US officials familiar with the talks told MEE.

The same officials say that cudgel is an option the Biden administration retains if demands for a US exit grow, but some question whether the administration would use it, after trying to reset relations with Baghdad after the tumultuous Trump years.

“The US can’t be expelled from Iraq if it doesn’t want to be,” Rayburn, the former US special envoy for Syria, told MEE.

“If the US doesn’t have a military presence in Iraq, then the US need not do other things on behalf of the Iraqi government. Like facilitating dollar supply from the Federal Reserve, protecting against lawsuits, and issuing sanctions waivers,” he said.

While Iranian-backed militias want to expel the US from Iraq, experts say even the most hardline groups like Kata’ib Hezbollah benefit from Iraq’s economic links to the West.

“Even the most anti-American leaders in Iraq realise they need some kind of relationship with the US,” Mansour told MEE. “Iraq is a lifeline for Iran. Its access to US dollars and financial markets is key.”

Kadhim, at the Atlantic Council, believes the focus among policymakers in Washington to merely protect US troop presence in Iraq is shortsighted.

“Of course, Iran’s ideal goal is to get the US out of Iraq completely, but their practical goal is to make the US presence a liability,” which he says, the Iranians have already achieved.

“Basically, you have a small number of US troops in Iraq sequestered to their barracks. They can’t even go to town,”   he said.

“In the long run, someone is going to ask why are we here.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Britain’s chief rabbi, Ephraim Mirvis, spoke at a public event at a synagogue last Sunday to extol the “outstanding” performance of the Israeli military in Gaza. He did so days before South Africa argues its case before the International Court of Justice in The Hague – starting today – that Israel is committing genocide in the enclave.

Whether Israel is eventually found to be perpetrating genocide may prove more a political decision than a legal verdict, given the pressures on the 15 judges from their respective national leaderships.

But it is indisputable that Israel has committed war crimes and crimes against humanity in Gaza. It is known to have killed more than 23,000 Palestinians, most of them women and children, and seriously wounded tens of thousands more. It has driven from their homes the overwhelming majority of the enclave’s population of 2.3 million – that is, Israel has ethnically cleansed them.

Israel has repeatedly bombed the “safe zones” to which it has ordered civilians to flee, as well as critical infrastructure such as hospitals, schools, mosques, churches and bakeries. It has imposed a “complete siege” that is denying food, aid and medicine, leading to mass starvation and the spread of lethal disease.

Video footage has shown Israeli soldiers in Gaza gleefully smashing up shops; stripping Palestinian men and boys to their underwear; and shooting civilians, including women, in the street as they carrying white flags. Soldiers even executed three of Israel’s hostages trying to escape captivity and surrender with an SOS sign.

Yet Britain’s chief rabbi, the face of Judaism in the UK, has raised his voice to call all of this “the most outstanding possible thing”. He has gone further: he has described the troops committing these crimes “our heroic soldiers” and revealed that his own son, Danny, is assisting with the attack on Gaza in the Israeli military. He has said he is “immensely proud” of him.

Click here to watch the video

Mirvis could have chosen a form of weaselly words of the kind Israel’s apologists more typically deploy. He could have argued that the Israeli military was carrying out its task in Gaza as best as it could in near-impossible circumstances. That the Palestinians killed in Gaza were unfortunate collateral damage as the Israeli military sought to eradicate Hamas.

But he didn’t. He called the undoubted war crimes being carried out over the past three months “the most outstanding thing”.

There are several points to note about his remarks:

1. For any public figure, Jewish or otherwise, to call atrocities committed by the foreign power of Israel “outstanding” reflects a worldview that utterly dehumanises Palestinians and is ready to incite war crimes against them. Even were the Hague court not to rule that genocide is taking place, Mirvis has clearly incited to crimes against humanity.

2. As the effective head of British Judaism, Mirvis is giving religious sanction to the carrying out of war crimes. Many of the soldiers in Gaza – a significant proportion of them religious – will now have reason to believe that the crimes they and their army have been committing over the past three months are blessed, that their mission is divinely ordained. In short, Mirvis has implied that killing Palestinians is God’s work.

3. In referring to “our heroic soldiers”, Mirvis has conflated the Jewish people with Israel. Those soldiers are not British soldiers. They are not Jewish soldiers. They are Israeli soldiers. Were you or I to do this – to suggest Jews are behind the atrocities being committed in Gaza, not a foreign national army – we would rightly be called antisemites. And for good reason. Because when you confuse the identifiers “Jewish” and “Israeli”, you tar all Jews everywhere, including in the UK, with the crimes being committed by Israel against Palestinians. You make all Jews responsible for atrocities. And you thereby make them the target of antisemitic hate crimes by those who fall for this malicious conflation. So in other words, Mirvis now has not only Palestinian blood on his hands but potentially Jewish blood too. His words may inspire attacks on Jews.

4. There is something deeply ugly – maybe sinister would be a better word – that Mirvis’ religious incitement to crimes against humanity (and very likely genocide) is viewed as entirely unremarkable by our establishment media and politicians. And yet a slogan calling for equality between Palestinians and Israelis is systematically misrepresented by these same actors to suggest it is somehow genocidal. “From the river to the sea, Palestinians will be free” is a demand to end Israel’s unified system of apartheid across both Israel and the occupied Palestinian territories, a system that assigns Israeli Jews and Palestinians entirely different rights. Reversing that can be viewed as genocidal only if you imagine that Israelis will fight to the death to stop Palestinians gaining equal rights. It reveals far more about the mindset of those who believe the slogan is genocidal than any evil intent of those chanting what is a call for liberation. That mindset is on full display in the atrocities Israel is committing in Gaza, cheered on by Jewish leaders like Mirvis.

5. Britain has a Prevent strategy whose official aim is “to reduce the threat to the UK from terrorism by stopping people becoming terrorists or supporting terrorism”. In practice, the strategy is the British state’s attempt to stigmatise the Muslim community as a pool of potential terrorism recruits, surveill their community organisations, and weaken legal protections against arrest and conviction. The stated concern is that Muslims are being “radicalised” by extremist imams in their mosques – rather than by the extreme events they see, such as genocide unfolding in Gaza.

Mirvis has shown beyond doubt that extremist preachers are to be found not just in mosques but in synagogues too. If the government is really using Prevent to end support for terrorism, it needs to apply the strategy even-handedly. Killing and seriously wounding some 100,000 Palestinians – roughly one in every 20th person in Gaza – and making almost of all the population homeless, destitute and starving surely ranks as state-organised terrorism, whether or not the court eventually rules it amounts to genocide.

The context is that for many years Mirvis chose to study and live in Israel’s illegal West Bank settlements, where Jewish extremists regularly terrorise Palestinian communities to drive them off their land. He raised at least one of his children to choose to serve in an army terrorising and ethnically cleansing Palestinians in Gaza. Mirvis considers the soldiers committing war crimes to be “our heroes”.

In 2017 Mirvis endorsed the fanatical Jewish settlers – Israel’s equivalent of white supremacists – on their annual march through the occupied Old City of Jerusalem. Every year on that march, most of the participants are recorded waving masses of Israeli flags at Palestinians who live there and chanting “Death to the Arabs”. One Israeli newspaper columnist describes the Jerusalem Day march as a “religious carnival of hatred”. But Mirvis celebrates it.

A further point. Despite the fact that, judged by any reasonable standard, Mirvis is an extremist and holds views that should be repellent to any decent person, he is held in high esteem by the British establishment, including its media.

One can understand why. In late 2019, days before the UK general election, Mirvis publicly accused the leader of the opposition, Jeremy Corbyn, of being unfit for high office because he supposedly indulged and promoted antisemism in the Labour party. The British establishment had spent years cultivating this evidence-free smear.

Mirvis argued that “the very soul of our nation is at stake” in Britain’s election. He thereby effectively called on British Jews and the British public to vote for the government.

It was an unprecedented act of electoral interference that was reported reverentially by the British media. Both the fact that Mirvis sought to influence the vote with a deception and that the establishment media colluded with him in doing so should have been shocking, even at the time. But Mirvis’ latest remarks provide additional context. Because it is Rabbi Mirvis – not the antisemites – who is quite happy to flaunt his dual loyality. Those soldiers are apparently “ours”.

So the question is this: which nation was Mirvis actually referring to when he warned shortly before the 2019 election that “the very soul of our nation is at stake”? The British nation whose religious Jews he supposedly represents, or the Israeli nation that is currently ethnically cleansing and murdering Palestinian men, women and children?

Mirvis, it seems, just gave us his answer.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from the author

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The UK military refuses to tell Declassified what intelligence it is sharing with Israel as we reveal the extraordinary number of surveillance flights Britain is undertaking over Gaza from its base on Cyprus.

The UK military has flown 50 surveillance missions over Gaza since December, it can be revealed.

The flights have taken off from Britain’s controversial air base on Cyprus, RAF Akrotiri, and averaged around one a day since the beginning of December.

When asked the UK government refused to provide the number of spy flights, but Declassified has analysed flight tracking records.

The British plane used is the Shadow R1, which is known as an intelligence, surveillance, target acquisition and reconnaissance (ISTAR) aircraft.

The Shadow R1 is operated by the UK military’s No.14 Squadron, which is based at RAF Waddington in Lincolnshire, east England.

The UK military recently awarded a £110m contract to the plane’s manfacturer, US weapons company Raytheon, to update the aircraft and increase the British fleet from six to eight.

The British flights began on 3 December when two R1s flew over Gaza. The flights have continued nearly daily up until now, with around half the days featuring two flights. On 3 January, the British sent an R1 over Gaza three times.

The flights appear to last around six hours.

Intelligence

The UK Ministry of Defence announced on 2 December that it would begin surveillance flights over Gaza “in support of the ongoing hostage rescue activity”. 

“The safety of British nationals is our utmost priority,” the department said. “Surveillance aircraft will be unarmed, do not have a combat role, and will be tasked solely to locate hostages”. 

It added:

“Only information relating to hostage rescue will be passed to the relevant authorities responsible for hostage rescue.”

But the extraordinary number of flights, and the fact that they started nearly two months after the hostages were taken, raises suspicions that the UK is not collecting intelligence solely for this purpose. 

Foreign secretary David Cameron confirmed last week that Hamas holds just two British hostages. 

Israeli forces are also on the ground in Gaza, and notoriously have wide-ranging surveillance capabilities in the territory. It is unclear what Britain’s R1s can add to the hostage rescue mission. 

A British R1 Shadow surveillance aircraft, which is collecting intelligence over Gaza, at RAF Waddington in Lincolnshire. (Photo: Creative Commons)

Change in Role

The British government previously said its surveillance assets had a more wide-ranging role for Israel. 

On 7 November, defence minister James Heappey told parliament that British “flights have provided surveillance support to Israel, including preventing the transfer of weapons to terrorist groups, and to wider regional security.”

Heappey also said the surveillance flights were to “improve our situational awareness in the region and provide assurance to our partners”, assumed to mean Israel. 

Heappey refused, however, to disclose the number of flights Britain had made over Gaza.

“For operational security reasons, I cannot comment on the specifics of this activity,” he said. 

A week after the 7 October attack, the UK government announced military units would be deployed to the eastern Mediterranean “to support Israel, reinforce regional stability and prevent escalation”. The military package included P8 surveillance aircraft alongside other reconnaissance assets.

Declassified has previously revealed the US spy force, 1st Expeditionary Reconnaissance Squadron, is permanently deployed at the British base on Cyprus alongside 129 American airmen. 

Declassified also reported on a leaked US cable in which a UK official said American spy flights from Britain’s Cyprus base “have become routine” and the “intelligence product” is often “passed to third party governments”, which is likely to include Israel.

The UK Ministry of Defence and US Department of Defense both refused to comment to Declassified on what intelligence they are sharing with the Israelis.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Matt Kennard is chief investigator at Declassified UK. He was a fellow and then director at the Centre for Investigative Journalism in London. Follow him on Twitter @kennardmatt

Featured image: Flight path of a British spy flight on its way to Gaza on Monday. (Screengrab: RadarBox)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

***

LISTEN TO THE SHOW


Click to download the audio (MP3 format)

“Most analysts and historians fail to understand that starting in the early 1980s, China had become a full fledged capitalist country. There are powerful US business interests including Big Pharma, major hi-tech companies, banking institutions which are firmly entrenched inside China.” [1]

China has now become a dynamic global financial superpower. Since 2010, it is second economically only to the United States. [2]

Nowadays, according to the United States Statistics Division, “China makes up 28.4% of total world manufacturing output accounting for over $4 trillion to the world economy! The United States makes up 16.6% of Global output worth $1.8 trillion. The third largest exporter does not even make it into the double digits.”[3]

The graph that follows demonstrates quite starkly the rise in the countries’ GDP from 1960 to 2022. [4]

Indeed, the nation has taken a leadership role in building a new generation of Silk Roads across Eurasia. And BRICS, the group comprising Brazil, Russia, India, China and South Africa has now added five new members: Iran, the United Arab Emirates, Saudi Arabia, Egypt and Ethiopia. The partnership is now larger than the G7![5]

But the Red Dragon is more than a competitor. It is a threat! At least that’s the thinking of the Pentagon. [6]

According to the U.S. Department of Defense 2022 National Defense Strategy, the People’s Republic of China “remains our most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades” and quoting President Biden’s National Security Strategy, the PRC is “the most consequential strategic competitor for the coming decades.” [7]

Strangely though, the course taken by China for the last fifty years, got significant help from Henry Kissinger and the Trilateral Commission which was born in 1973 from two American minds: Zbigniew Brzezinski and David Rockefeller. The Organization is supposedly devoted to bringing together leaders in policy, business and media in an attempt to solve “some of the world’s toughest problems.” [8][9]

Now that an election in the island of Taiwan recently chose a leader, Vice President Lai Ching-te, who is propping up commitments to opposing unification with China, commentators in the U.S. media are speculating on the likelihood of China doing something, like upping its military presence in the country. Something these “Authoritarian Regimes” are expected to do. [10]

This episode of the Global Research News Hour takes a special look at China, its background, and the threats, real and imaginary that are in evidence at this crucial time after the Taiwan election and historically generally.

In our first half hour, we invite back writer and author Patrick Wood to guide us through Technocracy, the true politics of China post 1980. He will share the role of Kissinger and the Trilats in moulding this system to their liking and ultimately taking over countries around the world.

In our second half hour, we are treated once again to the reflections and assessments of Pepe Escobar. He will put forward his views about the Taiwan election, China’s advancement, and the advance of the Russia-China Axis of resistance into the future.

Patrick Wood is a leading and critical expert on Sustainable Development, Green Economy, Agenda 21, 2030 Agenda and historic Technocracy. He is the author of Technocracy Rising: The Trojan Horse of Global Transformation (2015) and co-author of Trilaterals Over Washington, Volumes I and II (1978-1980) with the late Antony C. Sutton. He is also a leading expert on the elitist Trilateral Commission. He is a frequent speaker and guest on radio shows across the U.S.

Pepe Escobar, born in Brazil, is a correspondent and editor-at-large at Asia Times and columnist for Consortium News, The Cradle and Strategic Culture. Since the mid-1980s he’s lived and worked as a foreign correspondent in London, Paris, Milan, Los Angeles, Singapore, Bangkok. He has extensively covered Pakistan, Afghanistan and Central Asia to China, Iran, Iraq and the wider Middle East. Pepe is the author of Globalistan – How the Globalized World is Dissolving into Liquid War; Red Zone Blues: A Snapshot of Baghdad during the Surge. He was contributing editor to The Empire and The Crescent and Tutto in Vendita in Italy. His last two books are Empire of Chaos and 2030. Pepe is also associated with the Paris-based European Academy of Geopolitics. When not on the road he lives between Paris and Bangkok.

(Global Research News Hour Episode 417)

LISTEN TO THE SHOW


Click to download the audio (MP3 format)

Transcript of Patrick Wood, January 15, 2024

Global Research: China is a technocracy, that is, with a new governing system that is neither communist nor capitalist nor democratic. This is the point of view argued by my first guest, Patrick Wood. He is a leading and critical expert on sustainable development, green economy of Agenda 21, 2030 Agenda and historic technocracy. Also, a frequent speaker and guest on radio shows across the United States. Global Research News Hour got hold of him and started our conversation by getting him to help define technocracy.

Patrick Wood: Technocracy as it was invented in 1932, was defined as a “Replacement economic system for free market economics and capitalism.” There is no other way to explain it. It was a resource-based economic system, not predicated on supply and demand. Money was going to be exchanged for energy and in particular, energy script, that would serve as a currency sort of – so to speak, to regulate the economic activity.

It’s also interesting that they were very interested in social engineering, as well. There was a problem that they had that they couldn’t make things, factories and so on, you couldn’t get people to do what you wanted them to do. So, they created this elaborate system of social engineering – and they call it a science, science of social engineering – we see this today almost everywhere we look.

GR: So, I guess —

PW: People are messing with our minds. There’s just no end of it, right?

GR: When it first occurred to people, I guess the technology wasn’t quite ready, 50 or 60 or 70 years later the technology caught up and now —

PW: Mm-hmm.

GR: — they’re moving ahead, right?

PW: That’s exactly right. This whole concept was adopted by the Trilateral Commission as I argue in my books. That was created by David Rockefeller and Zbigniew Brzezinski in 1979 – excuse me, 1973. And the Trilateral Commission stated that it wanted to create a new international economic order. It was all over their literature at the time. And I see, now, that they were talking about technocracy as a new economic system. They didn’t really specify back then, but I see it now very clearly that that’s what they were talking about back then.

GR: You wrote that the Trilateral Commission and Henry Kissinger in particular played roles in taking China as a communist state and turning it into a technocracy. Explain, you know, what went on and how it has gone from being a communist country to no longer a – to being more of a technocracy.

PW: Well, Brzezinski in 1976 brought Deng Xiaoping to the United States. Wined him – that was the Chairman of the Communist Party at that point. They wined him, they dined him, and you know, brought him onto the world stage. At that point, China looked a lot like North Korea does today. They basically had no economic system at all, they were mired in poverty as a nation and as a people. And when Brzezinski got ahold of him, Chairman Deng, he taught him about technocracy. Not about capitalism, not about free market economics. He taught him about technocracy.

Now let me back up here and say, “Why?” The thing that endeared Brzezinski to Rockefeller was Brzezinski’s book circa 1970 called, “Between Two Ages: America’s Role in the Technetronic Era.” That was the exact title of his book. In that book, he described a vision of how technology was going to be used to basically conquer the world. He foresaw a future age where this technetronic era – it really should have been “technocratic,” but that’s the term he uses. So, this is what China started out with, with this vision of the technetronic era.

We’ve seen this – I’ve seen this, others haven’t, obviously – but I see this as a continuing trap against the free world where they are marching to a different drummer and it’s not capitalism, it’s not communism.

But scholars have pointed out that technocracy has become the de-facto system that China is operating under right now. And that’s not just me saying that. You know, people study China – political science people and so on – they see it. But nobody else wants to really hear what we have to say about it.

GR: Wow. So, China was really the first test case, as it were, —

PW: Yeah.

GR: — where there were these principles being applied. I mean, what exactly is the whole roster of reasons why they made China the test case?

PW: It was a blank slate. There was nothing blocking them. The huge – China had a huge population, number one. But it was an absolute empty chalkboard. You could put anything on it you want to. That’s what they did. There was no other nation on Earth of the size of China that could be plied by these people, that is, the elitists of the Trilateral Commission. And when their contractors, their companies that belong to the Trilateral Commission, when they moved in on China, it staged all the infrastructure that they needed, that they would need, to conquer the West with all the industries that subsequently moved to China. Took away jobs from us, took away economic activity from us. And this was their mission. They wanted to build this nation quickly into a technocratic model that would export itself all over the world, including back to us again.

GR: So, there are other nations that are also becoming, you know, taking on technocracy. Is this all like – you planted the seed in China and it spread from there? There’s like Singapore, South Korea, and you know, other places. Or did – was there the United States’ involvement in helping to spread it around the – beyond China?

PW: Well, there’s two parts to that story. One is: China is proud that they have taken their influence to nations around the world who would receive it to export their technocracy to those nations. On the other hand, you look at the United States now which is then a willing participant with China to this same end.

This follows a very long history of finance by Wall Street interests, for instance. Again, and also, a global multi-national corporations. These people – let’s look too at the World Economic Forum, too, with all the companies that are invested in them. All of these forces have seemingly joined up with China to export technocracy all over the world. The United Nations has had a place in this as well with sustainable development. It’s the same, you know, warmed-over technocracy from the last century. But the United Nations has pushed this sustainable development agenda all over the world. And China is big with the United Nations, as you know as well. But they’ve been doing this by stealth, mostly, for the last 50 years, and here we are now.

GR: What are some of the specific concerns you have about technocracy that have begun to manifest in countries like the United States or France or Canada, and you know, countries of that high grade?

PW: It’s going to result in a scientific dictatorship at some point. It’s on its way right now. A lot of people can see it, especially like China with their social credit scoring system where they can control people almost to minutiae. But the concept of a scientific dictatorship is that the science, the algorithm, the AI, et cetera, will manage the human population as a dictator. Not as a person, it will – like a human might be, maybe a Hitler or a Nero or whatever from history. But a scientific dictatorship will have absolutely no compassion, no capacity for mercy or human values that we would like to be part of. And the result of it is: all personal freedom will be gone. Absolutely smashed.

GR:  I know that you started to write about artificial intelligence, you just mentioned it, the AI. And I mean, I’ve heard recently that someone said that now that employers are – they’re not evaluating people who apply for jobs. You let AI do it and then they’ll screen out people on all kinds of weird principles, you know? Like even the adjustment of their name or other things that maybe something we didn’t intend, but the AIs are doing it. Not exactly the direction I saw it going, but you know – do you think that the existence of this AI – and it’s still kind of we’re not quite sure where it’s going, but will it act as an accelerator of sorts to technocracy and these distinctions that you’ve expressed?

PW: Absolutely. And I want to say that AI and most of the progressive technologies that we see today, these are all – they’ve all been sponsored by technocrats along the way who do not care about ethical values or moral values in what they do. They invent because they can, not because anybody asked them to. As a group, they are morally bankrupt, in my opinion.

But when somebody like a Sam Altman, for instance, talks about OpenAI, you’ll see him talking about, ‘Well, it’s going to be a big threat to humanity. It can destroy us all in the end.’ Other AI people are saying that too, by the way. But then, they go back to their own turf, to their own drawing board, get out the whip and slam their programmers into high gear, ‘Get with it guys, we got to be’ – you know, ‘we’re going to beat the competition out there.’ There’s no checks and balances in this.

We see this with other things as well: big pharma is a big one right now. These people are totally unplugged from reality, in my opinion. And they also exhibit a technocratic mindset that’s so dangerous. They’re coming up with stuff that they should not even be doing experiments with.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PW: But, you know —

GR:  Yeah, it seems like we’re not – that it’s starting off as AI being servants to human kind, but now pretty soon it’s going to be the other way around, right?

PW: Well, it is. This is what is intended in the first place.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PW: It may have started off, you know, more innocuous. But now that these technocrat minds have got ahold of it, they see this as the end game of social engineering. This was in the their plan, this was in their credo way back in the 1930s. They wanted to use the science of social engineering to control everything in society. They can do that now. At least they’re on the verge of it right now.

We see this AI is just sweeping the world and it’s showing up in all the places that is displacing workers. I saw this article yesterday it was, I think, that Wal-Mart now is firing all of the people who checks the receipts when you leave the store. You know, the checkers? I don’t know —

GR: Yeah.

PW: — what they call them, but you know, they sit there and they look at your basket and then give you a check mark and there you go. You leave the store with whatever you bought. They’re using AI now to check these baskets completely. No humans now are going to do this. And they said they’re going to fire every checker in the country and they’re going to replace it with an AI scanner who can see exactly what you’ve got in your cart. They don’t say that they’re going to record your conversation or they take a picture of you for, you know, facial recognition scans. But I wouldn’t be surprised if it does. But you know, we see this everywhere now. You keep – once your eyes are open to it, you’ll see it being applied in all unexpected places.

GR: Mm-hmm. Yeah, well we’re just about out of time now. But would you like to add any remaining thoughts you have about the technocratic course China has been on and how other countries are either —

PW: Yeah.

GR: — embracing and how they can resist China’s —

PW: Yes.

GR: — technocratic example.

PW: Yes. Let me just – let me say that the Rockefeller crowd has always been fond of China going back to the 1920s at least. They’ve had a love affair with China and that probably added to their desire to, you know, bring China back on the world stage. We see people like Brzezinski achieving this. We see this with people like the late Henry Kissinger who was the forerunner of Brzezinski to bring China out of the Dark Ages.

Kissinger was a Rockefeller man since his college days. He served as an agent of Rockefeller personally and as a stooge of – with the Trilateral Commission, as well. But you might remember that Kissinger recently bragged that he had been to China on over 100 trips in his lifetime. You have to think what that means. There were some years that he went once. Other years, he went four times perhaps, but he was in love with China all those years. And when he died, Chairman Xi said about Henry Kissinger, that he was, “Our most valuable and trusted friend over the decades.” This just tells you something about what’s going on here.

GR: And just in the minute we’ve got left, I mean, just maybe remind us about how we could go about resisting this technocratic example that’s —

PW: You bet. People can go to technocracy.news, that’s the first place that I would go to get in the swim of the news here. I would also encourage people to go to citizensforfreespeech.org to see where – or at least the role that free speech is going to play this year especially in 2024.

Transcript of Pepe Escobar, January 16, 2024

(Escobar here is commenting on the result of the January 13 election in Taiwan.)

Global Research: This election result was actually a weaker result in the sense that it only commands a minority of the seats in the legislative body. Does that mean the US concern about increasing chances of China possibly marching militarily into Taiwan to fend off any threats to the One China principle, does that have any merit?

Pepe Escobar: Oh, God. Look, I’ve been listening to this movement for —

GR: Yeah.

PE: — so long, I really lost track, you know? When I used to live in Asia, in Southeast Asia in Hong Kong, I used to go to China a lot during the War on Terror years, et cetera. There’s not going to be a Chinese invasion of China. This is a figment of Straussian neocon psycho’s imagination. These people obviously never read Deng Xiaoping. And it’s very easy. Why don’t you get Deng Xiaoping’s complete works? It’s all there.

There is no rush. The reunification of Taiwan will happen when the conditions are right and the, let’s say, informal deadline which Deng was always reiterating, is 2049.

GR: Hmm.

PE: What is happening, what has been happening has happened and will continue to happen is endless American provocations because they want to force Beijing’s hand. And obviously, they use their fifth-columnists all over Taipei they use to manipulate the American embassy in Hong Kong for that manner. They have their colour revolution specialists working in reverse in Taipei, you name it.

GR: Mm-hmm, yes.

PE: The result of these elections is very straightforward, I will cut to the chase totally: Lai got basically 40 percent of the vote. So, he is, for all practical purposes, a lame duck president. The opposition unfortunately, because they are split, they got roughly 60 percent of the vote. So, Lai got 40.5 percent compared to Tsai, the last time when she got 57 percent. So, it’s a minority government. They lost their parliamentary majority. They have most of the country in effect against them. Let’s say almost – easily almost two thirds of the country against them.

And what the Taiwanese – and this is something that from Hong Kong and from Shanghai, from other parts of the Chinese diaspora, we get inside information from Taipei. And what the Taiwanese basically say directly or between the lines is, ‘We prefer the status quo.’ So, this means nothing is going to change for a long, long time.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PE: They know that Beijing is not going to do anything rash. They know that it would be absolutely foolish and suicidal for a minority president, for instance, to declare – or push independence or declare independence. So, the status quo is the default position of the overwhelming majority of Taiwanese. Obviously, none of that will preclude more American operations, destabilizing American operations, all sorts of hybrid war you can imagine or even later on, depending on how things evolve in the next two or three years. A false flag or a series of false flags.

GR: Mm-hmm.

PE: But if we take into consideration what Beijing wants, what Xi Jinping wants, and what the Taiwanese population want, there will be nothing violent on the horizon for the next years and we can even say decades. When we start approaching 2049 it’s another matter, because then – it’s already happening now. The interconnection of geo-economic especially between Taiwan and the mainland is huge. Not to mention, of course, this is all facilitated by the fact that most of them study in the same schools and they speak the same language.

So, it’s basically already integrated. What the Chinese may come up with in I would say the mid-term is a sort of one country, three systems. One country, three systems applies to Hong Kong. One country, three systems would apply to Taiwan, like Taiwan with an enormous margin of autonomy, but part of the mainland as well. This is something that could evolve, I’m sure. The people around Xi could come up with a very seductive framework that would be accepted by the majority of the Taiwanese population, as well. Everything apart from that is American wishful thinking, wet dreams, speculation, and frankly impotence. Because they know that to provoke a war, a proxy-war against China via Taiwan could probably be their Ukraine. Or Ukraine 2.0. And we all know what is happening to Ukraine right now, so I end my case here.

GR: Yeah. Well, in your recent article, “Year of the Dragon: Silk Roads, BRICS Roads, Sino-Roads,” you know, I mean we see about how China and its allies have been building bridges, building the high-speed rail all across Eurasia basically. And you know, this is a counterpart to the United States going and you know, starting wars here and there on, you know, engaged in two wars right now. They had a whole bunch of wars. They must be getting a little bit leery about entering into any new conflicts. Certainly, you know, a military conflict in China is simply off the table, although, you know, I don’t know about the colour revolution and so on. Anyway, I’m wondering about these plans there. It seems to be, you know, kind of critical for its – for China’s rise and success and… When exactly did it have its origin? I mean, it’s part of a long-term strategy. Did it start way back in the 1970s when it started its economic rise? Or did it follow its rise in might?

PE: Well, this is the story of my professional life this past 30 years. I’ve been writing about this practically on a weekly basis since the mid-90s. I moved to Asia 30 years ago, in fact. I moved to Asia from the West in 1994, because I wanted to know Asia from the inside and especially what I had seen in China when I travelled in China in the early ‘90s which was – it happened to coincide with Deng Xiaoping’s visit, the famous visit to the South. When Deng Xiaoping went to Shenzhen, Dongguan, Guangzhou and he gave the major impetus for the modernization drive of China based on these special economic zones in the South and then also in Shanghai. So, when you see that in front of you happening, I was so floored and I said, ‘Well, I have to come here and try to understand this from the inside.’

Then, when you start living in Asia and when you start going to China on a frequent basis. And in my case, when you live in Hong Kong where you have access to everything, all sorts of information coming from China, the transit through Hong Kong, then you understand the big picture and you understand the long-term big picture. Which came not only from Deng when Deng came to power in ‘78. It came during the Mao industrialization era.

And that’s why in this column that you mentioned, I reference one of the very, very good books about it explaining how everything that Deng, in fact, could use later on in this industrialization drive in the ‘80s and in the ‘90s. The basis were put by – the very complicated process of industrialization of China initiated during Mao.

So, when you understand – so, this did not come out of the blue. And China is a big power, it’s not something that started when they entered the WTO in 2001, you know, 20 years ago. It started 50 years ago, at least, not more. And that’s what extraordinary they are – there is a consistency to it. There are degrees, very complex degrees of planning in terms of succeeding a five-year plans that they multiply into three, five-year plans in one, for instance.

You know, two or three years ago, they were already planning all the way to 2035. This is something that is absolutely impossible in the West, where the US cannot plan for next week. Can you image doing three, five-year plans and discussing it? And discussing out of a grassroots basis, which is something that many people in the West don’t understand.

Lots of decisions that arrive at the Politburo and then at Xi’s desk for instance, they start at the grassroots level, they are presented in grassroots meetings, they go to regional governments, and then they start climbing the pyramid. And then, one day they reach the pyramid and there is a decision based on something that started in a little prefecture in the middle of a province in Sichuan, for instance.

It’s fascinating. It’s a form of a direct democracy that is not – it’s not fully appreciating the West – it’s not even understood how it works. So, and that’s what makes it so special in terms of – the Chinese system for everything that we can criticize about it, there’s no question about that. It’s essentially a meritocratic system. And this is what Xi has been very, very careful to emphasize since he came to power and since he started the overarching international Chinese framework of development, connectivity, which is the Belt and Road Initiative started a little over 10 years ago.

They’ve learned from their mistakes. They are always applying Deng Xiaoping, you know, crossing the river while filling the stones. So you know, you may slip in one of the stones and fall into the river and then you’ll go back and you’ll learn from your mistake. And this is what they’re doing all the time.

In terms of the Belt and Road, for instance, they made a lot of mistakes in the beginning in terms of loans that went to projects that would go nowhere. Or you know, instead of relying on a local workforce, bringing loads of Chinese workers. And they’re learning, they are reorganizing all that. They are learning from the Russians, as well, in terms of Russia – Russia is a multinational society, minorities living in Russia. The Chinese are learning to be more supple vis-a-vis their minorities the way the Russians are.

And this all has to do with high levels of education and a meritocracy. Which seems to be the exact opposite of what’s happening with the West right now. Low levels of education, lower and lower, and no meritocracy at all.

GR: Yeah, interesting. Could you talk about the artificial intelligence just for a minute, the AI. Because, you know, the US chips for AI, they are manufactured largely in Taiwan, you know, the Nvidia.

PE: Yeah.

GR: The Chinese chips that are faster now are being developed in China and —

PE: Of course.

GR: Yeah. But they could lead to China – like, the US is in the lead right now, but China could overtake them by 2030 or so. Could you talk about the development of that technology? Also, its role in the Taiwan situation and where this could lead in the Cold War, the Cold War 2.0 as it were, possibly thawing even between the United States and China.

PE: Yeah, but that’s – it proves once again that sanctions are some of the most stupid methods of coercion in modern history. It didn’t work with Iran, it didn’t work with Cuba. It didn’t work with Venezuela, it didn’t work with Russia. And it’s not working with China. It’s very simple.

The Chinese – so, we cannot buy what we need from CSMC, Taiwan, or Nvidia, no problem. We’re going to make it ourselves. And the capital was already there, and the main power, and the extremely well-educated tech workforce was already there. It was a matter of time.

During the Trump era, some of us were thinking, ‘Oh, shit, it’s going to take them at least until 2037, 2038 to have breakthroughs.’ No, they had a breakthrough in 2023. And even when they launched the new Huawei Mate 60 Pro with their own operating systems with AI, top of the line AI and all that, everybody in the West goes, ‘How did they do that?’ It’s very simple: if you visit Huawei’s headquarters in Shenzhen and their research centre, something that I did a few years ago, they are already thinking what’s going to happen – what they were going to be using in 2030, 2035. So, it’s very, very simple.

It’s education, tech education, and planning. And of course, unlimited capital. Because this is directly linked to the official tech strategy which was elaborated even before Trump came to power. And when Trump came to power and looked at it and he freaked out, that’s why he started all those sanctions. Which is something that the Chinese were calling at the time, ‘Made in China 2025.’

Basically by 2025 next year, they wanted to be top or near the top in 10 tech departments, including artificial intelligence, quantum physics, you name it. They’re getting there. After the sanctions, they abandoned the model ‘Made in China 2025’ which was freaking out the Americans big, big time. They stopped talking about it, but they continued to do the same thing. And they even allocated more capital to high end research. And also, research that they do, I wouldn’t say under the table, but in close collaboration, covert and overt with Samsung, for instance, and with CSMC in Taiwan, as well.

So, this is all interconnected. And in the high tech world, everything is interconnected and information flows. Information could flow, for instance, from a WeChat message from one engineer in Rotterdam to one engineer in Shanghai, for instance. And then you have a breakthrough. This is how it works. There is no censorship among – this politicization of science, this is something completely stupid, it doesn’t exist. Scientists talk to each other. So obviously, this was bound to happen. Of course, it happened much faster than anyone could ever imagine.

And now, China, they can have all the chips that they need: 7 nm, 5 nm, 3 nm, whatever, by 2035, which happens to be what they wanted to do in the first place when they came up with this concept of Made in China 2025.

GR: Mm-hmm. I only have like maybe a couple of minutes left, but I just wanted to know what your thoughts are about when China has essentially really pushed ahead of the United States. I mean, there was – I’m thinking maybe the China-Russia alliance has been – there’s been so much interaction there financially. I think it was probably around the time of the Russian’s – well, the Russia-Ukraine engagement and then there was all sorts of – that may have been a key moment, because that’s when we saw a shift, you know, financially and so on. But I don’t know, maybe it’s even more recent or it’s just accelerating, you know, since then. But what would you say is the moment or moments —

PE: Well, Michael – Michael, this is what I rant about every week. Literally, this is what I write about every week, this is what I think and discuss every week wherever I am, here in Europe, or in Russia, or when I go to Southeast Asia or to Central Asia. And it has to do with the Russia-China strategic partnership which is something that very, very few people in the West even understand what it is and understand what it means and understand how it works. Very few people know that. And this is reflected in the personal encounters between Xi and Putin year after year. In the discussion at the highest level with the Minister of Foreign Affairs, Minister of Defence, and their tech environment as well. The Union of BRICS which was basically a Russia-China driven process. The two major powers on BRICS are Russia-China and they coordinate how BRICS are organizing, going to spend, especially this year where the Russian presidency of the BRICS will coordinate the next level of expansion. It’s going to be BRICS 12, 15, 17, 18 probably in Kazan at the summit later this year, in October this year. Their interactions, Shanghai Cooperation Organization, the fact that the Belt and Road Initiative, 10 years old, is – and the Eurasian Economic Union from 2015, they are getting closer and closer together. And you’re going to have projects that include countries that are members of the Eurasian Economic Union and the Belt and Road, and expanding two countries with which the Eurasian Economic Union has free trade agreements. For instance, they have it with Vietnam, they just clinched one with Iran. So, everything is interlocked. And the Russia-China strategic partnership is a sort of master coordinator of this whole process. And it includes military cooperation, which obviously none of us know the intimate details. But it is virtually sure that, for instance, the Chinese now have access to Russian hypersonic technology.

GR: Wow.

PE: Because this has been discussed at the highest level by their Ministries of Defence. And the fact that their strategy in terms of trying to – I would say muzzle the hegemon, it’s not fight the hegemon. It’s to try to muzzle a hegemon that is absolutely out of control now. It implies that they have to discuss – all major decisions have to be taken at the highest level and they have to be coordinated. And this includes the way they are supporting, by not supporting, or even feigning their supporting Gaza which is an extremely complex dossier where they act Alas Su Su or they act in a very Chinese way: in total silence. And we know that when they are not resolutely against something it’s because they are supporting it —

GR: Hmm.

PE: — in the background. Same thing about the whole Axis of Resistance. And this applies to Hezbollah, the militias in Iraq, Iran obviously as a whole. The fact that Iran, Russia military relationship now is 100% on both sides. This is something that I had in Moscow a few months ago where the Iranians said, ‘Basically, we told the Russians, “Anything you need, you can get it.”’ So, it’s at this this level nowadays. And the same thing between Russia, China, and Iran, between the three of them. These are the three poles of Eurasian integration.

GR: Okay.

PE: So obviously, the Americans don’t even understand how it works. So, how they can counter at a concerted drive in very well-regarded – nice strategy by these three major poles of Eurasia integration that applies to everything: high tech, artificial intelligence, geopolitically, geoeconomically. And of course, doing everything they can to prevent a frontal clash with the Americans. There is no interest by Beijing or by the Kremlin to have a direct, frontal clash with the Americans because they know how irresponsible and how unprepared the people running American foreign policy at the moment are.

So, they are basically trying to contain and muzzle this out of control, very dangerous animal. So, if you don’t understand these processes which these people in the Beltway, for instance, don’t. Or the people at NATO don’t, or the people at the European Commission don’t, you don’t understand what is happening all across Eurasia. And how, what is happening in Eurasia, is basically looked at by the whole Global South as, ‘Okay, this is the next game in town.’ And it’s now the only game in town, because we simply cannot trust anything that the Americans say or do. They are, as the Russians define them, ‘Non-agreement capable empire.’ And what the Eurasian integration process is offering to the whole Global South, to the Latin Americans, Southeast Asians, to Africans, et cetera, is mutual respect, connectivity corridors, trade – make trade, not war. Rejecting of forever wars. Multi-polarity and basically a fair, equitable system of international relations which is something that they would like to implement at the UN, but not at the UN as we know it today, the way the UN works today which is completely dysfunctional.

So, this is the macro-picture of why, for instance, what happens if Russia had some difficulty in one field, or Iran in another or China in another. They can talk among themselves and try to find solutions among themselves and talk to their partners as well in this big, let’s say greater Eurasia partnership which is a wonderful way that the Russians found to describe this process of integration.


The Global Research News Hour airs every Friday at 1pm CT on CKUW 95.9FM out of the University of Winnipeg. The programme is also podcast at globalresearch.ca .

Other stations airing the show:

CIXX 106.9 FM, broadcasting from Fanshawe College in London, Ontario. It airs Sundays at 6am.

WZBC 90.3 FM in Newton Massachusetts is Boston College Radio and broadcasts to the greater Boston area. The Global Research News Hour airs during Truth and Justice Radio which starts Sunday at 6am.

Campus and community radio CFMH 107.3fm in  Saint John, N.B. airs the Global Research News Hour Fridays at 7pm.

CJMP 90.1 FM, Powell River Community Radio, airs the Global Research News Hour every Saturday at 8am. 

Caper Radio CJBU 107.3FM in Sydney, Cape Breton, Nova Scotia airs the Global Research News Hour starting Wednesday afternoon from 3-4pm.

Cowichan Valley Community Radio CICV 98.7 FM serving the Cowichan Lake area of Vancouver Island, BC airs the program Thursdays at 9am pacific time.

Notes: 

  1. Michel Chossudovsky, Global Reseaerch, 2022 
  2. https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.MKTP.KD
  3. https://worldpopulationreview.com/country-rankings/manufacturing-by-country
  4.  World Bank, OECD; https://data.worldbank.org/indicator/NY.GDP.MKTP.KD
  5.  Javaid Mirza (January 2, 2024), ‘BRICS+ welcomes five new members in 2023’, Custom News; https://customnews.pk/2024/01/02/brics-welcomes-five-new-members-in-2023/
  6.   Tara Copp and Lolita C. Baldor (October 22, 2022)‘Pentagon: Despite Russia’s war, China still top threat to US’, Associated Press; https://apnews.com/article/europe-middle-east-china-united-states-beijing-4521a349b4171b4e9792a5ed96f6f44f
  7.  https://media.defense.gov/2022/Oct/27/2003103845/-1/-1/1/2022-NATIONAL-DEFENSE-STRATEGY-NPR-MDR.PDF
  8.  https://www.technocracy.news/day-7-china-is-a-technocracy/
  9.  https://www.trilateral.org/about/
  10.  Michael Martina and David Brunnstrom (January 5, 2024) ‘Analysis-Taiwan Election Poses Early 2024 Test of U.S. Aim to Steady China Ties’, Reuters; https://www.usnews.com/news/world/articles/2024-01-05/analysis-taiwan-election-poses-early-2024-test-of-u-s-aim-to-steady-china-ties

Former NATO Commander Calls to Bomb Crimea

January 21st, 2024 by Lucas Leiroz de Almeida

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Recently, Western support for Ukraine has been declining, leaving the regime’s officials concerned about the future of Kiev’s fighting capabilities. However, despite this tendency, there are still public figures in the West calling for a new escalation and the sending of more heavy weapons to Ukraine.

In a recent statement, American retired General Philip Breedlove, former NATO Supreme Allied Commander Europe, stated that the West should send heavy weapons to Kiev to enable intense attacks on the Crimea region. According to Breedlove, only by attacking Russian positions in the Black Sea will Ukraine be able to make Moscow “rethink its posture”.

Breedlove classified Crimea as the “center of gravity” and “the decisive terrain of the war.” For him, the key to “defeat” Russia is to hit Crimea as much as possible. He believes that the more attacks in the region, the more Russia will be affected and forced to retreat throughout the entire conflict zone. So, faced with the imminent depletion of Ukraine’s military capabilities, the general advises that NATO return to sending weapons at a massive level, mainly long-range missiles that allow deep attacks on Crimea.

“If we enable Ukraine to be able to strike Crimea — pervasively, persistently and precisely —Russia will be forced to rethink its posture there. Strike them all, strike them repeatedly, and destroy them in detail,” he said.

Breedlove’s opinion has long been shared by other officers. Neutralizing Russian positions in Crimea has been a Ukrainian ambition since 2022, with several unsuccessful attacks having taken place in the region. One of the main objectives is to destroy the Kerch Bridge, which is considered the logistical key of Crimea. Not by chance, Kiev launched terrorist attacks on the Bridge, killing civilians but failing to cause major damage to the infrastructure.

Not only that, but General Breedlove himself has already become well known for his radical stance regarding Crimea. In October last year, he published an article in Western media outlet stating that bombing Crimea was necessary in order to achieve the “Ukrainian victory”. He openly called for the destruction of the Kerch Bridge, labeling it a “legitimate target”. At the time, he also criticized all analysts’ arguments about the need to take precautions with these attacks to avoid an escalation in the conflict. Breedlove appears not to care about the possibility of an increase in the violence of hostilities, stating that it is necessary to inflict damage on Crimea regardless of the side effects.

“Several people I have spoken to say ‘dropping’ [destroying] Kerch bridge would be a huge blow to Russia. Kerch bridge is a legitimate target (…) I am a trained civil engineer and I know about bridge construction. All bridges have their weak points and if targeted in the right spot it could render Kerch bridge unserviceable for a period of time. But if they wanted to drop the bridge, that would require a more dedicated bombing operation (…) I hear a lot of people asking whether it is right for Ukraine to take such aggressive action and whether the West would support it, but I cannot understand that argument”, he said at the time.

It is also necessary to clarify that the strategic calculation behind this type of opinion is absolutely wrong. It is believed that by increasing pressure on Crimea, the Ukrainians will force the Russians to concentrate efforts in the region, neglecting the defense lines on the battlefield and facilitating Kiev’s territorial advance. With this, it would allegedly be possible for Ukrainian troops to reach the Black Sea by advancing on the ground, reversing the current military scenario.

However, this mentality seems naive. The Russian reaction to possible recurrent attacks on Crimea would not be through any abrupt change in the situation on the front lines, but rather through an exponential increase in bombings against strategic targets throughout Ukraine. Moscow’s military doctrine establishes artillery as the main factor in a combat scenario. To each Ukrainian attempt to escalate the fighting, the Russians react with heavy artillery, neutralizing military facilities, critical infrastructure and enemy decision-making centers.

In practice, Ukraine is at an impasse as it suffers more and more losses every time it tries to reverse the situation. The country is unable to change the scenario, having as an alternative only the peace negotiations under Russian terms – which NATO obviously does not allow Kiev to do. Furthermore, it is unlikely that the Atlantic alliance will resume sending long-range weapons in large quantities in the near future, as the US is deeply involved in the Middle Eastern conflict, diminishing its interest in the Ukrainian front.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on InfoBrics.

Lucas Leiroz is a journalist, researcher at the Center for Geostrategic Studies, geopolitical consultant. You can follow Lucas on X (former Twitter) and Telegram.

Featured image: General Philip Breedlove, then Supreme Allied Commander Europe, in 2014. (NATO)

Netanyahu’s Comments Show That Israel Is Not a Partner for Peace

January 21st, 2024 by Canadians for Justice and Peace in the Middle East

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Canadians for Justice and Peace in the Middle East (CJPME) is raising the alarm about yesterday’s comments by Israeli Prime Minister Netanyahu, who reiterated his firm opposition to a Palestinian state in any post-war scenario and asserted that Israel will maintain permanent control over all territory “West of the Jordan [river].” CJPME emphasizes that this position is not new, but has been expressed throughout Netanyahu’s career and is explicitly laid out in the Likud charter. Nonetheless, these comments serve as an important reminder that the Israeli political establishment is committed to the permanent oppression of the Palestinian people, and Canadian policy must be adjusted to reflect this reality.

First, Canada must recognize that the Israeli government is not acting in good faith and is not a partner for peace. This is a problem that extends beyond the Prime Minister. While senior ministers in Netanyahu’s far-right coalition openly push for the ethnic cleansing of Gaza, Netanyahu’s more ‘moderate’ rivals are promoting plans for Israel to maintain military control over Gaza while giving Palestinians greater autonomy, resembling the Bantustan system under apartheid South Africa. No Israeli leader has ever supported a truly independent Palestinian state, and decades of impunity have emboldened Israel to consolidate its illegitimate control over the occupied Palestinian territories (OPT). If Canada wants this situation to change, it must acknowledge the problem and change its approach. Only meaningful political and diplomatic pressure, including sanctions, can compel Israel to relinquish its control over the OPT.

Second, Canada must commit itself to the cause of Palestinian self-determination. This will require more than empty lip service about a “two-state solution.” Most people believe that after decades of deliberate policy, Israel has effectively killed the possibility of an independent Palestinian state. This means that Canada must be open to the possibility of a future in which Palestinians and Israelis share equal rights within a single democratic state. Regardless, this is a question that is up to the Palestinians themselves to decide. Canada does not get to dictate the form that the future political reality will take, how Palestinians will govern themselves, or who is allowed to sit at the table.

To affirm Palestinian self-determination, CJPME argues that Canada’s approach to a ‘post-war’ scenario must be based on the minimum following principles:

  • Canada must focus on achieving an immediate ceasefire before it turns its attention to the ‘day after,’ as such discussions can distract from the damage that Israel is inflicting on the civilian population every day. Given the scale and nature of Israel’s attacks, there may be no Gaza left at the end of this war. Halting Israel’s destruction of Gaza must be Canada’s highest priority.
  • Canada can accept nothing less than a full Israeli withdrawal from Gaza and the rest of the OPT. This requires more than a withdrawal of ground forces, but the termination of all forms of effective control, including over the movement of people and goods in and out of the territory. Israel must relinquish all power over the Palestinian people and dismantle its structures of oppression and apartheid.
  • Canada must insist that Palestinian refugees and internally displaced people have every opportunity to exercise their right to return to their homes. This is an issue that goes beyond the 1.9 million people who are currently displaced within Gaza. Two-thirds of the Gaza population were already refugees, originally displaced during the 1948 Nakba and the creation of Israel, and they have an inalienable right under international law to return. Their dispossession remains at the heart of the current conflict.
  • Canada must insist that Israel pay reparations to fund the rebuilding of Gaza. Israel is deliberately destroying all forms of physical and social infrastructure in the territory, and the international community must not be left financially responsible for addressing this catastrophe. Israel must know that it will pay for every building it turns to rubble.
  • Canada must acknowledge that it does not have the right to dictate who represents the Palestinian people, or how they govern themselves. Canada’s position that there is “no role for Hamas in the future governance of Gaza” directly contradicts this basic principle of self-determination and erodes the possibility of a negotiated end to the war.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Articolo e trasmissione a cura di Manlio Dinucci.

Martin Griffiths – Sottosegretario Generale delle Nazioni Unite per gli Affari Umanitari e Coordinatore degli Aiuti d’Emergenza – ha presentato al Consiglio di Sicurezza una documentata relazione, di cui riportiamo alcuni stralci:

“A Gaza sono state colpite 134 strutture della Agenzia delle Nazioni Unite per il soccorso dei rifugiati palestinesi, e sono stati uccisi 148 membri del personale delle Nazioni Unite.

Sono stati colpiti i centri di soccorso umanitario, nonostante che fossero identificati e notificati alle Forze israeliane. Mentre le operazioni di terra si spostano verso Sud, si sono intensificati i bombardamenti aerei nelle aree in cui i civili erano stati invitati a trasferirsi per la loro sicurezza.

Sempre più persone vengono stipate in una porzione di territorio sempre più piccola, solo per trovarvi ancora più violenza e privazioni, ripari inadeguati e la quasi assenza dei servizi più basilari. Rafah, dove prima della crisi la popolazione era di 280 mila abitanti, ospita oggi un milione di sfollati. E ogni giorno ne arrivano altri.

I nostri sforzi per inviare convogli umanitari nel Nord si sono scontrati con dinieghi e l’imposizione di condizioni impossibili. Colleghi che sono riusciti a raggiungere il Nord descrivono scene di assoluto orrore: cadaveri abbandonati sulle strade, persone affamate che bloccano i camion in cerca di tutto ciò che possono trovare per sopravvivere. E anche se riescono a tornare a casa, non hanno più una casa in cui vivere.

Cresce la pressione per lo spostamento in massa dei palestinesi nei Paesi vicini. Voglio sottolineare che a tutte le persone sfollate da Gaza deve essere permesso di tornarvi come richiede il Diritto Internazionale. Siamo profondamente allarmati dalle recenti dichiarazioni dei ministri israeliani sui piani per incoraggiare il trasferimento in massa di civili palestinesi da Gaza verso Paesi terzi, definito “trasferimento volontario”.

Queste dichiarazioni sollevano gravi preoccupazioni riguardo al possibile trasferimento forzato in massa o alla deportazione della popolazione palestinese dalla Striscia di Gaza, cosa che sarebbe rigorosamente vietata dal Diritto Internazionale.

Quello che abbiamo visto dal 7 Ottobre è una macchia sulla nostra coscienza collettiva. Se non agiamo, diventerà un marchio indelebile sulla nostra umanità. Resto estremamente preoccupato del rischio di un’ulteriore diffusione regionale di questo conflitto.

Non possiamo permettere che questa situazione si diffonda ulteriormente: le conseguenze di una conflagrazione più ampia sarebbero inimmaginabili.

 

VIDEO :

https://www.byoblu.com/2024/01/19/da-gaza-al-medioriente-la-strategia-della-catastrofe-onu-conseguenze-inimmaginabili/

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

This year will be decisive for the future agenda, with the upcoming United Nations Summit of the Future in September. This will lay the foundation for a strengthened economic global governance with the G20 in an elevated position within the UN and the international financial system.

The UN policy brief Reforms to the International Financial Architecture, that builds on proposals from United Nations Our Common Agenda, has suggested an “apex body” for economic coordination that will serve as a key component in order to achieve Agenda 2030 and the SDGs. This body is planned to include G20, UN and the global financial institutions and will gather at a biennial summit.

The slogan of G20 (Group of twenty), under the chairmanship of Brazil and President Lula da Silva, is “building a just world and a sustainable planet”. The focus areas are: “The three dimensions of sustainable development”, “Fighting hunger, poverty and inequality”, and “Global Governance Reform”.[1]

G20 was established after the Asian financial crisis in 1999 and evolved into the premier global forum to discuss and manage global challenges during the global financial crisis barely ten years later.

This kind of arrangement had previously been discussed at an Informal Gathering of World Economic Leaders (IGWEL) during the World Economic Forums annual summit in 1998.[2]

This resulted in a proposal from G7 finance ministers “to broaden the dialogue on key economic and financial policy issues among systemically significant economies.” They then invited these “significant economies” to a meeting in Berlin in December 1999.[3]

The ideas for this global governance arrangement had, however, been suggested as early as the 1970s by members of the Trilateral Commission. To be successful, it was deemed important to include the largest emerging economies. This was reflected in their 1976 report The Reform of International Institutions by C. Fred Bergsten, Georges Berthoin, and Kinhide Mushakoji.

At first, only finance ministers and central bank governors attended the meetings but since the 2008 G20 Summit on Financial Markets and the World Economy, heads of state or heads of government have been invited (among the first participants were Lula da Silva).

This upgrade was realised after advocacy from WEF. As stated in their 50 anniversary book WEF: A Partner in Shaping History 1971–2020:

Klaus Schwab, among others, proposed in several speeches to elevate the G20 meeting to become a true global summit.

G20 has since gradually been given more focus areas and is in effect an embryo for a world government. The G20 member states reach about 80 % of the world’s population, and the organisation functions like an executive council for implementing the UN Sustainable Development Goals as well as the WHO Health Agenda.

Former leader of the Soviet Union, Mikhael Gorbachev, once labeled it the “Global Politburo”. The group consists of 19 member states plus the European Union (EU) and the recently accepted the African Union (AU) as a member.

The Secretary General of the United Nations is a permanent guest attendee, together with representatives from The Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD), ASEAN, WTO, ILO, IMF, World Bank and the Financial Stability Board.

A major part of their work is done through the “finance track” and the “sherpa track”.

The finance track, with seven technical groups and one task force, deals with macro economics, and the building of a new international financial architecture. Attendees are representatives from the international financial institutions (The World Bank, IMF, BIS), regional development banks, finance ministers and central bank governors (FMCBGs).

Their Joint Task Force on Finance and Health is a forum that enhances Pandemic Prevention, Preparedness and Response (PPR) in “alignment with the One Health Approach and World Health Organization (WHO) priorities and objectives”. The secretariat is located at the WHO headquarters in Geneva and has support from The World Bank.[4]

The sherpa track has fifteen working groups (in areas like health, agriculture, education and the energy transition), two task forces and one “Bioeconomy Initiative”. The work is led by the personal emissaries of the G20 leaders. Other attendees are ministers from the G20 member countries and international organisations like OECD and United Nations.

G20 also constitutes 13 engagement groups from different parts of society. These include Women20, Youth20, Cities20 (mayors), Science20, Business20, and Think20 (think tanks). The latter two are the most powerful among these groupings. B20 has also close ties to WEF with Klaus Schwab as a member of the advisory council.

The latest addition is Oceans20, that promotes marine sustainability with support from the World Economic Forum.

These groupings claim to represent the voices of “civil society”. A Social Summit is held in November to reflect their proposals before the leaders summit.

G20 is this year governed by the three BRICS-countries Brazil (chair), South-Africa (incoming chair) and India (previous chair). This arrangement serves as a guarantee for a continuation of the agenda.

The connection between climate and health is as always a part of the program. This can be viewed in the light of this years World Health Assembly which is set to give WHO extended authority and give rise to the “One Health Regime”. WHO Director-General Tedros Adhanom recently recently praised Brazil’s priorities.[5]

One of the proposals is “Resilient Health Systems”, that “aims to defend universal health systems to face the major challenges of global health governance, such as those caused by the climate crisis”. A mechanism will be discussed that “allows creditor governments to exchange debts for health results”.[6]

This is framed as a part of achieving the United Nations SDG 3 – Health and Well-being.

Will this result in forced vaccination of the populations in the poor countries in order to be saved from bankruptcy?

One wonders what kind of surprises that are hidden up their sleeves?

Should we be worried that one of the panels (including Tedros Adhanom and Brazil’s Health Minister Nisia Trindade Lima) at next weeks annual WEF-meeting is called “Preparing for Disease X”?

With fresh warnings from the World Health Organization that an unknown “Disease X” could result in 20 times more fatalities than the coronavirus pandemic, what novel efforts are needed to prepare healthcare systems for the multiple challenges ahead?[7]

Brazil will also launch the Task Force for the Global Mobilization Against Climate Change “to enhance global macroeconomic and financial alignment to implement the goals of the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change and the Paris Agreement”.[8]

Brazil is the world’s seventh largest oil producer, and it is not very likely that they would kill the goose that lays their golden eggs. This has more to do with the creation of a new technocratic economic system built around the use of energy and a carbon currency.

The academic think tank Sustainable Finance Lab recently proposed a global carbon coin. A currency based on “natural stock of some sort, or the remaining carbon budget.”

This way a new global reserve currency can emerge. This not only has environmental benefits but also answers a growing call to bring more balance into the now unipolar global monetary system — a call coming clearly from the large emerging BRICS economies.[9]

BRICS – The Voice of the Global South

So let’s talk about BRICS. Are they an alternative? Many people seem to think so.

The group was founded by Brazil, Russia, India and China in Yekaterinburg, Russia, in 2009 as BRIC, and are seen as a counterweight to the West-dominated G7. The voice of the Global South. One year later, with the addition of South Africa, they became BRICS.

The 2024 BRICS summit was initially to be held in Brazil but was transferred to Russia and Vladimir Putin due to Brazil’s commitments as host of G20 this year.

The Leader’s Summit will take place in Kazan, Tatarstan, in October with the mission to establish a “fair” world order.[10] This stands, according to Putin, in opposition to the “rules based” order that is promoted by the West and G7. The motto is “Strengthening Multilateralism for Equitable Global Development and Security”.[11] This time with the participation of five new member states.

One of the new countries is the United Arab Emirate, also the host of the WEF-affiliated World Governments Summit and the latest international climate summit – COP28. UAE is a role model country for the futuristic agenda that WEF is promoting through the Fourth Industrial Revolution. They are a key partner of WEF as well as the main hub for the United Nations in the Middle East.

A more surprising new edition is the theocratic Islamic republic Iran. An arch-enemy of the US and Israel that has forged alliances with China and Russia, and sells oil to India.

With the addition of Saudi-Arabia, this also means that six of the world’s ten top oil producers are members of BRICS.

World's biggest oil producers

This gives the BRICS some muscles. But it is a group with clear dividing lines between the member states. They are dispersed on three continents, have cultural and religious differences and are somewhat crippled by a leadership struggle between India and China.

The new members Iran and Saudi-Arabia also compete for influence in the Middle East and have been involved in proxy-wars against each other. Iran is the leading Shia Muslim power whereas Saudi Arabia is the leading Sunni Muslim power. Diplomatic relations are, however, restored with the help of China since March 2023.

G7 are a lot more homogenous with a clear defined leader (but with waning power).

BRICS are not, as often portrayed in alternative media, a real contender on the world scene. They do not challenge United Nations Agenda 2030 or WEFs Fourth Industrial Revolution. BRICS acts within the limits of the international system. All BRICS countries imposed lockdowns and mask mandates during COVID-19. They all take part in the endless string of climate summits (Brazil will arrange COP 30 in 2025).

Six of the BRICS-members are members of G20 (Brazil, Russia, India, China, South Africa, and Saudi-Arabia). These are countries that all want to secure their seats and have a say in the emerging global management system. The old hegemony is slowly dying and the sociopaths of the world are in need of a new host. This is what their new “apex body” for the world economy is planned to be.

One of the criteria for applying for BRICS-membership is furthermore to “be committed to the achievement of the Sustainable Development Goals”.[12]

At the latest BRICS summit in South Africa, BRICS underlined their commitment to “mobilising the means required to implement the 2030 Agenda” and highlighted the “significant opportunities” that Summit of the Future constitutes in the Johannesburg II Leaders Declaration. The summit was also attended by UN Secretary General António Guterres.

WEF – The Bridge Builder

The real masters, the owners of business and banking, are lurking behind BRICS as well as behind the G7. This is especially true for the most visible manifestation of the their influence: The World Economic Forum.

WEF operates all over the globe. As Klaus Schwab said in 2020:

The Forum has built an excellent relationship with the Russian Federation. Both with the business community as well as with the government.

The Russian Sberbank CEO and a close ally to Vladimir Putin, Hermann Gref, was a member of the WEF Board of Directors for eleven years (2011–22), whereas Putin has known Schwab since a meeting in St Petersburg in 1992.[13] This “excellent relationship” did, however, turn a bit frosty after the war in Ukraine broke out.[14] At least officially.

The Russian attack could hardly have been a surprise for WEF as there has been an ongoing conflict between Russia and Ukraine since 2014. Despite sanctions from the US and the European Union, WEF continued to collaborate with Russia during the Cyber Polygon exercise that was arranged annually by Sberbank 2019–2021, as well as forging deeper bonds through a close partnership between WEF and S:t Petersburg Economic Forum.

It is not a wild guess that the relationship will be restored once the conflict has been settled.

China has also developed close ties to WEF. The “Summer Davos” Annual Meeting of the New Champions has been arranged in the Chinese cities Tiunjan and Dalian since 2007.[15]

WEF has opened Centers for the Fourth Industrial Revolution (C4IR) in Brazil, China, South-Africa, India, UAE, Saudi-Arabia, whereas the centre in Russia (that opened as late as 2021) has been suspended due to the conflict in Ukraine.[16]

WEFs Global Shapers Community (for young people between 20 and 29) has hubs in 152 countries with the mission to “inspire, empower and connect young leaders to strengthen their communities and change the world” under the leadership of Klaus Schwab and the Council on Foreign Relations-chairman David Rubenstein. All BRICS-countries except Iran has or has had hubs.[17]

WEF has also “penetrated” BRICS with their Young Global Leader (and predecessor Global Leaders of Tomorrow) programs. There are now over 800 WEF-trained leaders in the BRICS countries. Several of them in government positions, but most of them in the business community.

The following list of Young Global Leaders in BRICS-countries is produced by data from the Pharos WEF YGL list.

  • Brazil: 73
  • Russia: 69
  • India: 204
  • China: 206
  • South Africa: 120
  • Egypt: 23
  • Ethiopia: 10
  • Iran: 9
  • Saudi Arabia: 44
  • UAE: 47

WEF has also, for obvious reasons, an influence on the West. The G7 Summit will this year be hosted by Italy, and Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni, with a focus on Climate Change, Artificial Intelligence and food security. Another key focus is the “defence of the rules-based international system” that Russia, according to G7, has “undermined” because of their “war of aggression on Ukraine”.[18]

These are practically the same topics as those that will be discussed at next week’s annual WEF Summit. Guests invited to Davos this year includes Ukraine’s president Volodymyr Zelenskyy, who will discuss the “principles and implementation” of his peace plan.[19] However, no Russian leader has been invited this time.

We can expect that what transpires out of Davos will affect the agenda for all venues of global cooperation. Be it G7, BRICS or G20.

Next month, World Government Summit will be held in Dubai, UAE, with the mission to “shape future governments” with “smart technology”.

The real struggle is about who will control the future world order once the architecture is in place. Perhaps a “trustworthy” AI?

We can be sure that WEF will be a winner, regardless the outcome. In their ranks we find the crisis and war profiteers who get rich from the ongoing conflicts and “challenges” in the world. They make big bucks on the Russian “special operations”, Israeli counter-terrorism warfare, COVID-vaccinations, climate change mitigation, as well as on “smart” AI-systems.[20] Their profiteering respect no borders.

It is telling that the WEF’s newly published Global Risks Report 2024 does not see “armed conflict” as the most threatening global catastrophic risk for the coming two years, but rather “misinformation and disinformation”.

Can we guess that they are afraid of exposure?

WEF has been subjected to a lot of criticism in the aftermath of the pandemic that has tarnished their reputation.

There will also be elections that affect three billion people this year. This may, according to the report, intensify the use of mis- and disinformation to disrupt electoral processes and risk “undermine the legitimacy of newly elected governments”, resulting in violence and unrest.

The worst global threats for the coming two years, according to WEFs latest report

This could incite authoritarian response. As is stated in the report:

…the proliferation of misinformation and disinformation may be leveraged to strengthen digital authoritarianism and the use of technology to control citizens. Governments themselves will be increasingly in a position to determine what is true, potentially allowing political parties to monopolize the public discourse and suppress dissenting voices, including journalists and opponents.

The findings in the report is already a part of the G20 agenda:

Working Groups such as the Digital Economy WG—to combat disinformation—and the Global Mobilization Task Force against Climate Change, proposed by Brazil, are examples of G20 forums whose mission is to propose consensus and concrete measures to face the serious issues highlighted by the WEF report.[21]

I close with som fitting lyrics and music by Megadeth’s Dave Mustaine.

Peace sells… but who’s buying?

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Notes

1 www.g20.org/en/about-the-g20/e-book-brasil-na-presidencia-do-g20

2 www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_A_Partner_in_Shaping_History.pdf

3 www.g20.utoronto.ca/docs/g20history.pdf

4 www.mef.gov.it/inevidenza/2021/article_00067/G20-Joint-Finance-and-Health-Ministers-Communique-29-October-2021.pdf

5 www.g20.org/en/news/world-health-organization-defends-global-equity-in-health-and-finance

6 www.g20.org/en/news/sus-is-a-reference-for-brasils-health-proposal-at-the-g20

7 www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2024/sessions/preparing-for-a-disease-x

8 www.g20.org/en/tracks/sherpa-track/climate-change

9 globalchallenges.org//app/uploads/2023/12/The-climate-trillions-we-need-4.pdf

10 www.ft.com/content/dec93c8a-35f0-48cf-9630-17b6c58a9631

11 en.kremlin.ru/events/president/news/73202

12 brics2023.gov.za/wp-content/uploads/2023/11/BRICS-Membership-expansion-guiding-principles-criteria-and-standards-2023.pdf

13 www3.weforum.org/docs/WEF_A_Partner_in_Shaping_History.pdf

14 www.weforum.org/agenda/2022/02/ukraine-our-full-solidarity/

15 www.china.org.cn/business/summerdavos2009/node_7076769.htm

16 c4ir.ru/en/

17 weforum.ent.box.com/s/s1pu3rhxv4757degjrtom1mzow6x7i8b

18 www.g7italy.it/en/

19 www.weforum.org/events/world-economic-forum-annual-meeting-2024/sessions/press-conference-national-security-advisers-on-ukraine

20 www.aftonbladet.se/nyheter/kolumnister/a/8J2zXW/saab-tjanar-miljarder-pa-hot-om-krig

21 www.g20.org/en/news/world-economic-forum-report-states-that-disinformation-and-extreme-weather-are-the-main-threats-to-the-world-today 

All images in this article are from the author unless otherwise stated

 

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

On the second day of 2024, in Busan city, Korea, a terrorist called Kim (the murderer) tried to assassinate  with double-edged dagger Lee Jae-myung, the leader of the opposition party, the Democratic Party of Korea (DPK). 

The assassin disguised as an admirer of the opposition leader approached Lee, asked Lee’s autograph and jumped forward with his dagger and hit Lee’s left side neck and pierced Lee’s vein but fortunately not the artery. 

By miracle, the victim survived after a difficult operation in Seoul National University hospital.

The question which begs for an answer is this: had he himself planned to kill the opposition party leader, or was he ordered to do so by some hidden political forces? 

This criminal and dangerous incident could have a profound impact on the legislative election in April and the future of Korea. 

This paper discusses all relevant aspects of the incident including the possibility of a trilateral conspiracy (ROK-Japan-U.S.) which may be directly or indirectly responsible for the tragic attempted murder of the opposition leader.

As pointed out by the Western media, the incident is caused by an internal conflict within South Korea. This is the correct assessment. But, we need to know the nature of this internal conflict. 

The conflict has a long history of 113 years (1910-2023). It is the conflict between two opposing forces. 

One is the Anti-Korea Force (AKF) composed of those Koreans who collaborated with Japan during the Japanese colonial era (1910-1945) and their descendents. 

The AKF regards the Koreans as rival even as enemy. Therefore, they pursue their own interests at the expense of the interests of the Korean people. 

On the other hand, the opposing force is Pro-Korea Force (PKF). This force includes patriots who fought against the Japanese oppression and flagrant violation of human rights and patriots’ descendents who have been fighting the corruption and the abuse of power of the AKF ever since 1945.

The PKF pursues the promotion of all Koreans’ interests, while the AKF is interested in assuring its own wealth and privileges.  

The AKF-PKF conflict has been difficult to settle partly because of the intervention of Japan and the U.S. to support the AKF.

In other words, this conflict has lasted so long partly due to the conspiracy among AKF of South Korea, Japan and the U.S, which is best designated as a “trilateral conspiracy.”

This paper discusses the following issues.

  • Nature of the trilateral conspiracy 
  • Evolution of the AKF-PKF fight
  • Anti-AKF policy of Moon Jae-in
  • AKF’s reaction to Moon Jae-in Policy
  • Election of Yoon Suk-yeol as President
  • Mission of Yoon Suk-yeol 
  • Facts pertaining to the attempted Murder

Nature of the Trilateral Conspiracy

In this section, I will be focussing on the role of AKF, Washington and Tokyo in creating a problematic social and political climate conducive to the failed attempt to assassinate Lee Jae-myung.

The conspiracy is possible because all the three entities have something in common. 

The AKF of South Korea lacks legitimacy, because it is composed of the traitors’ descendents. Therefore, it regards the PKF and the Korean people as enemies. Hence, its priority is given to the maintenance of its power, the creation of its wealth and the continuation of its privileges.

To attain these objectives, the AKF has to silence the opposition voice of the PKF on the one hand, and on the other, it needs protection of Japan and the U.S.

Now, Washington also needs to protect the AKF and demonize the PKF.

The AKF is very pro-Washington and it is ready to compromise Korea’s interest for the promotion of Washington’s interests.

For these reasons, Washington has been cooperating with AKF on the one hand, and on the other, it has been participating in the demonization of the PKF.

Japan also has reasons to support the AKF and antagonize the PKF. The AKF supports Japan’s argument that the Japanese colonialism was good for Korea and that crime of Comfort Women, Labour Slavery and other war crimes were not real. Such unpatriotic behaviour of the AKF is more than welcome for Japan, for it may justify the Japanese colonialism 2.0.

Japan wants to demonize the PKF because it is not pro-Japan and because it wants Korea’s sovereignty. 

There are other reasons for the three entities to side with the AKF and go against the PKF.

First, all three do not want peaceful reunification of Korea for different reasons.

For Washington, the peaceful reunification of Korea means the withdrawal of the US military from Korea.

For Japan, the peaceful reunification means threats to Japan and increasing difficulty in re-colonizing Korea. For the AKF and Yoon, the peaceful unification of Korea means alienation of the AKF and the end of its privilege.

Second, all three entities do not like the strength of the middle class represented by the PKF.

For Washington, strong PKF means increasing difficulty in using South Korea for the promotion of its own interests.

For Tokyo, a strong middle class (PKF) makes it difficult to justify its colonialism. For Yoon and the AKF, it becomes more difficult to destroy it so that Yoon and the AKF keep their wealth and privilege.

It is to be remembered that in 2008 President Lee Myung-bak (2008-2013) could not import rotten American beef due to the PKF’s mass protests. Lee Myung-bak wanted to please Washington. 

In 2019, Japan imposed trade sanctions on South Korea in connection with the labour slavery of Korean workers. But, the PKF fought back through the “Do not buy Japanese goods” campaign ended up by total failure of the Japanese trade sanction. So, Japan does not like the PKF.

Yoon Suk-yeol and the AKF know too well the power of the masses (PKF) which forced all the six AKF to terminate their presidency in a tragic way.

The following shows how Washington, Tokyo and Yoon’s AKF have played their respective role to destroy the PKF.

Washington’s Role

In 1905, Washington took side with AKF through the Taft-Katsura Agreement by virtue of which Japan could have Korea, while the U.S. could conquer the Philippines. This resulted in the annexation of Korea to Japan which was made possible by the treason of Lee Wan-yong who sold Korea to Japan free of charge. 

This created a situation where the traitors and Korean patriots started to fight. This fight is going on now between the descendents of the two forces. 

During 15 years since 1945, the American military government (1945-1948) and the government of Rhee Syngman (1948-1960) (image right), the traitors were hired to run the two governments and the traitors massacred several hundreds of thousands of South Korea civilians to silence the voice of objection to these governments. 

In this way, Washington was responsible for the survival and the expansion of the AKF on the one hand and, on the other, the massive destruction of the PKF.

During the pro-US military dictatorship of Generals Park Chung-hee (1962-1979) and Chun Doo-hwan (1980-1987) Washington supported these two dictators despite their cruel and violent violations of all human rights of the PKF. There is no doubt that Washington has abundantly contributed to the AKF-PKF fight for AKFs advantage.

Now, under the government of Lee Myung-bak (2008-2013) and that of Park Geun-hye (2013-2017) (image Left), Washington would have intervened for the presidential election through various means including the creation of fearful social climate by intensifying anti-North Korea military propaganda and military threat.

Such social climate has often led to electoral victory of the AKF.

There was another way of Washington’s interference in the South Korean presidential elections. For example, two leaders of South Korean minor political parties were suspected to have contributed, in 2022, to the slim victory of Yoon Suk-yeol. These individuals are suspected to be collaborators of American intelligence agencies.

Washington has been showing to Koreans that the AKF’s diplomacy with Washington is better than that of PKF’s. This tactic of Washington is motivated to alienate the PKF and to support the AKF. 

Tokyo’s Role

Tokyo has surely contributed to the interests of the AKF at the expense of those of the PKF.

It is true that Japan lost the Pacific War. But, its ambition of ruling Asia again never died. To rule Asia again, Japan had to conquer again Korea. To do so, it was necessary to colonize Korea again. To colonize Korea, Japan needed the collaboration of the pro-Japan conservative force, that is, the AKF.

It was Japan who funded the first political party of the AKF led by General Park Chung-hee who received USD 66 million in 1963 from Kishi Nonuske, the virtual leader of Japan. 

General Park created with this money the Republican Party. The current party of the AKF, the People Power Party (PPP), is the linear offspring of Park’s Republican Party.

Another strategy of re-colonizing Korea was the negation of Japanese war crimes against the Korean race. The “New Right” movement in South Korea was created to convince the Korean people that the Japanese colonialism was good for Korea and that the PKF’s unfriendly attitude toward Japan is wrong.

One of the ways of supporting the AKF and punishing the PKF was its diplomacy with South Korea. When the AKF is in power the Japan-ROK relations were smooth and constructive. But, when the PKF is in power, Tokyo chose hostile relations with South Korea to argue that the PKF is unable to conduct good diplomacy.

Thus, both Washington and Tokyo have conspired to help the AKF and penalizing the PKF for the promotion of their respective interests.

Role of Yoon and AKF

Image: Yoon takes the presidential oath of office outside the National Assembly, 10 May 2022 (Licensed under CC BY-SA 2.0)

undefined

The role of Yoon Suk-yeol and the AKF is to subordinate Korea’s interests to those of Japan and the U.S. in return of their protection provided by Washington and Tokyo.

Yoon justified and glorified Japanese colonialism. This concession increases Japan’s ambition to colonize Korea again.

As for the U.S., Yoon accepted the trilateral military alliance. This concession forces the ROK army to fight the China-U.S. proxy war and it will mean the end of Korea.

In short, Japan and the U.S. have conspired with the AKF in its fight against the PKF. In return, Yoon has promoted the interests of Tokyo and Washington even at the expense of Korea’s interests. 

This is the essence of the trilateral conspiracy.

Evolution of the AKF-PKF Fight

Creation of the AKF’s wealth 

In the evolution of the AKF-PKF fight, money has played the vital role. Money has allowed AKF to take and keep power and control the PKF.

In total, the AKF has ruled Korea for 35 years (1910-1945) during the Japanese colonial period and governed South Korea for 55 years since 1945.

The AKF has accumulated enormous wealth during 90 years. During the Japanese colonial period, it became rich by stealing land, houses, factories, money and other assets belonging to Korean patriot families.

During the post-war period, the AKF became extremely rich by the following methods: appropriation of assets of Japanese who left Korea, business-politics collusion allowing the AKF to take a good part of GDP growth, infinite kinds of bribes, kickbacks, illegal land speculation, forced change of land zoning code, fees for the deployment of 300,000 South Korean soldiers to Vietnam, the 4-River construction project, the Natural Resource diplomacy and outright embezzlement of public funds.

Nobody knows about the wealth of the AKF. But it surely amounts to several trillions of dollars. Much of this wealth is invested in real estate at home and abroad.

The AKF had to protect its wealth at all costs. To protect the wealth, it must keep power. To keep power, it must eliminate those who criticise or those who are suspected to criticise the AKF government; it has been imposing police dictatorship, military dictatorship, prosecutor dictatorship even media dictatorship.

Through such criminal regimes, the AKF has massacred more than 600,000 South Koreans; perhaps more than 30% of South Korean families have been the target of police harassment; a great number of young people were barred from public service; many were expelled from Korea; countless young people were tortured by the police for their street demonstration.

Counter-offensive of Citizens

The PKF has not remained idle. It fought back in two ways. One way was the popular uprising by all citizens, especially by the students. The other was counter-offensive by PKF governments.

  • The Student Revolution (April 19, 1960) leading to the dismissal of President Rhee Syngman who escaped to Hawaii on American CIA plane. 
  • The BUMA Protests (October 16, 1979) leading to the assassination of General Park Chung-hee by his CIAK director.
  • The Kwangjoo Democratic Movement (May 18, 1980) allowing the imprisonment of General Chun Doo-hwan and General Rho Tae-woo for corruption
  • The Democratic Movement of June 1987: Amendment of constitution allowing direct election of president by the people.
  • The Candle Light Revolution (2016-2017) by 17,000,000 citizens of all ages leading to the impeachment of President Park Geun-hye and the formation of the PKF’s government of Moon-Jae-in

Counter-offensive by the PKF’s Governments

The government of Kim Daejung (1998-2003), the government of Rho Moo-hyun (2003-2008) and the government of Moon Jae-in (2017-2022) have fought back against the AKF.

The 15-year PKF governments have fought against the AKF through political, economic, media and judicial reforms.

The three presidents of the PKF have certainly harmed the privileges of the AKF. 

However, it was the government of Moon Jae-in which has harmed the most the AKF.

Anti-AKF Policy of Moon Jae-in 

Image: Moon at his first press conference as president in 2017 (Licensed under CC BY-SA 2.0)

undefined

Armed with the spirit of the Candle Light Revolution, Moon Jae-in took power in 2017. This change of power meant a great threat for the AKF which had lost its force despite the desperate efforts by Lee Myung-bak and Park Geun-hye to restore it.

The measures adopted by Moon Jae-in included the following: the destruction of the bribe culture, increase in government spending for the improvement of the well being of the ordinary people, increase in minimum wage, increase in the coverage of medical care insurance, increase in corporate tax, increase in capital gains tax, restriction of the coverage of the security law, increase in the negotiation power of labour unions and many other measures which drastically reduced the source of income of the AKF.

Election of Yoon Suk-yeol as President

The AKF was alarmed by Moon’s policies. The AKF decided to find someone who could destroy the PKF. Well, the someone was Yoon Suk-yeol. 

The AKF knew that Yoon had no experience in politics or administration except arresting and imprisoning people.

But this was, precisely, the quality sought by the AKF which wanted a butcher who would kill the PKF.

During the campaign, Yoon showed his ignorance, his stupidity and his Shamanism. He showed, during a the debate, the sign of king “王” on his hand. His wife, notorious criminal, was known to be the disciple of Shaman called “Cheon -Gong”

Mission of Yoon Suk-yeol

Yoon seems to have these missions. 

  • Maximum creation of wealth for Yoon and the AKF
  • Prevention of citizens’ mass protests against Yoon’s government and the AKF
  • Imposition of Prosecutor dictatorship
  • Demonization of the PKF and its party, Democratic Party of Korea (DPK)
  • Elimination of future leaders of the PKF
  • Elimination of Lee Jae-myung

Maximum Creation of Wealth for Yoon and the AKF

In addition to the usual way of accumulating the wealth of the AKF, Yoon has been trying to stack up money for himself and his friends of the AKF.

  • First, increase of the allocation of resources to large corporations through subsidies and grants and decrease of corporate taxes so that the bribe money can flow in the pockets of Yoon and the AKF.
  • Second, non-bidding contracts for the reparation of new presidential office, moving expenses and a host of other government projects allowing the illegal sharing of the contract funds with the contractors.
  • Third, the appointment of AKF people at key government positions for bribes.
  • Fourth, possible appropriation of travel expenses of frequent presidential overseas visits.
  • Fifth, outright embezzlement of public funds.
  • Sixth, cut of spending on people’s wellbeing. To create more wealth for the AKF, Yoon did cut expenses needed for the promotion of people’s well being, decreased old age pension, cut subsidies to schools, decreased subsidies to SMEs, decreased medical care coverage, increased income tax, cut subsidies for R&D and many other measures to impoverish the ordinary people and compromise Korea’s potential economic growth.

Prevention of Citizens Mass Protests Against Yoon’s Government and the AKF

The best way of preventing the citizens’ mass protests against Yoon’s government and the AKF is to make the people so poor that they feel powerless to fight against the Yoon’s prosecutor dictatorship.

To do that, Yoon has decided to destroy the source of income of ordinary Koreans. This requires the demolition of small and medium enterprises (SMEs) which create 90% of jobs on the one hand, and on the other, promote the interests of large corporations which provide most of the bribes.

Moreover, Yoon has decided to cut considerably the funding of R&D. This policy will bring long-run stagnation of the economy. Thus, the poverty of South Koreans will continue.

Imposition of Prosecutor Dictatorship

In order to better control the voice of objection and protest against his regime, Yoon started, right after he took power in 2022, the dictatorship regime of prosecutors.

First he has appointed prosecutors to run key government and government-funded institutions. These prosecutors have no knowledge about the functions they are supposed to perform. 

Their real function is to find any wrong doings committed by those who had worked for the previous government of Moon Jae-in. The purpose was to wipe out the trace of Moon’s reforms which have threatened the existence of the AKF.

Another objective was to eliminate those civil servants who may feel closer to the PKF people. In fact, many former ministers and deputy ministers of Moon Jae-in government are in prison with no evidence justifying their imprisonment.

Second, opinion makers including artists, politicians, academics, journalists and others who criticize or may do so are object of prosecutors’ numerous house search, indictment, harassing and even imprisonment with no supporting evidence. 

This has created a social climate of fear and uncertainty harming any productive activities needed for the development of the society.

The whole purpose of prosecutor dictatorship is the maintenance of the power which is, for Yoon and the AKF, more important than social and economic development of Korea and the Koreans’ well being. 

Demonization of the PKF and Its Party, the Democratic Party of Korea (DPK)

Right from the debut of Yoon’s government two years ago, the DPK has been demonized by Yoon, PPP and the AKF.

The AKF mobilized countless pro-AKF social media, on line media and speeches and conferences to qualify DPK as communists, corrupted gangster and responsible for the artificial peace promoted y the three DPK presidents, Kim Dae-jung (1990-2003)- Rho Moo-hyun (2003-2008) and Moon Jae-in (2017-2022).

Yoon has refused to meet Lee Jae-myung president of the DPK, because the DPK is a criminal organization. The hidden purpose was to blame the DPK for Yoon’s failure of national policies.

Elimination of Future PKF Leaders 

Yoon has adopted the tactic of “judiciary trap” to eliminate future leaders of the PKF. It involves the following steps:

  • First, the prosecutor, pro-AKF media and pro-AKF NGOs fabricate evidence of wrong doings of PKF leaders.
  • Second, the prosecutor’s office gives the fabricated evidence to pro-AKF media. By the way, more than 90% of Korea median is pro-AKF.
  • Third, influenced by the media, the people believe that the target person of the AKF is guilty.
  • Fourth, some individuals or some organizations indict the target person. In fact, there is an AKF NGO specialized in indicting PKF members. It inducts each week several individual or organizations of the PKF.
  • Fifth, the court trial can last for years in some cases. And the target person has to pay mounting lawyer fee and becomes the public enemy.
  • Sixth, usually, the court declares “not guilty”. But the target person is socially, professionally and politically assassinated.

The AKF picks, as target, those leaders who could become presidential candidate for the PKF. 

The manufactured evidence of target person’s wrong doings is sex abuse and bribes scandals.

There were four prominent PKF persons who could be presidential candidate. Two of them killed themselves, although there was no proof of the crimes. They could not allow the suffering of their families. The other two are no longer eligible for presidential candidates 

The disappearance of four PKF leaders has hurt badly the leadership of the PKF.

The troubling fact is that it is quasi impossible to stop the judiciary trap, because the Korean prosecutor office is the most powerful organization in the world. There is no power which cam punish prosecutor up to now. 

Fortunately, in 2023 the National Assembly adopted a law allowing the impeachment of prosecutors. But it has very limited authority. So, the judiciary trap continues.

Elimination of Lee Jae-myung

Lee Jae-myung goes much further than Moon Jae-in in uprooting the social, political and financial infrastructure of the corrupted AKF. 

Lee cannot be bought with bribes. Hence, he must be eliminated by other means. There are two ways of eliminating Lee. One is the judicial trap killing, while the other is political assassination.

Lee Jae-myung is trapped in the judiciary trap. 

First, he is accused of corruption. One is the use of the value added tax income from large private housing development for the project of low rent rental dwelling construction project while Lee was the mayor of Sungnam city. The prosecutor’s office argues that, some of the value added tax is embezzled by Lee. There is no proof.

Second, the other case is this. Lee used empty public land for local soccer team. Lee obtained some funds from local business community. The prosecutor’s office accuses Lee of putting a part of this donation funds in his pocket. There is no proof.

The prosecutor’s office has conducted 367 house searches in two years at Lee’s house, his offices and even homes of his remote relatives.

But it has failed to find any evidence of Lee’s corruption. What is more inhuman is that Lee has to go the police three times a week for investigation. 

What make the people disgusted is the fact that he was summoned one day after Lee’s 25-day fasting. Lee could hardly walk then. Yoon might have hoped that Lee would die on the way to the police station.

Third, there was another land scandal used to connect Lee to corruption scandal. It is the land scandal of Dae-jang-dong. 

Lee was originally accused by one of senior members of the DPK out of jealousy. This person lost his presidential candidacy to Lee Jae-myung at the 2022 presidential election.

The irony is that the people deeply involved who pocketed millions of dollars are members of Yoon’s party, PPP. The case is now the object of a  Parliament’s Special Investigation.

As for the abuse of power, while Lee Jae-myung was the governor of Kyunggi province, Lee’s wife asked one of the secretarial staff of Lee to run an errand of buying beef for $7.0. This accusation is just ridiculous,

What is alarming is that the Western media copy what the corrupted Korean media say about fabricated story of corruption and abuse of power of Lee without investigation the reliability of these stories.

Moreover, the Western media do not mention the criminal activities of the wife of Yoon and ministers and vice-ministers of the Yoon’s government. 

The criminal activities of Mrs. Yoon, Kim Keun-hee is so extensive that the National Assembly adopted a law of Special Parliament Investigation of her crimes. 

But Yoon exercised his presidential veto power to refuse the law. Just imagine how mad man Yoon is. He has imprisoned so many innocent people, but he tries to hide his wife’s crimes.

Facts pertaining to Assassination Attempt

As we saw above, the judicial trap of “assassinating” Lee Jae-myung failed. Therefore, the actual assassination of Lee was the solution. The killer is called Kim of 60s. The following is what has been known so far.

First, he was member of PPP (AKF) for some time.

Second, he joined DPK and trained professionally. Especially, he practiced often how to jump forward and pierce the neck of the target person with a double-edged dagger.

Third, he followed Lee Jae-myung for some time with a view to kill him. Once he was seen trying to attack Lee in front of a car before Lee entered the car.

Day before the murder attempt, he was seen descending from an expensive car in front of a hotel. This suggests the possibility of conspiracy involving people who hate Lee, possibly someone from the AKF.

Fourth, at the police station in Busan, the attacker declared with almost pride that his intention was to kill Lee Jae-myung. This shows that he knew  that he would go to prison, that somebody would look after him and his family and that he would have presidential pardon, if the AKF keeps the power.

Fifth, the online and off line pro-AKF media are trying desperately to convince people that the murder attempt was motivated entirely by the attacker’s personal grudge against Lee Jae-myung. 

Sixth, the government of Yoon is eager to show that the attempted assassination is minor incident. For instance, the Prime Minister’s office declared,  even before the police investigation, that the injury of Lee Jae-myung was very minor.

Seventh, the pro-AKF media are silent; they do not mention the incident. 

Eighth, the police declared that it will not make public briefing about the incidence without explaining why.

Ninth, the possibility of conspiracy on the part of Yoon Suk-yeol and the AKF to eliminate Lee Jae-myung is high. 

The attempt to murder Lee has failed this time by the will of God. It was a miracle that Lee has survived. But, there will be more attempts to kill him.

Did Yoon conspire with Kishida and Biden to produce a social climate of fear until the April general election. The tactic would include the following:

image right: Joe Biden,  Fumio Kishida and Yoon Suk Yeol prior to trilateral meeting, August, 2023, at  Camp David, Maryland. (Official White House Photo by Erin Scott)

  • —First, Kishida and Biden will intensify the demonization of North Korea. This will help the re-election of Biden in the U.S. in November and the improvement of Kishida’s approval rate in Japan. This will also help Yoon at the coming legislative election in Korea in April. At least, they hope so.
  • —Second, this is important. Yoon will provoke localized armed conflict with North Korea. If North Korea reacts militarily, Yoon may declare the “Marshal Law”, kill Lee Jae-myung and PKF leaders and he may try to rule Korea forever like Park chung-hee and Chun Doo-hwan. 

This is what I call the “Marshall Law Trap” which was planned to be used in 2016 during the Candle Light Revolution. The person who plotted the Marshall Law escaped to the U.S. Now he is back.

However, if North Korea does not react militarily, the Marshall Law trap will fail. I sincerely hope that Chairman Kim Jung-un would not react at all at least until the April election in South Korea.  

If Lee Jae-myung is assassinated, no one has the will or means to fight the insane prosecutor dictatorship. Nobody knows what will happen to South Korea. May God protect Korea!

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. Joseph H. Chung is professor of economics at Quebec University in Montreal (UQAM). He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG).

Featured image is licensed under KOGL Type 1

Il Sudafrica ha portato Israele davanti alla Corte Internazionale di Giustizia delle Nazioni Unite, accusandolo di genocidio. Il crimine di genocidio consiste non solo nello sterminio di una popolazione ma nel privarla della sua terra, negarle il diritto di avere un proprio Stato, distruggere il suo tessuto sociale e le sue stesse radici storiche. È esattamente ciò che sta facendo Israele con i palestinesi.

La guerra condotta da Israele a Gaza, motivata come difesa dall’attacco di Hamas (il cui piano era noto da oltre un anno ai capi politici e militari israeliani) mira a cancellare il Territorio di Gaza. Esso fa parte, con quello della Cisgiordania, dello Stato di Palestina riconosciuto dalla Assemblea Generale delle Nazioni Unite della quale esso è membro pur non avendo ancora il diritto di voto. La guerra israeliana non solo stermina la popolazione civile, ma rende il territorio di Gaza inabitabile.

Lo scopo, dichiarato apertamente dalla destra israeliana, è che i palestinesi siano “reinsediati fuori da Gaza”, ossia deportati definitivamente fuori dalla loro terra. Gli Stati Uniti, mentre continuano a sostenere la guerra di Israele per incendiare il Medioriente in cui stanno perdendo la posizione predominante, sono favorevoli a mantenere un territorio formalmente palestinese ma di fatto privo di ogni reale sovranità.

A questa visione corrisponde il piano presentato dal ministro israeliano della Difesa. Esso prevede che Israele mantenga il controllo militare dei confini di Gaza, isolandola ancora di più, mentre una task force multinazionale (formata sicuramente da USA, NATO e UE) supervisiona “la ricostruzione e lo sviluppo economico del territorio”.

Abitanti palestinesi, scelti da Israele e dalla task force internazionale, gestirebbero gli affari civili nell’ “enclave” di Gaza. Non ci sarebbe alcun ruolo a Gaza per l’Autorità Palestinese, che gestisce parti della Cisgiordania occupata da Israele, Israele otterrebbe in tal modo ciò che vuole: la definitiva cancellazione dello Stato di Palestina, deciso dalle Nazioni Unite 77 anni fa nel quadro della formula dei due Stati.

Su questo sfondo è di primaria importanza la decisione del Sudafrica di portare Israele davanti alla Corte Internazionale di Giustizia delle Nazioni Unite con l’accusa di genocidio.

Manlio Dinucci

 

Video (Youtube) :

 

Video (Bioblu.com) :

https://www.byoblu.com/2024/01/12/israele-alla-corte-onu-accusato-di-genocidio-grandangolo-pangea-la-rassegna-stampa-internazionale-di-byoblu-124-puntata/

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Introduction

The world looks on with horror,  and apparent impotence, as more than 23,000 defenseless Palestinians, many of them women and children, have been killed, many more wounded since the October 7, 2023  bombing campaign by the Israeli armed forces,  pulverizing Gaza, ostensibly in retaliation for the attack on Israel by Hamas on October 7, which killed approximately 1,500 Israelis.  

Calls for a ceasefire from around the world are ignored, and, most shamefully of all,  the United Nations Security Council, whose mandate requires it to uphold global peace and security, has, to date, remained impotent, failing to draft any resolution which would demand a cessation of the bombing; and despite the fact that United Nations workers themselves have also been killed as a consequence of the assault on Gaza, the Security Council has completely failed, as of this writing, to produce any resolutions which would halt this collective punishment of the Palestinians, which is now described as genocide.

It would be unfathomable why the UN Security Council permits this slaughter to continue, unabated; it is also unfathomable why the UN Security Council failed to demand that the Minsk Accords be complied with, which would have prevented the current prolonged war between Russia and Ukraine, and saved approximately half a million lives, slaughtered in a useless and preventable war. To make matters more scandalous were the admission by France and Germany that they never intended the Minsk Accords to be complied with, and that they cynically used the UN Security Council approval of the Minsk accords to buy time to strengthen the Ukrainian Army, for the purpose of shattering demolishing Russia.

The Historical Context

A study of the manipulation and abuse of the UN Security Council for the enactment of the geopolitical agenda of the Western powers,  should begin with the 1990-1991 manipulation of the Security Council by the Western powers, just prior to the collapse of the Soviet Union, the USSR by then almost fatally weakened, and unable to withstand US/UK pressure. This study follows, including the exposure of the cynical and Machiavellian tactics used by the West to force through Security Council Resolution 678, which unleashed the pattern of slaughters for which the United Nations Security Council provided both authorization and “cover.”

An examination of overt and covert means by which Security Council approval for resolution 678 was obtained, the methods of coercion, intimidation and bribery by which Security Council members were drawn by the United States into tragic and shameful collaboration in passage of a resolution which has betrayed the very purpose for which the United Nations was originally created (“to prevent the scourge of war”) reveals the criminal and barbarous character or the “New World Order which the former Bush administration intended to impose throughout the world by the most violent means in human history.

On November 16, 1990 the Non-Aligned members of the Security Council drafted an initiative alerting the Security Council members to the risk: “Talk of war option establishes its own momentum which increases the risks of war.” The initiative states:

“1. Given the cultural gap and lack of direct, face-to-face communication between principal parties, and the overall atmosphere of suspicion, there is a high probability that any Iraqi ‘signal’ of ‘flexibility’ would either be ignored, discounted as insincere, or otherwise misinterpreted.”

“2. Given the overwhelming negative consequences now attached to withdrawal, Iraq is not likely to send a signal of flexibility that is sufficiently strong and clear to be understood until war is imminent, by which time it may be too late to stop the momentum toward war.”

Iraq’s Serious Efforts to Cooperate


The New York Times, December 2, 1990 stated:

“Neither President Bush nor Secretary of State James Baker 3rd responded publicly today to Iraq’s acceptance of Mr. Bush’s offer of talks on the Gulf crisis. But Administration officials rebuffed the Iraqi Government’s suggestion that any direct talks between Iraq and the US on Kuwait should deal with the issue of a Palestinian homeland. In its statement, Iraq welcomed the chance for the two countries to have ‘a deep and serious dialogue,’ but did not make its acceptance of Mr. Bush’s offer conditional on discussion of the Palestinian issue.’”

It would be difficult to misunderstand Iraq’s eagerness for dialogue, or to deny its flexibility. On November 29, following what the New York Times described as a “smoothly orchestrated” series of Security Council meetings (“disrupted today when Cuba complained that the Council is rushing into voting a new Persian Gulf crisis resolution before it has voted on an earlier resolution criticizing Israel’s treatment of Palestinians in the occupied territories…..The United States has been striving to delay a vote on the anti-Israel resolution until after the Council gives permission for military action against Iraq, because it would like to veto the measure.  Such a reminder of the United States’ friendship with Israel would embarrass Washington’s Arab friends.”) inciting the psychological atmosphere necessary for passage of Resolution 678 (the Security Council listened to descriptions of Iraqi atrocities in Kuwait for two days, all sensationally reported by the New York Times.

But interestingly, the major media failed to mention a press conference in United Nations Room 226, given by Dr. Mohammad Said, and contradicting many of the statements describing Iraqi “atrocities” “smoothly orchestrated” in the Security Council chamber.

Dr. Said’s testimony and his description of the historical circumstances and context of the Iraqi invasion were documented extensively with videotapes (he has two half-brothers and other relatives in Kuwait and Saudi Arabia) and eyewitness reports from his travels in Kuwait and Iraq: he brought a view of both Iraq and Kuwait at odds with the picture painted by the American news media “and called for both sides to pursue a rational approach to peace based on a plan put forth by the Committee of Arab-Americans Against “US intervention in the Gulf.” His testimony was ignored by both the press and the Security Council.

US/UK Machiavellian Maneuvers Making War Inevitable 

The War Resolution 678 was adopted, following a campaign of manipulation akin to gangster tactics (to be described in detail, later.) And as, legally, Security Council members opposing the War Resolution 678 could have legitimately obstructed its ignominious passage by demanding a procedural vote on which issue took precedence, and should be dealt with first: in fact, S. 219331, concerning the issue of Palestine, brought before the council on October 8, 1990 legally took precedence, and massive disruption of the “smoothly orchestrated ministerial level ‘war council’” could legitimately have been caused by Security Council members outraged by the brazenly displayed double standard of 12 hastily and threateningly passed resolutions in four months, punishing Iraq for its 4 month old occupation of Kuwait, and no effective resolutions protecting Palestinians in territories “occupied” by Israel after 20 years.

And with cynicism equivalent to utter contempt (November 29, Newsday report),

“The United States agreed informally last night to allow passage of a new Security Council resolution protecting Palestinians in the Israeli-occupied territories if the measure’s sponsors don’t raise the issue and disrupt today’s historic UN vote authorizing the use of force to oust Iraq from Kuwait, according to reliable diplomatic sources. Egyptian Ambassador Amre Moussa said the United States had agreed ‘in principle’ last night not to block the measure on the occupied territories and the sponsors of the resolution promised in return that “there won’t be any ‘show biz’ during today’s council meeting on Iraq and Kuwait.”

The Non-Aligned honored their agreement and the “War Resolution 678” passed without disruption or complication, or the disgrace that the Non-Aligned could have legitimately heaped upon the United States and it Foreign Ministerial collaborators. (In fact, a senior US official told an AP correspondent that the Non-Aligned would have “every reason to feel betrayed if they didn’t get cooperation on S/21933/Rev.1”).

The Famous / Infamous BBC “Leak”

On December 5, a resolution approved by the Permanent Five, including the United States Mission, and the Non-Aligned was drafted and scheduled for Security Council vote, as promised by the United States Mission, and the Non-Aligned was drafted and scheduled for Security Council vote, as promised by the United States, and would have, crucially, also met Iraq’s request for conditions enabling it to immediately and honorably withdraw from Kuwait, thereby averting a devastating war.  “Interestingly,” the resolution, (acceptable to all, including, crucially, Iraq, and guaranteeing a peaceful solution) was “leaked” the evening of December 5 to a BBC reporter by “several of the usual reliable US diplomatic sources,” and immediately broadcast by the BBC as an “important shift in US” policy since “as part of negotiations on this resolution the Americans were proposing a reference in the Security Council resolution to a Middle East peace conference; this was the first time such a conference was mentioned in connection with the Security Council, and would be binding, implying further action of the kind Israel wouldn’t like.”

The premature BBC leak spotlighting the peace conference “caused (more accurately, enabled) Bush to immediately reject the “peace resolution,” and it was squashed. Though the BBC correspondent stated disingenuously that “this kind of proposal would have to have a green light from Washington”’ if it already did, the BBC “leak” relieved, and allowed Bush to “back off” from support for a resolution his administration never intended to support from the outset, though the US mission could appear to support it initially until the cooperative BBC “leak” enabled Washington to obstruct the “peace resolution” from coming to a vote at the Security Council, at which point the US would have vetoed it, exposing its own double standard. (Washington once stated:  “it is not opposed to leaks, it simply wants to control them.”) Had the resolution passed, it might have offered protection to Palestinian civilians, and led to Iraq’s withdrawal from Kuwait, clearly something Washington and its British lackeys in cynical collaboration intended to prevent.

Cynical US/UK Postponements of Vote on Peace Restoration, Malaysia Protest Deception

Nevertheless, this cowardly and dishonorable ploy did not go unnoticed by many Ambassadors at the UN, accustomed to US conniving methods of interference in the domestic affairs of other countries: privately a majority of Ambassadors at the UN referred with disgust to the so-called “leak,” but they lacked a voice on the Security Council. Meanwhile, back at the Security Council events developed in an even more odious and disgraceful fashion: the meeting at the Security Council, scheduled for the afternoon on December 6, and at which the Non-Aligned Resolution S/21933.Rev.2 on Palestine should have been brought to a vote at the Security Council with US support, as promised on November 28, was then shifted to Friday morning, then to Friday evening, then to Saturday evening.  On December 8, 1990, the Soviet Ambassador moved for postponement till December 10 (to spare the US the embarrassment of vetoing Res. 21933/Rev.2:  Ambassador Razalli of Malaysia stated: 

“I appeal to members of the Council to understand what the request for a postponement is all about.  It is not to work towards a different formulation of paragraph 7; it is to work towards the exclusion of paragraph 7, which calls for the convening of an internal peace conference on the Middle East, in the interest of the position of an important member of the Council.”

Nevertheless, the meeting was postponed. At 3PM December 10, the Soviet Ambassador again moved the adjourn the meeting to Wednesday, December 12 at 6PM (again sparing the US the embarrassment of vetoing the Resolution and exposing its own double standards). The Representative of Malaysia again protested:

“For the record, too, let me say that the sponsors have made the maximum concession on the international conference.  We have offered, in what may be called ‘Revision 3,’ if ever that revision clears the surface, to transpose paragraph 7 into the preamble and what is in the preamble into the operative part; this is a maximum concession that in many ways diluted many things on the matter of the international conference.”

To no avail, the meeting was adjourned until December 12 at 6PM. On December 12, the Deputy Ambassador of the Soviet Union proposed adjournment of the meeting to Monday, December 17 at 3PM. Outside the Security Council chambers, Mr. Al Kidwah, the representative of Palestine stated unequivocally that

“it is the USA that is blocking and ultimately preventing any action toward a peaceful and equitable solution of the Palestinian and the entire Middle East crisis.”

When challenged that it was the USSR that had moved to postpone the meetings, Al Kidwah lucidly reaffirmed that it is the USA that is fundamentally responsible for the deadlock, implying that other members were serving the US interest in masking its role, and not too nakedly revealing its duplicitous double-standard.

Stupefaction and disbelief, followed by tension, frustration, rage and despair were shared by Asian, African, Latin American and Middle Eastern diplomats as well as others observing the vulgar and contemptuous methods of the USA, its British and European lackeys, and a collaborative, emasculated USSR, of manipulating and paralyzing any Security Council action protecting Palestinian citizens in the “occupied territories” and ultimately sabotaging effective action toward a peaceful resolution of the crisis in the Middle East. And the extent to which the USA dishonored itself, betrayed its promise of November 28, and succeeded in manipulating the Security Council and the United Nations to serve its own “interest” in instigating the Gulf War was staggering.

Highjacking of the United Nations Security Council by US Dominated Western Powers

The formal meeting scheduled for December 17, 3PM did not occur. Evidently a “long epic informal meeting” (as described by the Representative of Malaysia on December 19) served to further delay serious efforts to resolve the crisis – peacefully, and when on Wednesday, December 19 at 11:55 AM a formal meeting was convened, Finland moved for further postponement – implicitly to enforce a further dilution o S/21933/Rev.3 which would ultimately result in castration of the resolution, thereby serving the USA’s intransigent, obsessive and virtually fanatic insistence that nothing even remotely suggesting that the crucial problems of the Middle East might have some common basis (that suggestion of “linkage,” a word which attained the status of a taboo throughout these negotiations) survive, as Finland thereby insured protection of the “interests” of a tiny ‘elite,’ the Ruling Class in the USA which succeeded in using the entire United Nations apparatus to impose and inflice its own interes upon the entire planet.

The War: UN Security Council Resolution 678: Pulverizing Iraq

And while epithets were hurled at Saddam Hussein throughout this period, references to him as a “madman, another Hitler, etc., the US delegation’s panic at any suggestion of the work “linkage” verged on psychosis, causing any impartial observer to wonder who was in fact the madman, and whether Iraq’s invasion of Kuwait was being used by the USA in precisely the same manner as Hitler used the burning of the Reichstag to justify all his ultimately genocidal actions. Unfortunately, George H. W. Bush’s statement almost 4 weeks later (as on January 16, 1991 the US began bombing Iraq in what was to become the most “intensive bombing campaign in the history of warfare”) (New York Times, January 23, 1991,  p.8…. described, as follows by an Egyptian refugee: 

“They are bombing;  people are dying in the street,” said Mr. Mohammed, the auto mechanic. “This is not war, it is the annihilation of a people, an entire Muslim people. People are sleeping in the Mosques. Soldiers are dead in the streets with no one to evacuate them.

This is a black day.”) was conclusive proof that Iraq’s invasion of Kuwait was indeed Washington’s Reischstag, as George Bush stated before the world that the goal of the bombing was to destroy Iraq’s nuclear and chemical industries and to eliminate Hussein from power. (This despite UNDPI International Atomic Energy Agency/1154 stating “no change has taken place in the status of nuclear material under safeguards in Iraq since the last inspections”…April, 1990. At that time, the conclusion was reached that all nuclear material under safeguard was accounted for.)

According to Felicity Arbuthnot:

“The US having refused all negotiation, then dispatched an extra three hundred and sixty thousand US troops to the Gulf at the end of November, the UN Security Council passed UNSCR 678, threatening force of Iraq did not withdraw by January 15th – Iraq having offered to withdraw, albeit with conditions on August 12th., and without conditions a short time later.

In Geneva, on 9th January 1991, then Secretary of State James Baker (a “diplomat” who stated: “We will reduce Iraq to a pre-industrial age”) met Iraq’s Foreign Minister, Tareq Aziz, with a letter from Bush Snr., promising the destruction of Iraq, if Kuwait was not withdrawn from by 15th January. Tareq Aziz stated he would not deliver the letter.

 

Expansion of the Attack on Iraq: In Violation of UN Security Council Mandate

The New York Times, January 21, 1991: 

“The Bush Administration is taking advantage of combat in the Persian Gulf to try to achieve military aims that go beyond an Iraqi withdrawal from Kuwait:…The process began from the moment President Bush announced the onset of war and said the US would destroy Iraq’s nuclear and chemical industries. That was not envisioned in the 12 United Nations Resolutions on Kuwait, but that was an objective that was certainly on the lists of American officials who had been looking for ways to neutralize Iraq as a regional power. The United Nations resolutions on Kuwait never mentioned Iraq’s nuclear potential. But announcing the start of hostilities permitted Mr. Bush to say explicitly that he intended to destroy the chemical and nuclear potentials of Iraq…The US continues to say that it is not trying to kill Mr. Hussein, but it has made no secret of its hope that he would fall from power as a result of the war.” (New York Times, January 22, 1991)

Yes, United States’ will prevailed, with the collaboration of Finland, and of course the meeting was postponed to December 20, 1990, at which point the US had bludgeoned the entire Security Council into submission, the diluted “offending preambular paragraph  in S/21922/Rev.3” was entirely eliminated and replaced by a Presidential Statement (not legally binding, as a Security Council Resolution including the paragraph would have been) which was virtually meaningless, in any case, stating: 

“In this context they agree that an international conference, at an appropriate time, properly structured, should facilitate efforts to achieve a negotiated settlement and lasting peace in the Arab-Israeli conflict.’ “However, the members of the council are of the view that there is not unanimity as to when would be the appropriate time for such a conference. In the view of the members of the council, the Arab-Israeli conflict is important and unique and must be addressed independently, on its own merits.”

The only voice of sanity (reminiscent of the boy in “The Emperor’s New Clothes” who stated, in opposition to the totally deluded consensus on the exquisite finery of the Emperor’s new clothes, that the Emperor was, in fact, naked) was expressed by Yemen’s Ambassador Al-Ashtal

“Since there has been much recent talk of linkage between the Gulf crisis and the problem of the Middle East, I should like in conclusion to recount a brief folk tale that may portray the overall situation with regard to this problem. The story – which by the way is an old Chinese proverb – goes as follows: A farmer had some silver coins and wanted to hide them somewhere. He therefore dug up a small hole in his orchard and buried the coins in it. He then put up a sign reading: ‘There are no silver coins buried here.’ The moral of that terse little tale is that the more we affirm that there is no linkage between the Gulf crisis and the Middle East problem, the more we highlight that link.”

Under the circumstances, it is doubtful whether the BBC would have been severely reprimanded for its “leak” that entirely disrupted negotiations toward a peaceful settlement of the Gulf crisis. All evidence leads toward the BBC “leak” as part of a “smoothly orchestrated” inexorable and deadly “legal” preparation for a war that has revealed its perpetrators, the “coalition” architects as genocidal and barbarous was criminals.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Carla Stea is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG) and Global Research’s Correspondent at UN headquarters, New York. 

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Introduction 

The Article below documents how:

“Half the soldiers of an Israeli reserve battalion refused to fight in the Gaza Strip and were released from duty by their commander” Al-Arabi Al-Jadeed reported on 17 January.

Inasmuch as the Netanyahu government is involved in an act of genocide against the People of Palestine, Israeli soldiers have an obligation under Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter to Disobey Unlawful Orders” and “Abandon the Battlefield”.  

What is significant is that the Reserve soldiers who refused to fight were not penalized by their commanding officer.  

This courageous action by Israeli Reserve soldiers sets the stage: Abandon the Battlefield should be extended to ALL Israeli combatants

Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter  defines the responsibility of combatants

to refuse the orders of Government or a superior … “provided a moral choice [is] possible“. 

What we are proposing is the conduct without delay of a Worldwide grass-roots campaign,  encouraging: Israeli, American and NATO Combatants to “Disobey Unlawful Orders” and “Abandon the Battlefield”.  

The detailed modalities pertaining to Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter and the obligation to “Disobey Unlawful Orders” is outlined in Part II of this posting.

Global Research, January 19, 2023

***

Part I

Israeli Reserve Soldiers Refuse to Fight in Gaza

by

The Cradle

January 19, 2023

 

The Qatari outlet cited Israel’s Kan Reshet Bet radio as reporting that reserve soldiers were called up to form a new brigade in the Israeli army to carry out protection tasks in the areas surrounding Gaza and the occupied West Bank. However, the soldiers received permission to leave the battalion after the army tried to send them to fight and carry out combat missions within Gaza for which they were not qualified or adequately equipped.

The soldiers were called up in late December, but the new brigade was poorly organized, did not have a deputy brigade commander, and was short on weapons and officers.

During the training period, soldiers complained of serious gaps in equipment, professionalism, and a lack of human resources.

The soldiers were then further angered to learn their mission had changed, and they would be sent to Gaza for combat missions.

The radio quoted one soldier as saying:

“We received the conscription order, and we responded to that. They told us that our specialty would be to protect the towns, and after about a week of training that took place in a horrific manner, without ammunition, and without officers, we were suddenly told that there was an order that the Israeli army needed us to enter the Gaza Strip to clear homes.”

The soldier added,

“We were shocked. We are all combat soldiers. I personally was in the Nahal Brigade, and the rest of the soldiers are from former infantry brigades, but we had not carried out reserve missions for years. We were given an M16 weapon, which fell apart in our hands, and there was no ammunition for training. We collected bullets off the ground so that we have something we can fire.”

The radio station quoted another soldier as saying,

“There are people who trained without military uniforms. There are soldiers who were not given shirts or slippers at first. The means that were available were not suitable for training. The brigade, which was supposed to include four battalions, barely reached one and a half battalions. It is not understandable how they wanted to introduce such a completely unqualified force into the Gaza Strip.”

The report comes amid the announcement that the 36th division, which comprises armored, engineering, and infantry companies, withdrew from the Gaza Strip after 80 days of fighting.

The Israeli government says this is part of a planned transition away from the “intensive manoeuvring stage” of its Gaza military campaign to a more targeted phase to last until the end of this year.

At the same time, some speculate that Israel has been forced to withdraw some of its forces due to heavy losses inflicted by fighters from Hamas’ military wing, the Ezzedine al-Qassam Brigades.

Israel is also facing economic difficulties, with the government having to pay salaries for hundreds of thousands of reserve soldiers called away from their civilian jobs.

Israel also has large numbers of soldiers on the northern border to support operations against Hezbollah in Lebanon.

Israel’s army chief said Wednesday the likelihood of a full-scale war with the Lebanese resistance group has become “much higher.”

“I don’t know when the war in the north is, I can tell you that the likelihood of it happening in the coming months is much higher than it was in the past,” Israeli army chief Herzi Halevi said in a statement during a visit to northern Israel.

***

 

Part II

Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter.

Disobey Illegal Orders, Abandon the Battlefield

by

Michel Chossudovsky 

January 19, 2023

 

This text presents a possible solution to put an end to the ongoing genocide. It is a proposal which has not been the object of debate by anti-war activists in solidarity with Palestine.  

It is based on Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter  which defines the responsibility of combatants “to refuse the orders of Government or a superior … “provided a moral choice [is] possible“. 

Based on the Nuremberg Charter, what is required is a campaign encouraging:

Israeli, American and NATO Combatants to “Disobey Unlawful Orders” and “Abandon the Battlefield”. 

The Campaign would focus on making that “moral choice” possible, namely to enable enlisted Israeli, American, and NATO service men and women to “Abandon the Battlefield”.

The Abandon the Battlefield campaign will in large part be waged in Israel. In regards to Israel, already there are unfolding divisions in the IDF command structures, political divisions, coupled with a protest movement against Netanyahu.

IDF soldiers and commanders must be informed and briefed on the significance of Nuremberg Principle IV. 

Inasmuch as the U.S. and its allies are waging a hegemonic war in major regions of the World, Abandon the Battlefield should be a call for action by the anti-war movement Worldwide. 

 

Click  title page to access full document (pdf)

 

Now let me turn my attention to Nuremberg Principle VI, which defines the crimes punishable under international law: 

Nuremberg Charter. Principle VI 

Both Prime Minister Bibi Netanyahu as well as President Joe Biden are responsible for “war crimes”, “crimes against peace” and “crimes against humanity” as defined under Principle VI of the Nuremberg Charter:

The crimes hereinafter set out are punishable as crimes under international law:

(a) Crimes against peace:

(i) Planning, preparation, initiation or waging of a war of aggression or a war in violation of international treaties, agreements or assurances;
(ii) Participation in a common plan or conspiracy for the accomplishment of any of the acts mentioned under (i).

(b)  War crimes:

Violations of the laws or customs of war which include, but are not limited to, murder, ill- treatment or deportation to slave-labour or for any other purpose of civilian population of or in occupied territory, murder or ill-treatment of prisoners of war, of persons on the seas, killing of hostages, plunder of public or private property, wanton destruction of cities, towns, or villages, or devastation not justified by military necessity.

(c)  Crimes against humanity:

Murder, extermination, enslavement, deportation and other inhuman acts done against any civilian population, or persecutions on political, racial or religious grounds.

Disobey Unlawful Orders, Abandon the Battlefield 

According to Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter:

“The fact that a person [e.g. Israeli, U.S.soldiers, pilots]  acted pursuant to order of his [her] Government or of a superior does not relieve him [her] from responsibility under international law, provided a moral choice was in fact possible to him [her].”

Let us make that  “moral choice” possible, to enlisted Israeli, American, and NATO service men and women.

Let us call upon Israeli and American soldiers and pilots “to abandon the battlefield”, as an act of refusal to participate in a criminal undertaking against the People of Gaza.  

South Africa’s legal procedure at the ICJ should be endorsed Worldwide. While it cannot be relied upon to put a rapid end to the genocide, it provides support and legitimacy to 

Disobey Unlawful Orders, Abandon the Battlefield”  campaign under Nuremberg Charter Principle IV.

It is a proposal which has not been the object of media coverage and/or debate by anti-war activists.

While it is predicated on international law, its conduct  does not require the political rubber stamp of either the ICC or the ICJ. It is part of a grass-routs campaign in Israel and the Middle East as well as Worldwide. 

***

For more details see 

The Criminalization of International Justice, Putting an End to the Genocide against the People of Palestine. Nuremberg Principle IV

By Prof Michel Chossudovsky, January 17, 2024

***

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from IDF Spokesperson’s Unit

Western Journalists Are Accessories to Murder

January 19th, 2024 by Bill Nicholov

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

How are Western TV news anchors able to sit at their desks, with a straight face and with no remorse, and broadcast news that enables rampant human rights violations and glorifies mass murder?

Are they evil, selfish or just plain stupid?

When they report news of a country carpet-bombing civilians, with almost half of the slaughtered being children, the next words that come out of the journalist’s mouth cannot be that the country committing genocide “has the right to defend itself”.

Nobody is that stupid.

Western journalists follow their bosses’ marching orders and have agreed to be wilfully blind in order to push through a biased, racist agenda for the sake of their own careers.

They are selfish, resulting in evil acts, so you draw your own conclusions.

To make matters worse, they drown in self-congratulatory adulation from the public for “standing up for morality, democracy, and human rights” while feigning humbleness with a thinly veiled, yet omnipresent, aura of self-righteousness.

Yes, I’m pissed off.

And correction, it’s the public that is that stupid.

To add to the audacity, many Western journalists and owners of media companies, who share a religion or ethnicity with the oppressed, hang their own people out to dry in order to pursue their imperialistic Western agendas for the sake of a profit.

There are specific people I have in mind, but you draw your own conclusions.

My ethnic group has its own Western media sellouts, and will also draw its own conclusions as to who I’m referring to. We’re a target of the wide array of Western anti-human rights tactics, and we’ve experienced them all, including mass murder, expulsion, forced assimilation and systematic human rights abuses.

When your country’s name is forcibly changed (by the West, aiding and abetting your oppressors, of course) in order to eradicate your identity, culture, and history — as announced and celebrated by your oppressors — the next words out of a Western journalist’s mouth cannot be that it is a “resolution of a diplomatic dispute”.

Riot police attacking peaceful protesters cannot result in Western media sympathizing with the police and denouncing the protesters. Dissenters incarcerated and subjected to daily beatings in prison — simply for speaking out — cannot be referred to as “nationalists”. Terrorists who started a civil war in your country and committed murder with the public aim of destroying your ethnic group (with Western backing, of course), cannot be labelled as “human rights defenders”.

When your ethnic group, and your family, are carpet-bombed by the West following World War II (despite being Allies in both world wars) because the West chose to aid Nazi-supporting fascists slaughter your ethnic group, Western journalists cannot call it a “defence of democracy”.

The West chooses which ethnic groups are expendable. They decide who has human rights and superhuman rights, vs. no rights at all. But Western media companies and journalists do not have to obey marching orders. They choose to follow them in lockstep no matter the repercussions for the oppressed. They could take a stand in defence of human rights — and actual life — by reporting the truth, quitting in protest and exposing corruption in their industry, and becoming real defenders of human rights. And their selfishness would be satisfied, as there is profit to be had there too.

But they choose to be accessories to murder. They are evil.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Bill Nicholov is President of Macedonian Human Rights Movement International. 

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

You have to hand it to the U.S. and its henchmen for brazenness. In order to protect their client state Israel and its genocide in Gaza, the U.S., together with the UK, have in one week launched air and sea attacks on the Houthis in Yemen five times, referring to it as “self-defense” in their Orwellian lingo. The ostensible reason being Yemen’s refusal to allow ships bound for Israel, which is committing genocide in Gaza, to enter the Red Sea, while permitting other ships to pass freely.

To any impartial observer, the Houthis should be lauded. Yet, while the International Court of Justice considers the South African charge of genocide against Israel that is supported by overwhelming evidence, the U.S. and its allies have instigated a wider war throughout the Middle East while claiming they do not want such a war. These settler colonial states want genocide and a much wider war because they have been set back on their heels by those they have mocked, provoked, and attacked – notably the Palestinians, Syrians, and Russians, among others.

While the criminalization of international law does not bode well for the ICJ’s upcoming ruling or its ability to stop Israeli’s genocide in Gaza, Michel Chossudovsky, of Global Research, as is his wont, has offered a superb analysis and suggestion for those who oppose such crimes:

that Principle IV of the Nuremberg Charter – “The fact that a person [e.g. Israeli, U.S. soldiers, pilots]  acted pursuant to order of his [her] Government or of a superior does not relieve him [her] from responsibility under international law, provided a moral choice was in fact possible to him.” – should be used to supplement the South African charges and appeal directly to the moral consciences of those asked to carry out acts of genocide. He writes:

Let us call upon Israeli and American soldiers and pilots “to abandon the battlefield”, as an act of refusal to participate in a criminal undertaking against the People of Gaza.  

South Africa’s legal procedure at the ICJ should be endorsed Worldwide. While it cannot be relied upon to put a rapid end to the genocide, it provides support and legitimacy to the “Disobey Unlawful Orders, Abandon the Battlefield”  campaign under Nuremberg Charter Principle IV.

While such an approach will not stop the continuing slaughter, it would remind the world that each person who participates in and supports it bears a heavy burden of guilt for their actions; that they are morally and legally culpable.

This appeal to the human heart and conscience, no matter what its practical effect, will at least add to the condemnation of a genocide happening in real time and full view of the world, even though no one will ever be prosecuted for such crimes since any real just use of international law has long disappeared.  Yet there is a edifying history of such conscientious objection to immoral war making, and though each person makes the decision in solitary witness, individual choices can inspire others and the solitary become solidary, as Albert Camus reminded us at the end of his short story, “The Artist at Work.”

With each passing day, it becomes more and more evident that Israel/U.S.A. and their allies do want a wider war. Iran is their special focus, with Gaza, the West Bank, Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, and Yemen targets on the way. Anyone who supports the genocide in Gaza, explicitly or through silence, bears responsibility for the conflagration to come. There are no excuses.

And the facts show that it is axiomatic that waging war has been the modus operandi of the U.S./Israeli alliance for a long time.  Just as in early 2003 when the Bush administration said they were looking for a peaceful solution to their fake charges against Sadam Hussein with his alleged “weapons of mass destruction,” the Biden administration is lying, as the Bush administration lied about September 11, 2001 to launch its ongoing war on terror, starting in Afghanistan. Without an expanded war, President Biden – aka the Democrats, since he will most probably not be the candidate – and his psychopathic partner Benjamin Netanyahu, will not survive. It is bi-partisan war-mongering, of course, internationally and intramurally, since both U.S. political parties are controlled by the Israel Lobby and billionaire class that owns Congress and the “defense” industry that thrives on never-ending war to such an extent that even the notable independent candidate for the presidency, Robert Kennedy, Jr., who is running as an anti-war candidate, fully supports Israel which is tantamount to supporting Biden’s expanding war policy.

Biden and Netanyahu, who are always claiming after the fact that they were surprised by events or were fed bad advice by their underlings, are dumb scorpions. They are stupid but deadly. And many people in the West, while perhaps decent people in their personal lives, are living in a fantasy world of “sincere ignorance and conscientious stupidity,” in MLK, Jr.’s words, as the growing threat of a world war increases and insouciance reigns.

Neither the Israeli nor American government can allow themselves to be humiliated, U.S./NATO by the Russians in Ukraine and the Israelis by the Palestinians.  Like cornered criminals with lethal weapons, they will kill as many as they can on their way down, taking their revenge on the weakest first.

Their “mistakes” are always well intentioned. They stumble into wars through faulty intelligence. They drop the ball because of bureaucratic mix-ups. They miscalculate the perfidy of the moneyed elites whom allegedly they oppose while pocketing their cash and ushering them into the national coffers out of necessity since they are too big to fail. They never see the storm coming, even as they create it. Their incompetence or the perfidy of their enemies is the retort to all those “nut cases” who conjure up conspiracy theories or plain facts to explain their actions or lack thereof. They are innocent. Always innocent.  And they can’t understand why those they have long abused reach a point when they will no longer impetrate for mercy but will fight fiercely for their freedom.

All signs point to a major war on the horizon. Both the U.S.A. and Israel have been shown to be rogue states with no desire to negotiate a peaceful world. Believing in high-tech weapons and massive firepower, neither has learned the hard lesson that anti-colonial wars have historically been won by those with far less weapons but with a passionate desire to throw off the chains of their oppressors. Vietnam is the text-book case, and there are many others. Failure to learn is the name of their game.

The Zionist project for a Greater Israel is doomed to fail, but as it does, desperate men like Biden and Netanyahu are intent on launching desperate acts of war. Exactly when and how this expanded war will blaze across the headlines is the question. It has started, but I think it prudent to expect a black swan event sometime this year when all hell will break loose. The genocide in Gaza is the first step, and the U.S./Israel, “not wanting” a wider war, have already started one.

(For an excellent history lesson on the Zionist oppression of Palestinians and the current genocide, listen to Max Blumenthal’s and Miko Peled’s impassioned talk – “Where is the War in Gaza Going? – delivered from the heart of darkness, Washington D.C.  Two Jewish men who know the difference between Zionism and Judaism and whose consciences are aflame with justice for the oppressed Palestinians.)

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on the author’s website, Behind the Curtain.

Edward Curtin is a prominent author, researcher and sociologist based in Western Massachusetts. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG).  

Featured image: President Joe Biden participates in a restricted bilateral meeting with Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu at the Hotel Kempinski in Tel Aviv, Israel, Wednesday, October 18, 2023. (Official White House Photo by Cameron Smith)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

On Tuesday, the Senate voted down a resolution that would have set the stage for Congress to place conditions on U.S. military aid to Israel — quashing what has so far been the most serious effort on Capitol Hill to hold the U.S. ally to account for its brutal assault on Gaza. 

Introduced by Sen. Bernie Sanders, I-Vt., in December, the resolution would have required the State Department to submit a report to Congress about allegations of Israel committing human rights violations, and whether and how the U.S. played a role and responded to such acts. If the bill had passed and the State Department failed to submit the report within 30 days, U.S. aid to Israel would have been frozen. If the State Department had submitted a report to Congress, however, U.S. aid to Israel could have come to a vote, giving Congress the option to condition, restrict, or terminate security assistance to Israel (or to do nothing at all). Such votes would have required only a simple majority for passage.

When it came to a vote Tuesday evening, the Senate voted 72-11 to table the resolution, effectively killing it. 

“It’s frankly historic that this vote took place at all,” said Andrew O’Neill, the legislative director for the political advocacy group Indivisible. “The number of senators willing to take a vote like this even weeks ago, on the face of it, would have been zero.”

Israel receives billions of dollars per year in U.S. aid, making it the largest recipient of American security assistance in the world. In the wake of Hamas’s October 7 attack on Israel, President Joe Biden asked Congress to approve an additional $14 billion in aid to the country, whose retaliatory war on Gaza has killed more than 24,000 Palestinians.

Sanders’s resolution was based on the Foreign Assistance Act, which prohibits the American government from providing security assistance to any government “which engages in a consistent pattern of gross violations of internationally recognized human rights.” Section 502B(c) of the law empowers Congress to request information on a country’s human rights practices, which Sanders took advantage of to force this vote.

“The Senators who lent their support to this resolution did so in spite of enormous political pressure,” O’Neill said, noting that, for decades, there has been a bipartisan status quo of not scrutinizing assistance to Israel. “The 502B process had never been used before, and now that tool is on the table. These are lonely votes, but votes that can be the start of something bigger.”

The votes in support for Sanders’s resolution came almost entirely from Democratic senators: Laphonza Butler of California, Martin Heinrich of New Mexico, Mazie Hirono of Hawaii, Ben Ray Luján of New Mexico, Ed Markey and Elizabeth Warren of Massachusetts, Jeff Merkley of Oregon, Chris Van Hollen of Maryland, and Peter Welch of Vermont. Rand Paul was the only Republican to vote against tabling the resolution. 

Van Hollen told The Intercept that it’s important for the Senate to get the information required by the proposed report.

“That’s important for transparency and I think taxpayers have a right to know how their funds are being used.”

Speaking with reporters ahead of the vote, Warren said,

“Prime Minister Netanyahu needs to understand that he does not get a blank check from the United States Congress.” 

She continued:

“The Senate has had a role in overseeing our military involvement overseas running back to the drafting of the Constitution. We have a responsibility to stand up now and say that given how Netanyahu and his right-wing war cabinet have prosecuted this war, we have serious questions that we are obligated to ask before we go further.”

Some Democratic senators who voted to kill the resolution told The Intercept they were concerned about Israeli human rights abuses, but they did not think Sanders’s proposal was the way to address them. Others, mostly Republicans, deflected from questions about Israel’s conduct during the war. 

Sen. Bob Casey, D-Pa., said he was opposed to the resolution because the timeline for potential congressional action would have conflicted with the aims of Israel’s war.

“It doesn’t make a lot of sense to be conditioning a military campaign engaged in by an ally,” he said. He added that “there’s no question if there are allegations, they will be the subject of scrutiny and review,” but said he doesn’t think the resolution is the right approach.

Sen. Tom Carper, D-Del., explained his opposition to the resolution by pointing out that 502B(c) has never been used in its 50-year history, and that he prefers a measureOpens in a new tab introduced by Van Hollen. That amendment would require weapons received by any country under Biden’s proposal for supplemental aid to Israel and Ukraine to be used in accordance with U.S. law, international humanitarian law, and the law of armed conflict.

Sen. Chris Murphy, D-Conn., who has a record of scrutinizing human rights abuses by U.S. allies, voted against the resolution. He told The Intercept that he supports Israel’s right to defend itself and that he has deep reservations about the way it has conducted its campaign, but he doesn’t support measures “potentially designed to cut off funding for Israel.” The resolution, he said, is a vehicle toward completely cutting off aid to Israel. “I don’t think that’s the right move for Congress at this time,” he said. 

Sen. Mike Braun, R-Ind., told The Intercept that he is “sensitive” to the allegations of human rights abuses by Israel, and that he understands Sanders’s sensitivity to “trying to keep the collateral damage down, and I think everybody would be for that.” Still, he said, he opposed the resolution “because I think it then draws attention away from how it started, and how it has to be litigated, and that’s not easy,” referring to Hamas’s attack on October 7 and Israel’s stated aim of rooting out the organization.

Asked if he thought Israel was doing enough to mitigate civilian casualties, Sen. Rick Scott, R-Fla., told The Intercept that “they need to kill every Hamas member and anybody that dies in Gaza is a result of Hamas.” He voted against the resolution. 

Sen. Bill Cassidy, R-La., referred to Hamas’s attack on Israel as he explained his opposition to the resolution. “To give them respite would be to allow them to do it again,” he told The Intercept. When asked whether Israel is doing enough to protect civilians, Cassidy repeated a frequent Israeli government talking point about Hamas, saying that “when you build your tunnels with your commanders beneath mosques, hospitals, and schools, then you have created an environment where it’s difficult to prevent civilian injury.”

On his way to vote against the resolution, Sen. Mike Lee, R-Utah, told The Intercept that he has been consistent with his position on the issue. “Of course it does,” he said when asked if he’s concerned about the number of casualties in Gaza. Asked if Israel is doing enough to mitigate the casualties, he responded simply: “Good talking to you,” as the Senate elevator doors closed.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image: The Israeli and American flags displayed on the walls of the Old City in Jerusalem (Photo: Yonatan Sindel)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

 

***

Almost two years ago, at the February 2022, Munich Security Conference, Bill Gates stated with authority that: “the risks of severe disease from Covid-19 have “dramatically reduced” but another pandemic is all but certain”. A nonsensical statement. 

According to Gates, “a potential new pandemic would likely stem from a different pathogen to that of the coronavirus family” (CNBC).

“We’ll have another pandemic. It will be a different pathogen next time,” Gates said.

How could he know this in advance?

It’s an Outright Lie

It should be noted that the pathogen pertaining to SARS-CoV-2  — initially heralded as a novel coronavirus (2019-nCoV) which was never identified, turned out to be a 20 year old coronavirus entitled 2003 SARS-CoV

Michel Chossudovsky, Global Research,  January 19, 2024

***

According to Karen Gilchirst  CNBC (February 2022)

“Speaking to CNBC’s Hadley Gamble at Germany’s annual Munich Security Conference, Gates, co-chair of the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, said that a potential new pandemic would likely stem from a different pathogen to that of the coronavirus family. 

But he added that advances in medical technology should help the world do a better job of fighting it — if investments are made now.

“We’ll have another pandemic. It will be a different pathogen next time,” Gates said.

Two years into the coronavirus pandemic, Gates said the worst effects have faded as huge swathes of the global population have gained some level of immunity. Its severity has also waned with the latest omicron variant.

However, Gates said that in many places that was due to virus itself, which creates a level of immunity, and has “done a better job of getting out to the world population than we have with vaccines.”

“The chance of severe disease, which is mainly associated with being elderly and having obesity or diabetes, those risks are now dramatically reduced because of that infection exposure,” he said. 

Gates said it was already “too late” to reach the World Health Organization’s goal to vaccinate 70% of the global population by mid-2022. Currently 61.9% of the world population has received at least one dose of a Covid-19 vaccine.

He added that the world should move faster in the future to develop and distribute vaccines, calling on governments to invest now.

“Next time we should try and make it, instead of two years, we should make it more like six months,” Gates said, adding that standardized platforms, including messenger RNA (mRNA) technology, would make that possible.

“The cost of being ready for the next pandemic is not that large. It’s not like climate change. If we’re rational, yes, the next time we’ll catch it early.”

Gates, through the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, has partnered with the U.K.’s Wellcome Trust to donate $300 million to the Coalition for Epidemic Preparedness Innovations, which helped form the Covax program to deliver vaccines to low- and middle-income countries.

The CEPI is aiming to raise $3.5 billion in an effort to cut the time required to develop a new vaccine to just 100 days.

Click here to read the full article on CNBC.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from SHTFplan.com

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Buried within the $106 billion supplemental national security funding request the White House sent to Congress on October 20 was a highly unusual exemption. As part of $3.5 billion earmarked for Foreign Military Financing (FMF) funding for Israel, the executive branch sought permission to unilaterally blanket-approve the future sale of military equipment and weapons—like ballistic missiles and artillery ammunition — to Israel without notifying Congress. 

This means the Israeli government would be able to purchase up to $3.5 billion in military articles and services in complete secrecy. The House included the waiver language in a bill that splits off Israeli military aid from the rest of the package.

I’ve never seen anything like it,” says Josh Paul, former director of congressional and public affairs for the State Department’s Bureau of Political-Military Affairs. Paul recently resigned in protest against the administration’s plans to rush weapons to Israel. ​A proposal in a legislative request to Congress to waive Congressional notification entirely for FMF-funded Foreign Military Sales or Direct Commercial Contracts is unprecedented in my experience. … Frankly, [it’s] an insult to Congressional oversight prerogatives.”

FMF requests like this one are essentially grants to purchase weapons and defense services from the United States and its defense contractors. Even after Congress approves an FMF request, it still has power over how the money is spent and can deny major arms sales. 

The Congressional approval process also serves another purpose — it creates a public record to ensure transparency. Notifications to Congress appear in the Federal Register, which is accessible to the public. In addition, the Defense Security Cooperation Agency (DSCA) publishes press releases for major arms sales on its website. These public postings are often the only way that journalists, watchdog groups, and arms control experts can learn of and track weapons sales. 

It’s also redundant with existing laws,” Paul says. The White House can unilaterally approve foreign military sales in ​emergency” situations but must notify Congress and provide a ​detailed justification.” The Israel waiver does not require any communication with Congress.

So this doesn’t actually reduce the time, it just reduces the oversight,” Paul says. ​It removes that mechanism for Congress to actually understand what is being transferred at the time it is being transferred.” Paul adds that the language came from the White House and received ​pushback” within the executive branch.

Administrative shortcuts can erode the State Department vetting process and increase the likelihood of sales to military units that commit gross human rights violations. Such sales violate the Leahy Law under the Foreign Assistance Act. 

The Trump administration drew fire from Congress in May 2019 when it invoked the existing emergency certification process to bypass congressional review of $8.1 billion in arms destined for Saudi Arabia, the United Arab Emirates and Jordan. An Office of Inspector General investigation later determined that the State Department did ​not fully assess risks and implement mitigation measures to reduce civilian casualties and legal concerns associated with the transfer of [precision-guided munitions].” 

Notably, although the Biden administration proposal is framed as an ​emergency response,” it allows the funding to be used at any time before September 2025. The Israeli government can also set aside these funds for future use, beyond 2025, effectively giving Israel a blank pass for arms purchases without recurring Congressional notification.

The Biden administration is pushing Congress to pass the funding package quickly. The House split off $14.3 billion in Israel military aid — including the $3.5 billion FMF request and the waiver language — into a separate bill tied to cuts in IRS funding, which Biden says he will veto. The chairs of the Senate Committee on Appropriations chairs say they are drafting a bill to reflect Biden’s full request.

Overall, Israel is the largest cumulative recipient of U.S. foreign assistance since World War II, totaling $158 billion (in non-inflation-adjusted dollars) in economic and military aid. The supplemental funding request more than doubles Israel’s annual $3.3billion in FMF. 

Since the most recent escalated violence began on October 7, the Defense Department has expedited delivery of weapons to Israel from previously approved sales, including Joint Direct Attack Munitions (JDAMs), 155mm artillery shells and nearly a million rounds of ammunition. JDAMs are used as ​smart” guidance attachments to MK-80 series bombs. During Israel’s 2014bombing campaign in Gaza, its military mostly used U.S.-made MK-84one-ton bombs. An independent UN commission investigating the war concluded that the use of those bombs ​constitute a violation of the prohibition of indiscriminate attacks.” With $3.5 billion, the Israeli military could acquire over 116,000 JDAMs without Congressional notification or public disclosure.

The waiver would further undermine meaningful scrutiny of weapons sales on Capitol Hill at a time when U.S. support is enabling bombings that have killed thousands of civilians,” says John Ramming Chappell, U.S. advocacy and legal fellow at the Center for Civilians in Conflict, a Washington, D.C.-based nonprofit.

Legislators should reject the White House’s request for an open-ended notification waiver for arms sales to Israel in the emergency supplemental. Instead, members of Congress should push the State Department and the Pentagon for greater transparency on weapons transfers to Israel to understand how the U.S. is contributing to civilian harm and possible war crimes. With the Biden administration apparently reluctant to restrict weapons use or monitor international law compliance, it’s up to Congress to put effective restrictions in place.”

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Janet Abou-Elias is a Founding Board Member of Women for Weapons Trade Transparency and a Research Fellow at the Center for International Policy. Her research focuses on international arms trade policy, U.S. foreign policy, and sustainability initiatives.

Lillian Mauldin is a Founding Board Member of Women for Weapons Trade Transparency and a Research Fellow at the Center for International Policy. Her work focuses on political strategy and legislative and grassroots advocacy.

Mekedas Belayneh is a Member of Women for Weapons Trade Transparency interested in the connections between international economic policy and American militarism. 

Rosie Khan is a Founding Board Member of Women for Weapons Trade Transparency specializing in the intersection of militarism, the environment, and economic policy.

Liv Owens is a Member of Women for Weapons Trade Transparency focusing primarily on the role of gender and emerging technology within the realm of militarization.  

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Is Zelensky Really Out of Control?

With the Full Endorsement of Washington

by 

Drago Bosnic

 

On January 18, Russian Foreign Minister Sergei Lavrov stated that the political West is trying to exert greater control over the increasingly unhinged Kiev regime frontman Volodymyr Zelensky. According to Lavrov’s assessment, the US-led power pole’s puppet is trying to expand his grip on power by eliminating any form of dissent, including canceling this year’s presidential election. The increasingly out-of-control Zelensky has become a nuisance for the United States, prompting it to insist on “more flexibility” from him, Lavrov said, adding that “all the latest rhetoric coming from [Zelensky’s] office only reflects the wish of that individual and his associates… to keep power as much as they can”. Russia’s top-ranking diplomat also stated that “having Zelensky run a re-election campaign would put him more in line with Western interests”.

Lavrov’s comments come at a time when the puppet of the belligerent US-led power pole is indeed coming off as a “proxy” dictator. Terrified of the prospect of becoming (geo)politically obsolete, Zelensky is trying to stay relevant for as long as possible. From a purely logical point of view, this is rather understandable, as Washington DC has a long history of abandoning its puppets whenever they outlive their purpose. Needless to say, Zelensky wants to avoid this unflattering fate. In the initial stages of the special military operation (SMO), he and his entourage, amply aided by the mainstream propaganda machine, fought bitterly to ensure that the image of “united Ukraine standing in the face of Russian aggression” is spread across the world. The illusion held initially, but it was only a matter of time before this false sense of unity faded away for good.

Zelensky’s effort to seize his “Churchill moment” by using the ongoing conflict as a way to “legally” stay in power and continue hoarding whatever’s left of Western funds is slowly coming to an unceremonious end. Battlefield failures led to the plummeting of the already low morale, leading to even more factionalism and fault lines within the Neo-Nazi junta, amplifying its troubles both at home and abroad. Zelensky’s publicly declared “optimism” is being pushed only by his most loyal propagandists, while any attempt to criticize him is decried as supposedly “unpatriotic”, stifling any chance to get accurate information about the situation on the frontlines and in the country itself. Alternative sources are the only way to get bits and pieces of the truth, but using them can be quite dangerous and even deadly nowadays.

And yet, even in such a political climate, Zelensky is still afraid to allow elections to be held. By keeping only those unequivocally loyal to him, he became accustomed to having no competitors or critics. This sort of grip on power has made him increasingly delusional and unable to process the Kiev regime’s grim reality. In recent times, Zelensky even turned on some of his closest backers, as evidenced by Igor Kolomoisky’s arrest back in early September. Before that, the pompously announced counteroffensive resulted in complete failure. Disappointed, the political West increased pressure on Zelensky who was already in an unflattering position as he previously pledged to “liberate the whole country (including Crimea)”. Giving such grossly unrealistic promises is yet another confirmation of Lavrov’s claims.

All this also drew a wider wedge between the Kiev regime and the military, particularly between Zelensky and General Valery Zaluzhny. Thus, the Neo-Nazi junta frontman managed not only to antagonize the top military leader, but also got another strong political opponent, as Zaluzhny has repeatedly hinted at his presidential ambitions. In addition, Zelensky’s old rivals are still very much active, prompting him to start using the state apparatus against them, usually by prosecuting them for corruption, a fact recently revealed by former Ukrainian parliamentarian Andrii Derkach who is also actively being hunted by the Kiev regime’s special services. However, it’s important to note that Zelensky still hasn’t outlived his usefulness for the political West, at least until the belligerent power pole finds an “adequate” successor.

This is evidenced by the mainstream propaganda machine’s effort to justify the repeated postponing of elections, insisting that it would be impractical and even logistically impossible due to ongoing hostilities. Simultaneously, the political West is trying to keep the Neo-Nazi junta geopolitically relevant by organizing historically unprecedented unilateral “peace talks” that are completely inconsequential to the actual strategic situation. Zelensky himself is still at the center of this PR show, particularly when taking into account that he refuses to give up on his absurd “peace plan” that effectively amounts to Russia’s unconditional capitulation. On the other hand, while Zelensky and his backers keep shooting their mouths off about supposed “peace”, there are talks of delivering ever more advanced NATO weapons to the Kiev regime.

Namely, NATO countries are actively breaking international arms control agreements by supplying long-range missiles and even nuclear-capable fighter jets, a fact that Lavrov has been warning about for months at this point.

When taking into account the Neo-Nazi junta’s disastrous policies, worthy of an international war crimes tribunal (which immediately disqualifies the so-called ICC in Hague), as well as the fact that the political West wants to continue supporting this monstrosity (despite the political crisis in the US), it can easily be argued that Zelensky is indeed out of control. However, the same applies to his entire entourage and the rest of the Kiev regime. On the other hand, its US/NATO overlords are in no way better. Terrified of the multipolar world, they’re actively pushing for destabilization on a global scale.

What is the End Game.

The Neo-Colonial Privatization of Ukraine

by

Michel Chossudovsky 

As outlined in Drago Bosnic‘s careful documented article, Zelensky is “Out of Control” with the full Support of U.S.-NATO.

What is the Hidden Agenda? 

This “Engineered Chaos” –which consists in deliberately prolonging an unwinable war, to the detriment of the people of Ukraine–, creates conditions which favour the Neo-Colonial Privatization of An Entire country.

The Privatization of Ukraine was launched in November 2022 in liaison  with BlackRock’s  consulting company  McKinsey, a public relations firm which has largely been responsible for co-opting corrupt politicians and officials Worldwide not to mention scientists and intellectuals on behalf of powerful financial interests. 


For  details see:

The NeoCons’ Proxy War “Against Ukraine”: Nuclear War is On the Table. The Privatization of Ukraine

By Prof Michel Chossudovsky, September 30, 2023


BlackRock, which is the World’s largest portfolio investment company together with JPMorgan “has come to the rescue of Ukraine”. The Ukraine Reconstruction Bank. was set up. The stated objective was “to attract billions of dollars in private investment to assist rebuilding projects in a war-torn country”. (FT, June 19, 2023)

“… BlackRock, JP Morgan and private investors, aim to profit from the country’s reconstruction along with 400 global companies, including Citi, Sanofi and Philips. … JP Morgan’s Stefan Weiler sees a “tremendous opportunity” for private investors. (Colin Todhunter, Global Research June 28, 2023)

The Kiev Neo-Nazi regime is a partner in this endeavour. War is Good for Business. The greater the destruction, the greater the stranglehold on Ukraine by “private investors”:

“BlackRock and JPMorgan Chase are helping the Ukrainian government set up a reconstruction bank to steer public seed capital into rebuilding projects that can attract hundreds of billions of dollars in private investment.” (FT, op cit)

“The Kyiv government engaged BlackRock’s consulting arm in November to determine how best to attract that kind of capital, and then added JPMorgan in February 2023. Ukraine president Volodymyr Zelenskyy announced last month that the country was working with the two financial groups and consultants at McKinsey.

BlackRock and Ukraine’s Ministry of Economy signed a Memorandum of Understanding in November 2022.

In late December 2022, president Zelensky and BlackRock’s CEO Larry Fink agreed on an investment strategy.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

This article was originally published on InfoBrics.

Drago Bosnic is an independent geopolitical and military analyst. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The vaccine alliance known as Gavi, which is Bill Gates’s vaccine uptake pet project, has Canada listed as its board member and today we’re going to look at who the unelected bureaucrat is that represents our country and just how much taxpayer dollars she has directed to global vaccine uptake efforts.

Canada being a board member of Bill Gates’ vaccine uptake pet project known as the Global Vaccine Alliance (Gavi) may surprise many Canadians.

Gavi is the global authority on compelling vaccines on the world scale, especially third-world countries, under the guise of equitable access, and it has Canada in its financial back pocket.

This first came about in an order paper question in the House of Commons last year, by member of Parliament McPherson in Edmonton Strathcona who asked for negotiation participation notes on the Government of Canada’s position on the World Health Organization’s pandemic treaty.

Global Affairs Canada responded that it “continues to support access to COVID-19 vaccines and medical countermeasures globally through its $2.1 billion contribution to the ACT – Accelerator” and that it “continues to work with countries and global partners to strengthen immunization delivery systems, integrate COVID-19 management into routine health services and reinforce broader health systems.”

That’s 2.1 billion dollars of Canadian taxpayers hard earned money being given to a World Health Organization (WHO) initiative intent on “supporting the development and equitable distribution of the tests, treatments and vaccines the world needs to reduce mortality and severe disease, restoring full societal and economic activity globally in the near term, and facilitating high-level control of COVID-19 disease in the medium term.”

ACT stands for “Access to COVID-19 Tools (ACT)” and its “Accelerator” is intended as a “groundbreaking global collaboration to accelerate development, production, and equitable access to COVID-19 tests, treatments, and vaccines.”

Launched in April 2020, the ACT-Accelerator aimed to unite governments, scientists, businesses, and global health organizations, including the Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation, CEPI, FIND, Gavi, The Global Fund, Unitaid, the Wellcome trust, WHO, and the World Bank. After the launch, UNICEF and PAHO joined as delivery partners for COVAX, with a focus on vaccine distribution.

The ACT-Accelerator launched its Transition Plan in October 2022, “setting out adjustments to its way of working, as countries move from managing COVID-19 as an acute emergency to integration into longer-term disease control programmes.”

According to the document, COVAX (which is the COVID-19 vaccines global access initiative) said it will “incentivize further innovation on COVID-19 vaccines, especially with the potential need to include them in routine programmes going forward.”

Under Risk Communication and Community Engagement (RCCE) it’s said that the group will leverage “communities and other in-country stakeholders to combat misinformation and create [emphasis ours] demand for COVID-19 tools.”

Not only is the Canadian government supporting this through that 2.1 billion dollar contribution, but also by being a board member of Bill Gates’ global vaccine alliance, GAVI.

The order paper response says “As a Gavi Alliance Board member, Canada remains engaged in Gavi’s efforts to support increased vaccine manufacturing in Africa.”

An unelected and unaccountable bureaucrat by the name of Mellissa Hisko is the Canadian GAVI board member.

She’s the director of global immunization and health systems at Global Affairs Canada.

Hisko was the previous director of Canada’s COVID-19 global health task force, managing international aid commitment and investments to combat COVID-19 on a global scale, even though she has no medical training.

Instead, Hisko holds a Bachelor of Arts from Carleton University and a law degree from the University of Ottawa.

Contained in the order paper response is funding above and beyond that 2.1 billion, and it sounds like Hisko directs it all.

There’s the “Canada’s Global Initiative for Vaccine Equity (CanGIVE)” which received “$317 million” which includes “funding to strengthen vaccine delivery systems, integrate COVID-19 vaccination and reinforce immunization and primary healthcare as avenues for enhanced vaccine equity.”

Canada “increased funding to the mRNA Technology Transfer and Manufacturing Hub in South Africa, for a total contribution of $45 million.”

They “also provided $15 million to the Pan American Health Organization (PAHO)’s COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine Manufacturing Platform to strengthen vaccine production and regulatory capacities in Latin America and the Caribbean.”

Canada is also “providing $100 million over 5 years to the Coalition for Epidemic Preparedness Innovations (CEPI) to accelerate the development of vaccines against emerging infectious diseases.”

CEPI was criticized in an article by the Lancet for a lack of transparency in its grant agreements after the vaccine development assistance agency received $1.4 billion in public money to accelerate COVID-19 vaccine research.

According to a February 2023 letter from then health minister Yve Duclos, “Canada committed close to $3.5 billion in international assistance in response to the COVID-19 pandemic.”

Did Canadians ever have a say in this process? In these allocations of funds?

These are questionable priorities by the Liberal government which supports global vaccine efforts despite everyday Canadians’ growing domestic financial struggles amid a housing and cost of living crisis.

With unelected bureaucrat Mellissa Hisko, who lacks medical expertise, directing these funds, the lack of transparency in the various World Health Organization initiatives raises concerns about how much public input was received before these decisions were made and how much democratic process was involved in ensuring fiscal responsibility of our government.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from NaturalNews.com

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

On February 20, Julian Assange, the daredevil publisher of WikiLeaks, will be going into battle, yet again, with the British justice system – or what counts for it. The UK High Court will hear arguments from his team that his extradition to the United States from Britain to face 18 charges under the Espionage Act of 1917 would violate various precepts of justice. The proceedings hope to reverse the curt, impoverished decision by the remarkably misnamed Justice Jonathan Swift of the same court on June 6, 2023.

At this point, the number of claims the defence team can make are potentially many. Economy, however, has been called for: the two judges hearing the case have asked for a substantially shortened argument, showing, yet again, that the quality of British mercy tends to be sourly short. The grounds Assange can resort to are troublingly vast: CIA-sponsored surveillance, his contemplated assassination, his contemplated abduction, violation of attorney-client privilege, his poor health, the violation of free-speech, a naked, politicised attempt by an imperium to capture one of its greatest and most trenchant critics, and bad faith by the US government.

Campaigners for the cause have been frenzied. But as the solution to Assange’s plight is likely to be political, the burden falls on politicians to stomp and drum from within their various chambers to convince their executive counterparts. In the US Congress, House Resolution 934, introduced on December 13 by Rep. Paul A. Gosar, an Arizona Republican, expresses “the sense of the House of Representatives that regular journalistic activities are protected under the First Amendment, and that the United States ought to drop all charges against and attempts to extradite Julian Assange.”

The resolution sees a dramatic shift from the punishing, haute view taken by such figures as the late Democratic Senator Dianne Feinstein, who was one of the first political figures to suggest that Assange be crucified on the unsteady timber of the Espionage Act for disclosing US cables and classified information in 2010. The resolution acknowledges, for instance, that the disclosures by WikiLeaks “promoted public transparency through the exposure of the hiring of child prostitutes by Defense Department contractors, friendly fire incidents, human rights abuses, civilian killings, and United States use of psychological warfare.” The list could be sordidly longer but let’s not quibble.

Impressively, drafters of the resolution finally acknowledge that charging Assange under the Computer Fraud and Abuse Act (CFAA) for alleged conspiracy to help US Army intelligence analyst Chelsea (then Bradley) Manning access Defense Department computers was a fabled nonsense. For one, it was “impossible” – Manning “already had access to the mentioned computer”. Furthermore, “there was no proof Mr Assange had any contact with said intelligence analyst”.

Ire is also directed at the espionage counts, with the resolution noting that “no other publisher has ever been prosecuted under the Espionage Act prior to these 17 charges.”  A successful prosecution of the publisher “would set a precedent allowing the United States to prosecute and imprison journalists for First Amendment protected activities, including the obtainment and publication of information, something that occurs on a regular basis”.

Acknowledgment is duly made of the importance of press freedoms to promote transparency and protect the Republic, the support for Assange, “sincere and steadfast”, no less, shown by “numerous human rights, press freedom, and privacy rights advocates and organizations”, and the desire by “at least 70 Senators and Members of Parliament from Australia, a critical United States ally and Mr Assange’s native country” for his return.

Members of Australia’s parliament, adding to the efforts last September to convince members of Congress that the prosecution be dropped, have also written to the UK Home Secretary, James Cleverly, requesting that he “undertake an urgent, thorough and independent assessment of the risks to Mr Assange’s health and welfare in the event that he is extradited to the United States.”

The members of the Bring Julian Assange Home Parliamentary Group draw Cleverly’s attention to the recent UK Supreme Court case of AAA v Secretary of State for the Home Department which found “that courts in the United Kingdom cannot just rely on third party assurances by foreign governments but rather are required to make independent assessments of the risk of persecution to individuals before any order is made removing them from the UK.”

It follows that the approach taken by Lord Justices Burnett and Holroyde in USA v Assange [2021] EWHC 3133 was, to put it politely, a touch too confident in accepting assurances given by the US government regarding Assange’s treatment, were he to be extradited. “These assurances were not tested, nor was there any evidence of independent assessment as to the basis on which they could be given and relied upon.”

The conveners of the group point to Assange’s detention in Belmarsh prison since April 2019, his “significant health issues, exacerbated to a dangerous degree by his prolonged incarceration, that are of very real concern to us as his elected representatives.” They also point out the rather unusual consensus between the current Australian Prime Minister, Anthony Albanese, and his opposition number, Peter Dutton, that the “case has gone on for too long.” Continued legal proceedings, both in the UK, and then in the US were extradition to take place “would add yet more years to Mr Assange’s detention and further imperil his health.”

In terms of posterity’s calling, there are surely fewer better things at this point for a US president nearing mental oblivion to do, or a Tory government peering at electoral termination to facilitate, than the release of Assange. At the very least, it would show a grudging acknowledgment that the fourth estate, watchful of government’s egregious abuses, is no corpse, but a vital, thriving necessity.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. Binoy Kampmark was a Commonwealth Scholar at Selwyn College, Cambridge. He currently lectures at RMIT University. He is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG). Email: [email protected] 

Featured image is from Lawyers for Assange

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Jan. 17, 2024 – New cancer diagnoses expected to hit record high this year.

  • New cancer diagnoses in the U.S. are expected to top 2 million for the first time in 2024, driven in large part by an alarming increase in cancers among younger Americans, according to new American Cancer Society data.

  • Doctors are trying to figure out why they’re seeing more young patients with cancer.”
  • “Colorectal cancers are presenting with more aggressive disease and larger tumors at diagnosis,” ACS chief scientific officer William Dahut told Axios.
  • “Preliminary MSK research found significant differences in the microbiomes of early-onset colorectal cancer patients compared with older ones.”
  • “Notably, people aged younger than 50 years were the only one of these three age groups to experience an increase in overall cancer incidence during this time period,” the ACS report said.

American Cancer Society Report, My Take

  • This ACS report only goes to 2021. Even though they have 2022 and 2023 data.

  • This data is heavily manipulated if not outright fraudulent.
  • So why would they admit that cancer is on the rise in people younger than 50, which is true?
  • Because they then cover it up by saying that cancer rates dropped in 2021, which is false.

Limited Hangout

  • “A LIMITED HANGOUT is a phrase used in the intelligence community to describe situations where leaking or revealing parts of the truth operates to control the public narrative. Manipulative partial disclosure.”

  • Cancer is on the rise in people younger than 50 – is a small piece of the truth
  • “Cancer mortality continued to decline through 2021” – is the lie
  • The combination of the two allows control of the narrative.
  • What is the narrative? Have a look:

 

Ethical Skeptic – Latest USA Malignant Neoplasms Mortality (Jan. 18, 2024) 

  • This graph shows how manipulative the ACS Report is by only including 2021 data and none from 2022 or 2023.

  • There is a significant jump in Turbo Cancers in 2023.

 

Image

 

Image

 

Image

 

ED DOWD – UK Death & Disability Trends for Malignant Neoplasms

 

Image

 

John Beaudoin – Massachusetts Death Certificates

 

Image

AUSSIE17 – Chemotherapy Sales in Singapore

  • This data from Aussie17 is absolutely stunning

  • If we can’t get proper Cancer mortality data from the American Cancer Society or Canadian Cancer Society, we can take a close look at cancer drug sales:

 

My Take…

COVID-19 mRNA Vaccine Induced Turbo Cancer tsunami is well underway and as I documented in a recent substack, all the big pharmaceutical players are buying up smaller cancer therapy companies and positioning themselves for 2025.

I have been repeatedly told by a California Medical Oncologist, Dr.Jan Kirsch, that there is no increase in cancer.

 

 

This is where the mainstream of Medical Oncology is today, with their heads completely buried in the sand.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Dr. William Makis is a Canadian physician with expertise in Radiology, Oncology and Immunology. Governor General’s Medal, University of Toronto Scholar. Author of 100+ peer-reviewed medical publications.

Featured image: NOT a Vaccine: the mRNA COVID vax is a chemical pathogen production device and a technocratic, transhumanistic tool to repgrogram you. Image credit: Jordan Henderson

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The Israel Defense Forces’ detonation of more than 300 mines planted at Israa University in Gaza on Wednesday provided the latest evidence that Israel’s objective in its bombardment of the enclave is not self-defense, rights advocates said.

“This is not self-defense,” said Chris Hazzard, an Irish member of the United Kingdom’s Parliament. “This is not counter-insurgency. This is ethnic-cleansing.”

The International Middle East Media Center (IMEMC) called the destruction of Israa University Israel’s latest attempt to carry out a “cultural genocide” along with the slaughter of at least 24,620 people in just over three months—people who Israeli officials have claimed are legitimate military targets despite the fact that roughly half of those killed have been children.

The wiping out of cultural landmarks was included in South Africa’s International Court of Justice case accusing Israel of genocidal acts in Gaza last week, with the complaint noting that “Israel has damaged and destroyed numerous centers of Palestinian learning and culture,” including libraries, one of the world’s oldest Christian monasteries, and the Great Omari Mosque, where an ancient collection of manuscripts was kept before the building was destroyed in an airstrike last month.

“The crime of targeting and destroying archaeological sites should spur the world and UNESCO into action to preserve this great civilizational and cultural heritage,” Gaza’s Ministry of Tourism and Antiquities said after the mosque was bombed.

Now, international relations professor Nicola Perugini of the University of Edinburgh said, “all the universities in Gaza have been damaged or destroyed.”

On its Facebook page, the university said the IDF had occupied the campus for about 70 days before planting 315 mines and detonating the institution’s main building, its museum, a university hospital, and other buildings.

The IDF occupied Israa University, said administrators, “and used it as a military base for its mechanisms and a center for [the] snatching of isolated civilians in the areas of Rashid, Maghraqa, and Zahraa streets, and temporarily detained [them] to investigate with citizens before moving them.”

Mitchell Plitnick, president of Rethinking Foreign Policy, said the fact that 315 mines were detonated meant that “by definition… it was not a legitimate military target.”

“Israel would have to have full control to plant so many mines,” said Plitnick. “This is a clear example of a war crime and destruction for the fun of it.”

Eight universities in Gaza have now been targeted since the IDF began its bombardment on October 7, according to the IMEMC.

Birzeit University, in the occupied West Bank, condemned the destruction of the school and accused Israel of stealing 3,000 rare artifacts from Israa’s museum.

“Birzeit University reaffirms the fact that this crime is part of the Israeli occupation’s onslaught against the Palestinians,” said the school on social media. “It’s all a part of the Israeli occupation’s goal to make Gaza uninhabitable; a continuation of the genocide being carried out in Gaza Strip.”

[From Common Dreams: Our work is licensed under Creative Commons (CC BY-NC-ND 3.0). Feel free to republish and share widely.]

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Julia Conley is a staff writer for Common Dreams.

Featured image: The Israeli military used hundreds of mines to blow up Israa University in Gaza on January 17, 2024. (Photo: Screengrab)

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

 

 

Imagine if Iran, Syria, Lebanon, or Turkey – fully backed, armed and diplomatically protected by Russia and China – had the will and the wherewithal to bomb Tel Aviv for three months, day and night, murder tens of thousands of Israelis, maim countless more and make millions homeless, and turn the city into a heap of uninhabitable rubble, like Gaza today.

Just imagine it for a few seconds: Iran and its allies deliberately targeting populated parts of Tel Aviv, hospitals, synagogues, schools, universities, libraries – or indeed any populated place – to ensure maximum civilian casualties. They would tell the world they were just looking for Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu and his war cabinet.  

Ask yourself what the US, UK, EU, Canada, Australia and Germany in particular would do within 24 hours of the onslaught of this fictional scenario. 

Now come back to reality, and consider the fact that since 7 October (and for decades before that date), Tel Aviv’s western allies have not only witnessed what Israel has done to the Palestinian people, but have also provided it with military equipment, bombs, munitions and diplomatic coverage, while American media outlets have offered ideological justifications for the slaughter and genocide of Palestinians.  

The aforementioned fictional scenario would not be tolerated for a day by the existing world order. With the military thuggery of the US, Europe, Australia and Canada fully behind Israel, we helpless people of the world, just like Palestinians, do not count. This is not just a political reality; it is also pertinent to the moral imaginary and philosophical universe of the thing that calls itself “the West”.  

Those of us outside the European sphere of moral imagination do not exist in their philosophical universe. Arabs, Iranians and Muslims; or people in Asia, Africa and Latin America – we do not have any ontological reality for European philosophers, except as a metaphysical menace that must be conquered and quieted. 

Beginning with Immanuel Kant and Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, and continuing with Emmanuel Levinas and Slavoj Zizek, we are oddities, things, knowable objects that Orientalists were tasked with deciphering. As such, the murder of tens of thousands of us by Israel, or the US and its European allies, does not cause the slightest pause in the minds of European philosophers.  

Tribal European Audiences

If you doubt that, just take a look at leading European philosopher Jurgen Habermas and a few of his colleagues, who in an astoundingly barefaced act of cruel vulgarity, have come out in support of Israel’s slaughter of Palestinians. The question is no longer what we might think of Habermas, now 94, as a human being. The question is what we might think of him as a social scientist, philosopher and critical thinker. Does what he thinks matter to the world anymore, if it ever did?  

The world has been asking similar questions about another major German philosopher, Martin Heidegger, in light of his pernicious affiliations with Nazism. In my opinion, we must now ask such questions about Habermas’s violent Zionism and the significant consequences for what we might think of his entire philosophical project?

If Habermas has not an iota of space in his moral imagination for people such as Palestinians, do we have any reason to consider his entire philosophical project as being in any way related to the rest of humanity – beyond his immediate tribal European audiences?  

In an open letter to Habermas, distinguished Iranian sociologist Asef Bayat said he “contradicts his own ideas” when it comes to the situation in Gaza. With all due respect, I beg to differ. I believe Habermas’s disregard for Palestinian lives is entirely consistent with his Zionism. It is perfectly consistent with the worldview in which non-Europeans are not completely human, or are “human animals”, as Israeli Defence Minister Yoav Gallant has openly declared.

This utter disregard for Palestinians is deeply rooted in the German and European philosophical imagination. The common wisdom is that out of the guilt of the Holocaust, Germans have developed a solid commitment to Israel. 

But to the rest of the world, as now evidenced by the magnificent document that South Africa has presented to the International Court of Justice, there is a perfect consistency between what Germany did during its Nazi era and what it is now doing during its Zionist era.

I believe that Habermas’s position is in line with the German state policy of partaking in the Zionist slaughter of Palestinians. It is also in line with what passes for the “German left”, with their equally racist, Islamophobic and xenophobic hatred of Arabs and Muslims, and their wholesale support for the genocidal actions of the Israeli settler colony.

We must be forgiven if we thought what Germany had today was not Holocaust guilt, but genocide nostalgia, as it has vicariously indulged in Israel’s slaughter of Palestinians over the past century (not just the past 100 days).  

Moral Depravity

The charge of Eurocentrism that is consistently levelled against European philosophers’ conception of the world is not based merely on an epistemic flaw in their thinking. It is a consistent sign of moral depravity. On multiple past occasions, I have pointed out the incurable racism at the heart of European philosophical thinking and its most celebrated representatives today.

This moral depravity is not just a political faux pas or an ideological blind spot. It is written deeply into their philosophical imaginations, which have remained incurably tribal.  

Here, we must recap the glorious Martinican poet Aime Cesaire’s famous statement

“Yes, it would be worthwhile to study clinically, in detail, the steps taken by Hitler and Hitlerism and to reveal to the very distinguished, very humanistic, very Christian bourgeois of the 20th century that without his being aware of it, he has a Hitler inside him, that Hitler inhabits him, that Hitler is his demon, that if he rails against him, he is being inconsistent and that, at bottom, what he cannot forgive Hitler for is not crime in itself, the crime against man, it is not the humiliation of man as such, it is the crime against the white man, the humiliation of the white man, and the fact that he applied to Europe colonialist procedures which until then had been reserved exclusively for [Arab, Indian and African peoples].” 

Palestine is today an extension of the colonial atrocities Cesaire cites in this passage. Habermas appears ignorant that his endorsement of the slaughter of Palestinians is completely consistent with what his ancestors did in Namibia during the Herero and Namaqua genocide. Like the proverbial ostrich, German philosophers have stuck their heads inside their European delusions, thinking the world does not see them for what they are.  

Ultimately, in my view, Habermas has not said or done anything surprising or contradictory; quite the contrary. He has been entirely consistent with the incurable tribalism of his philosophical pedigree, which had falsely assumed a universal posture. 

The world is now disabused of that false sense of universality. Philosophers such as VY Mudimbe in the Democratic Republic of the Congo, Walter Mignolo or Enrique Dussel in Argentina, or Kojin Karatani in Japan have far more legitimate claims to universality than Habermas and his ilk ever did.  

In my opinion, the moral bankruptcy of Habermas’s statement on Palestine marks a turning point in the colonial relationship between European philosophy and the rest of the world. The world has been awoken from the false slumber of European ethno-philosophy. Today, we owe this liberation to the global suffering of peoples such as the Palestinians, whose prolonged, historic heroism and sacrifices have finally dismantled the barefaced barbarity at the foundation of “western civilisation”.  

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Hamid Dabashi is Hagop Kevorkian Professor of Iranian Studies and Comparative Literature at Columbia University in the City of New York, where he teaches Comparative Literature, World Cinema, and Postcolonial Theory. His latest books include The Future of Two Illusions: Islam after the West (2022); The Last Muslim Intellectual: The Life and Legacy of Jalal Al-e Ahmad (2021); Reversing the Colonial Gaze: Persian Travelers Abroad (2020), and The Emperor is Naked: On the Inevitable Demise of the Nation-State (2020). His books and essays have been translated into many languages.

Featured image: Jurgen Habermas (Licensed under CC BY 2.0)

The “Rules-Based International Order”

January 19th, 2024 by Caitlin Johnstone

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the incineration of Gaza, and the bombing of Yemeni forces who are trying to stop it.

The “rules-based international order” allowed hundreds of thousands of people to be killed by western-backed Saudi atrocities in Yemen.

The “rules-based international order” allowed NATO powers to knowingly provoke a world-threatening proxy war in Ukraine.

The “rules-based international order” allowed western powers and their regional partners to plunge Syria into a horrific civil war by flooding the nation with heavily armed fascistic extremist factions.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the US to invade and occupy a vast stretch of Syrian territory in order to control the nation’s natural resources and prevent reconstruction.

The “rules-based international order” allowed Libya to be turned into a chaotic hellscape after western-backed forces killed Gaddafi following a long-desired western regime change operation disguised as “humanitarian intervention”.

The “rules-based international order” allowed the invasion of Iraq to destabilize an entire region resulting in millions of deaths following a campaign of deliberate lies and propaganda.

The “rules-based international order” allowed the invasion of Afghanistan and a decades-long occupation sustained by lies and corruption.

The “rules-based international order” allowed the imprisonment of Julian Assange for journalistic activities exposing US war crimes.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the planet to be circled by hundreds of US military bases, including in places where the people who live there vehemently oppose their presence like Okinawa, Iraq and Syria.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the US and its allies to kill huge numbers of civilians with siege warfare tactics in nations like Yemen, Iraq and Venezuela.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the US to interfere in scores of elections around the world at will and forcibly topple inconvenient governments whenever it wants to.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed China to be surrounded by a rapidly increasing amount of US military bases and war machinery in preparation for a future conflict of unimaginable horror.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the US to plunge the world into a new cold war with rapidly-escalating brinkmanship against nuclear-armed Russia and China.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed our civilization to be controlled by the most powerful propaganda system ever devised, creating a mind-controlled dystopia of brainwashed gear-turners who are deceived into believing they are free.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed unfathomable amounts of government malfeasance to be hidden behind an increasingly opaque wall of government secrecy.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the interests of ordinary human beings to be subordinated and subjected to the interests of billionaire corporations and sociopathic government agencies.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed the destruction of our ecosystem for the enrichment of powerful plutocrats.

The “rules-based international order” has allowed our planet to be dominated by an empire of extreme murderousness and depravity at the cost of nonstop bloodshed and ever-increasing tyranny.

If the “rules-based international order” has allowed all these things to happen, what kind of “rules” are we talking about exactly? And what kind of “order” do they sustain? 

If this is what the “rules-based international order” looks like, would we not, perhaps, be better off without it?

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Is It Time for Palestine to be Voted UN Member State?

January 19th, 2024 by Thalif Deen

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

The atrocities against Palestinians in a ruthlessly devastated Gaza — with over 21,000 mostly civilian deaths in retaliation to the killings of 1,200 inside Israel —have resurrected a longstanding question: is it time for Palestine to be recognized as a full-fledged UN member state?

The question has also been triggered by a statement by China, a veto-wielding permanent member of the UN Security Council (UNSC).

Addressing the UNSC on December 29, Geng Shuang, Ambassador and Deputy Permanent Representative of China, said:

“We support Palestine’s full membership in the UN, and the early resumption of direct negotiations between Palestine and Israel.”

According to the UN, States are admitted to UN membership by a decision of the 193-member General Assembly upon the recommendation of the 15-member Security Council.

The resolution needs a two-thirds majority (currently 128 votes) in the General Assembly– and no vetoes in the Security Council.

And with the crisis in Gaza– and worldwide sympathy towards the Palestinians– would this be the right time to stake that claim?

But any such move for Palestinian UN membership is most likely to be vetoed by the US which continues its undying loyalty to Israel.

The State of Palestine was accepted as “a non-member observer state” of the UN General Assembly in November 2012.

Mahmoud Abbas (centre right), President of the State of Palestine, addresses an event to commemorate the 75th Anniversary of the Nakba, held by the Committee on the Exercise of the Inalienable Rights of the Palestinian People on 15 May 2023.

Asked for his comments on a meeting with Palestinian leader [Mahmoud] Abbas in Beijing when the Chinese President Xi [Jinping] called for the Palestinians to become a full Member State of the United Nations, UN Spokesperson Stephane Dujarric told reporters last year:

“As you know, the decision on Palestine or any other entity moving from observer to Member State or just becoming a Member State is a decision that the Member States themselves can take. It does not involve the Secretary-General.”

Samir Sanbar, a former UN Assistant Secretary-General and head of the Department of Public Information, told IPS a two thirds majority by the General Assembly was voted recently to overcome a U.S. veto at the Security Council on Gaza.

“Perhaps that is why the US abstained on a following resolution– perhaps to avoid further isolation, particularly with increasing public support for the Palestinians within the United States, especially among the younger generation.”

He also pointed out the “diligent work by certain members of the Security Council, including the Arab Council representative of UAE, Ambassador Lana Zaki Nusseibeh.”

“It is indeed about time for full membership of Palestine at the United Nations since the General Assembly decades ago recognized the full “Inalienable Rights of the Palestinian People” and repeated assertions to apply General assembly and Security Council resolutions,” said Sanbar.

Ramzy Baroud, an author, a syndicated columnist, editor of Palestine Chronicle & a Senior Research Fellow at Center for Islam and Global Affairs (CIGA), told IPS admitting Palestine as a full member at the UN is significant in terms of strengthening Palestine’s political and legal positions in the ongoing attempt to hold Israel accountable for its genocide in Gaza, and military occupation and apartheid in general.

“It would also send a message to Israel that while it is actively discussing the ethnic cleansing of Palestinians to Congo and elsewhere, the international community sees Palestine as an entity that belongs to the Palestinian people.”

“History has taught us that Palestine commands the kind of support that would allow it to win the two-thirds majority at the General Assembly”, he pointed out.

“We also know that countries like China and Russia will fully back this effort at the Security Council. The challenge is the Americans and their vetoes,” he said.

The Biden Administration has, thus far, proven to be dedicated to the rightwing agenda of the Israeli government, even when Netanyahu’s agenda directly damages US economic and political interests, let alone reputation throughout the Middle East, in fact the world, said Baroud.

“The US is likely to do everything in its power to block the vote, and, as is often the case, attempt to bribe, and, when needed, threaten those who are likely to support a full Palestinian membership.”

“We have no reason to believe that Washington will not use the veto considering Israel’s complete rejection of the recognition of Palestine as a full UN member.” declared Baroud.

The last six members to join the UN include Federal Republic of Yugoslavia and Tuvalu (in 2000); Switzerland and Timor-Leste (2002); Montenegro (2006) and South Sudan (2011).

According to the UN, the procedure for membership is as follows:

  • The State submits an application to the Secretary-General and a letter formally stating that it accepts the obligations under the Charter.
  • The Security Council considers the application. Any recommendation for admission must receive the affirmative votes of 9 of the 15 members of the Council, provided that none of its five permanent members — China, France, the Russian Federation, the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland and the United States of America — have voted against the application.
  • If the Council recommends admission, the recommendation is presented to the General Assembly for consideration. A two-thirds majority vote is necessary in the Assembly for admission of a new State.
  • Membership becomes effective the date the resolution for admission is adopted.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image: A view of the General Assembly Hall as a draft resolution to grant Palestine non-Member Observer State status in the United Nations was introduced. The resolution on the status of Palestine was adopted by a vote of 138 in favour to nine against with 41 abstentions by the 193-member Assembly. 29 November 2012. Credit: UN Photo/Mark Garten

The West’s Lunatic Woke Agenda

January 19th, 2024 by Stephen Karganovic

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Introductory Note 

Important article by Stephen Karganovic.

What is the the unspoken agenda of Woke Lunacy? Does it emanate from the WEF?  See this

  • Derogate fundamental human rights by creating Woke conflicts;
  • Create stylized social divisions which ultimately undermine broader acts of solidarity and resistance against the hegemony of the “Big Money” financial establishment.
  • Woke Lunacy also serves to distract people from the ramped poverty and social inequality triggered by the corona crisis, not to mention  the devastating impacts of the Covid-19 vaccine on excess mortality. 

 

Michel Chossudovsky. Global Research, January 19, 2023

***

Not one of the items that follow will strike a typical resident of the “collective West,” aka the 14 percent of the world that styles itself as the “international community,” as inherently improbable or even odd in many instances. They have grown accustomed to it; it is part of their everyday landscape.

Here, for illustrative purposes, is a select but representative sample of policies and prescribed behaviours that in that bizarre but thankfully shrinking part of the world have come to constitute the new normal.

Five Selected Woke Policies

1. In order to maintain the fiction that in their attributes men and  women are physiologically indistinguishable, the Canadian government has mandated the installation of tampon dispensers in men’s bathrooms. The empirical fact that men have no use for tampons is trumped by ideology, which dictates categorically that they do because it is dogmatically prescribed that men do menstruate and are furthermore able to give birth to babies. People who believe themselves to be something they are not, and claim that their subjective self-perception overrides reality, are politically empowered to cancel empirical observation and the conclusions reached by scientists who perform accurate, verifiable research.

2. Also on the ideological reality chopping block is terminology that points to pre-woke, common sense notions about natural relations between human beings. “Mother” and “father, “expressions that allude to the manifestly different roles of parents in the process of conception and nurture of offspring, in the woke-controlled universe have been forcibly replaced by designations “parent no. 1” and “parent no. 2,” invented to hide those facts. Now the Methodist Church of Great Britain has gone a step farther, to label terms “husband” and “wife” offensive. Inspired by inclusivity, the technical rationale for this departure from normalcy is “to avoid making assumptions” that are not “the reality for many people.”

3. The avant-garde state of California has passed a law that takes effect this year, AB 1084, requiring large retail stores to include gender neutral toy sections or face fines and other punishments. The new law will place an additional undue burden on retailers and will have the foreseeable economic impact of raising the price of toys generally for normal families and their children. Incidentally, it is anybody’s guess what the definition of gender neutral toys is and whether there is a market for such items. But in a parallel universe governed by ideological delusions these are inconsequential details.

4. In Britain, the country where the novel 1984, which introduced the notion of thought crime, had been written, the first literal thought crime prosecutions have recently been instituted. Isabel Vaughan Spruce, Director of UK March for Life, so far has been cited by the police three times and taken to court for silently praying in front of abortion clinics. Readers should note that her arrests were triggered not by speech or conduct but for an “objectionable” activity that was purely mental. British authorities did not contest her right as a citizen (or royal subject, if you wish) to be in the public space where she was detained. Detention and prosecution were based entirely on their perception of what allegedly was going on in her mind, in the proximity of an abortion clinic, which the authorities considered might be provocative and perturbing to the consumers of the clinic’s services. Readers should be aware that in common law the concept of thought transgression does not exist and that so far the British Parliament has not given statutory expression to such an offence. Nevertheless, an actual person presumably endowed with human rights has been subjected to persecution for objectively unprovable thoughts in order to enforce a legally non-existent norm. But that is the new normal, the rules based order of woke jurisprudence now taking shape in the land that once prided itself on upholding the “rights of Englishmen,” no matter how eccentric. Even the KGB in the old days could not have made this up.

5. Returning to avant-garde California, award-winning Glendale fifth-grade teacher Ray Shelton was suspended for refusing to acquiesce to male students who “identify” as girls stripping naked in front of female students in the girls’ changing room. For opposing the transgender agenda in his school Shelton lost his job. It made no difference that female students and their parents fully supported him and also vehemently objected to these aggressive displays of opposite sex nudity. Glendale happens to be a heavily Armenian suburb of Los Angeles and its overwhelmingly normal residents are unacculturated to progressive Western values. They reacted with consternation to the state-orchestrated sexualisation of their children. Their protests, however, were to no avail. Shelton is now suing the state for damages. Good luck, in the judicial system of the deranged state of California.

These morsels of lunacy might be regarded as the tragicomical final stage in the collapse of a suicidal civilisation except for the fact that by means of highhanded political manipulation and arrogant agenda imposition even nations and cultures which still retain a residue of sanity are being cowed into submission and drawn into the abyss. Let Serbia serve as an instructive case study, foreshadowing the contours of the coming dystopia.

Serbia. Submission to the World Economic Forum

[The Prime Minister of Serbia Ana Brnabić was Member of Klaus Schwab‘s Young Leaders Forum in 1916-1917. She was appointed Prime Minister of Serbia in June 2017. G.R. Editor]

Ana Brnabić. Image Right

For a number of years already and to the utter disgust of its citizens the Serbian government has been signalling its submission to Western values by allowing the parade that the Russian government has had the good sense to prohibit. But that is the least of it. Under the radar, Serbia’s colonial administration recently reconfirmed its fealty to the foreign masters by passing a gender equality law with severely restrictive provisions, copy/pasted from analogous legislation already in effect in the aforementioned 14 percent and shrinking portion of the known world.

As of April of this year, on pain of heavy penalties, in all gender related matters Serbs will be required to mimic their collective West models. The educational system, including textbooks, and all public sector communication will be reorganised to reflect the newly mandated guidelines. The imposition of gender sensitive language, including pronouns, ranks high on this agenda. Serbian parents will be obliged to conform willingly to the whims of their soon to be brainwashed children, acquiesce to gender transition hormone treatments for their youngsters, and to strictly observe the pronoun regime that will be demanded of them. Resistance will result in steep fines and prison sentences and in their offspring being forcibly removed from parental custody to be placed in government-approved foster care.

How totally “modern” is Serbia’s legislation in this regard may be judged from the fact that in Scotland an almost identical law, providing for up to seven years in prison for recalcitrant parents who refuse to accept their children identifying as transgender, has been submitted but still remains in the legislative pipeline. Assuredly it will be passed in the near future, but colonial Serbia can now boast of having beaten Scotland to the punch.

The alert reader might ask what compels Serbia to pass laws that an overwhelming majority of its citizens, perhaps exceeding in number even those who support Russia’s Special Military Operation, find utterly abhorrent. Serbia is not a member of the European Union nor is it obligated by any treaty to embrace such culturally alien norms.

In Serbia, there does not seem to be anybody capable of providing a coherent answer to this very pertinent question, though it may reasonably be inferred that the subservient position of the political elite vis-à-vis their foreign curators probably has something to do with it. But as Serbian academic and spokesman for Serbia’s Family Defence Coalition, Dr. Miša Djurković, has discovered, in his country it is inadvisable even to pose such questions. He and his colleagues, also distinguished academics and public intellectuals, have been targeted with malicious harassmentlawsuits for “discrimination” (readers from Western countries know exactly how that works) to the point where their patience and financial resources are now exhausted.

As a result, Dr. Djurković has sadly decided to terminate his pro-family activities. He recently published a tongue-in-cheek “apology” to his woke detractors, the powerful foreign supported and abundantly financed lobby that is wreaking havoc on his country’s morals and culture whilst subverting the remnants of its degraded legal system. (Readers with a command of the Serbian language may peruse his downhearted missive here.) Needless to say, the very subtlety of the genre Dr. Djurković has chosen to announce his “capitulation” ensures that his point will be entirely lost on the woke ruffians to whose terror, one hopes only temporarily, he appears to have succumbed.  

The nefarious agenda that Dr. Djurković had attempted valiantly to  oppose in his home country may well triumph, in Serbia and elsewhere,  if Bertrand Russell’s nightmarish post-human vision ever comes true, and the collective West’s luciferian engineers of human souls manage to massively implant in the human consciousness “the unshakable conviction that snow is black.”

That is the goal that Russell quite frankly proposed they pursue. But those were not Lord Russell’s private musings. It was the authoritative articulation of the ideology which animates the perpetrators of what Archbishop Vigano has called the “global coup d’état, the all-out war against humanity not motivated only by a lust for wealth and power but mainly by a religious motive …” Russell was in his time a leading intellectual oracle of those very perpetrators.

Their pseudo-religious motive, Vigano explains, is “Satan’s hatred: hatred of God, hatred of God’s creation and hatred of man who is created in the image and likeness of God.” The Archbishop is spot on.

Compulsory denial of the evidence of one’s senses and obligatory surrender to repugnant nonsense constitutes the initial step in that direction. That most certainly is not a scheme for the betterment of society. It is a blueprint for the crushing of the human spirit, leading ultimately to its total subjugation.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Stephen Karganovic is president of “Srebrenica Historical Project,” an NGO registered in the Netherlands to investigate the factual matrix and background of events that took place in Srebrenica in July of 1995. He is a regular contributor to Global Research.  


Rethinking Srebrenica eBook : Karganovic, Stephen, Simic, Ljubisa:  Amazon.co.uk: BooksRethinking Srebrenica

By Stephen Karganovic

Rethinking Srebrenica examines the forensic evidence of the alleged Srebrenica “massacre” possessed by the International Criminal Tribunal for the former Yugoslavia (ICTY) in The Hague. Even though the ICTY created more than 3,500 autopsy reports, many of these autopsy reports were based on bone fragments, which do not represent complete bodies. An examination of the matching femur bones found reveals that there were only about 1,900 complete bodies that were exhumed. Of these, some 1,500 autopsy reports indicated a cause of death consistent with battlefield casualties. Only about 400 autopsy reports indicated execution as a cause of death, as revealed by ligatures and blindfolds. This forensic evidence does not warrant the conclusion of a genocide having taken place.

Karganovic examines the events that took place in Srebrenica in July 1995 in a wholistic manner instead of restricting it to a three-day event. The ten chapters cover:

1) Srebrenica: A Critical Overview;

2) Demilitarization of the UN Safe Zone of Srebrenica;

3) Genocide or Blowback?;

4) General Presentation and Interpretation of Srebrenica Forensic Data (Pattern of Injury Breakdown);

5) An Analysis of the Srebrenica Forensic Reports Prepared by the ICTY Prosecution Experts;

6) An Analysis of Muslim Column Losses Attributable to Minefields, Combat Activity, and Other Causes;

7) The Genocide Issue: Was there a Demonstrable Intent to Exterminate All Muslims?;

8) ICTY Radio Intercept Evidence;

9) The Balance Sheet; and

10) Srebrenica: Uses of the Narrative.

  • ASIN:‎ B0992RRJRK
  • Publisher: ‎Unwritten History, Inc.; 2 edition (July 8 2021)
  • Language: ‎English

Click here to purchase.

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

“Following a weekend referendum on December 3, 2023, Venezuela has given directives from state-owned enterprises to begin exploiting the mineral and oil-rich region of Essequibo.” — Excerpt from the Jamaica Gleaner, December 8, 2023

Venezuela’s directives signify an unlawful action with respect to the regulations and principles under public international law. According to the Article 2(4) of the United Nations Charter, states are prohibited to use force against another state in their relations and under Article 8 of the UN Montevideo Convention on the Rights and Duties of States, no state shall intervene in the internal and external affairs of another state which also could be expanded to attempts to annex territory.

Furthermore, the International Court of Justice (ICJ) has ruled in its provisional statement that neither Venezuela nor Guyana should make decisions or enact actions that would aggravate the dispute settlement process over the Essequibo region. Through a critical, public international law perspective, one could argue that the Venezuela-Guyana border dispute reinforces the limitations of public international law whereby there are weak enforcement mechanisms to ensure that rules, regulations and principles are adhered to among states.

International relations and law expert, Professor Stephen McGlinchey (2022; December 2023) postulates that there is no sovereign international body or institution to impose punishment on states in the way individuals would be prosecuted for a crime within domestic courts using domestic jurisdictions.

Other public international law and relations scholars such as Kevin Bloor (2022) have noted that the International Court of Justice (ICJ) is weak its procedural, independent and authority capacity and consequently, member states can avoid their legal obligations regardless of the judgement.

Both McGlinchey’s and Bloor’s legal assertions are quite applicable to the Venezuela-Guyana dispute because it shows how the actions and pronouncements of states aggravate the dispute settlement process in defence of their national self-interests. Additionally, effective enforcement of the court’s ruling is highly dependent on the consent of the states to accept the court’s jurisdiction that in fact, a violation of public international law has occurred.

Another angle, one could utilize to examine the recent Venezuela-Guyana border dispute is through the lens of third world approaches to international law (TWAIL). Third World Approaches to International Law (TWAIL) argues that public international law has its roots in colonial origins and this, hierarchal structures with respect to sovereignty and there is continual renewal of imperialist domination (Serpi, 2023).

One of the reasons for the escalation is the fact that it dates back to as far as 1899 Paris Arbitration Award when both countries (Guyana and Venezuela) were still under colonial rule.

The case also highlights the pivotal role of overseas, transnational corporations and industrialized countries such as the United States of America.

Venezuela’s mineral dependency or resource curse dilemma is worsened by the fact that the US has imposed economic sanctions on its petroleum oil industry which has had significant impact on the country’s social and economic development. This is seen in growing social unrests, political instability, food insecurity, poverty, mass suffering and decadent state-run institutions which explains why Venezuela is so adamant in exploring mineral and oil-rich industries in Essequibo. For Guyana, the petroleum exploration and refinery company, Exon Mobbil has amassed profits of US$17.9 billion while poverty and inequality among low income and disenfranchised Guyanese have increased.

USA also plays a major role in covering the legal fees of Guyana in defence of its case at the International Court of Justice (ICJ) hearing. These underlying social and economic issues perpetuates existing asymmetries between the Global North and Global South where powerful states and corporations deploy international institutions to shape rules according to their interests and agendas.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Tina Renier is an independent researcher based in Jamaica. She is a regular contributor to Global Research. Her areas of research interests are international development, with special emphasis on labour and development, education and development and women, gender and development.

Sources

Bloor, K. (2022). Understanding Global Politics. Bristol, England: E-International Relations Publishing.

McGlinchey, S. (2022; 8 December 2023). Human Rights and Sovereignty . Bristol, England: E-International Relations Publishing

Serpi, L.A. (15 December 2023). Nuclear Non-Proliferation and the Imperialist Dynamics in International Law. Bristol, England: E-International Relations Publishing.

Featured image source

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name.

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

*** 

First published by Global Research on May 23, 2023

***

 

 

“The United States government is the greatest purveyor of violence in the world today.” — Reverend Martin Luther King, Speech, April 5, 1967, Riverside Church, New York City 

“We are not on the wrong side, we ARE the wrong side.” — Daniel Ellsberg

In a phenomenally well documented study of the fraudulent accusations of atrocities leveled against countries targeted for military intervention by US NATO, fraudulent accusations then used as  “justifications” or rationalizations for “humanitarian military intervention” which devastates the targeted country, ravaging the “infrastructure necessary for sustaining human life” and plundering that country’s opulent  resources, A.B. Abrams describes savage US-Nato military interventions that trivialize the scourges of Attilla the Hun. 

The methods and patterns of these savage interventions are almost identical, indeed virtually predictable:  the country targeted for slaughter is always a state independent of Western (US-Nato) control:  first the targeted country is fraudulently accused of atrocities which occur only in the pornographic imaginations of the US-Nato accuser, and are subsequently (post-slaughter) revealed to be blatant fabrications, at which time these fabricated atrocities have served their purpose of inciting gullible public support for military intervention to end these non-existent atrocities.  Abram’s book is breathtaking in its scope, its accurate command of detail,  and horrifying in his description of the consequences of these fabricated atrocities.   

It is not possible to do justice to the great range of his work, which describes the shameful and horrific duplicity of the US-NATO scourge.  One lesser known attempt at atrocity fabrication against Cuba was “Operation Northwoods,” described by journalist James Bamford: 

“plans to engineer attacks on the US which could be falsely blamed on Cuba as a pretext for an invasion ‘had the support of every single member of the Joint Chiefs of Staff, and even senior Pentagon official Paul Nitze argued in favour of provoking a phony war with Cuba.  The fact that the most senior members of all the services and the Pentagon could be so out of touch with reality and the meaning of democracy would be hidden for four decades.” 

Operation Northwoods

“CALLED FOR NOTHING LESS THAN THE LAUNCH OF A SECRET CAMPAIGN OF TERRORISM WITHIN THE United States in order to blame Castro and provoke a war with Cuba…in the name of anticommunism, they proposed launching a secret and bloody war of terrorism against their own country in order to trick the American public into supporting an ill-conceived war they intended to launch against Cuba.”

Further, in addition to multiple attempts to assassinate Cuban President Fidel Castro,

“sea and air commando raids launched from the U.S. mainland, most often by exiles of Cuban origin and frequently with CIA supervisors, targeted oil refineries, chemical plants, bridges, crops, mills, warehouses, fishing boats, and merchant ships…the next stage of escalation involved biological warfare…In 1971 the CIA gave Cuban exiles a virus which caused African swine fever for deployment against the country.  Six weeks later the disease broke out in Cuba and forced the country to slaughter 500,000 pigs to prevent a nationwide epidemic.”

As Abrams describes it, with his impeccable documentation, it is almost impossible to find another example of savagery comparable to the barbarism of the US military ravaging Vietnam, atrocities preceded and “explained” as revenge for the fabricated “Gulf of Tonkin incident” which gained the support of the gullible and skillfully manipulated US Congress.  Quoting James Bamford in Foreign Policy, Abrams continues: 

“In light of the Operation Northwoods documents, it is clear that deceiving the public and trumping up wars for Americans to fight and die in was standard, approved policy at the highest levels of the Pentagon. 

In fact, the Gulf of Tonkin seems right out of the Operation Northwoods playbook: 

“We could blow up a US ship in Guantanamo Bay and blame Cuba…casualty lists in US newspapers would cause a helpful wave of indignation.  One need only replace Guantanamo Bay with Tonkin Gulf, and Cuba with North Vietnam.” 

Abrams quotes Rodney Carlisle’s “Encyclopaedia of Intelligence and Counterintelligence”: 

‘In addition to formal propaganda, disinformation was informally promulgated to journalists and the public as well.  The 1964 Gulf of Tonkin incident is perhaps the prime example.  At the time, most journalists and the public accepted at face value the claims of President Lyndon Johnson…Yet the highly secret Plan 34A, involving covert attacks jointly managed by the CIA and US navy against North Vietnam was not revealed.  Nor was the fact that a US naval patrol had been sent to gather electronic intelligence in the Gulf of Tonkin.” 

Abrams quotes Robert Lehrman, former White House chief speechwriter: 

‘Was any of LBJ’s speech that night true?  That is exactly what he sought with a resolution written six months earlier, waiting for an event to justify it. ‘On the open seas,’ with its implication that the attack was unprovoked?  The Maddox, cruising off the Vietnamese coast, was part of a covert and illegal intelligence-gathering mission, designed to provoke exactly the response it got.  Two days of attacks? Even Johnson didn’t believe the second one occurred.  Aggression?  The Maddox fired first.  More important, the North Vietnamese were off their own coast.  They were home.  US sailors were about 8,000 miles from home. If anything, the aggressors were us.  Moreover, LBJ didn’t limit himself to deceiving the public.  He deceived the Senate.” 

Using the fabricated atrocity of the Gulf of Tonkin incident as an excuse for escalation, Robert Lehrman noted: the consequences: 

“Three million deaths in a total Vietnamese population of 30 million!  That’s a Malaysian Airlines Flight 17 shot down each day, seven days a week, for 30 years;  that’s not counting the 500,000 to a million victims of Agent Orange.  Aside from mines, of the 15 million tons of explosive ordinance dropped on Vietnam from the air, the Pentagon estimated that around 10 percent did not explode….Beyond explosives, the war effort premised on a response to the Gulf of Tonkin incident saw toxic chemicals widely sprayed across Vietnamese farmland and forests.  Former US Army medic Mike Hastic commented:  ‘The spraying of 70 million litres of the chemical defoliant Agent Orange on the Vietnamese people by the US Government is one of the worst war crimes ever committed in modern warfare.  It is the war crime that is born again with every new generation.  Children die from cancer, they are born without arms and legs, they are born with twisted bodies, mental illness, or no eyes, to name a few birth defects.  Their parents and society have an enormous burden to try to make their lives as meaningful as possible. “ 

Cancer, diabetes, brain cell degeneration, muscular dystrophy and mental problems among the Vietnamese population were all consequences of the lasting legacy of American chemical attacks….Rape was considered a standard practice for US personnel, many of whom recalled  being told by instructors:  ‘we could rape the women, spread them open and drive pointed sticks or bayonets into their vaginas…One veteran described such an incident as follows:  ‘After we raped her, took her cherry from her, after we shot her in the head…we literally start stomping her body.  And everybody was laughing about it.  It’s like seeing the lions around a just-killed zebra. 

The whole pride comes around and they start feasting on the body.  Another example was recalled by former GI John Ketwig who stated that when three young Vietnamese women were captured, ‘everybody circled around and they tortured these women with lit cigarettes…the one girl, they held her down and put the hose from the fire truck between her legs and turned on the water and exploded her.  And the explosion of body fluids splashed across our faces.’  He described it as:  hate against the Vietnamese, the ‘gooks.’”  

“Regarding life in the Amerrican client state, created by Washington using humanitarian pretexts, …A WHO study described South Vietnam as a land of widespread malaria, bubonic plague, leprosy, tuberculosis, venereal disease and 300,000 prostitutes..one of the few places on earth where Leprosy was spreading and bubonic plague was still taking lives.  This was the “Capitalist Paradise” that Washington brought to South Vietnam.”

Subsequent chapters of the book describe the scourge of horrors perpetrated by US-NATO following the collapse of the Soviet Union, when the “West,”  swaggering and drunken with what it considered its victory over the Soviet Union, which collapsed in December, 1991, swept, like Attilla the Hun, through Iraq and Libya, after bullying the United Nations into passing War Resolutions 678, 687 and 688 authorizing their virtual extermination of Iraq, buying and extorting votes in support of these resolutions during the first “Persian Gulf War,” virtually exterminating the Iraqi people, culture and ancient civilization, with the fabricated and subsequently proved fraudulent allegation that Iraqi soldiers were tearing babies out of incubators, and hurling  them on the floor to die.  The carnage wrought by the US, UK and France almost defies belief,  with the UK, according to the NY Times, in 1991, dropping one bomb per second on Iraq for a period of several weeks.  (As former U.S. Attorney General Ramsay Clark stated:  “The U.N. which was created to prevent the scourge of war has become an instrument of war.”)

Abrams’ chapter on the Yugoslav Wars is also almost unspeakably horrifying in its catalogue of US-NATO duplicity in fabricating atrocities they knowingly and fraudulently attributed to Yugoslavia, and then proceeding to perpetrate their own atrocities on their victims in Yugoslavia. 

“A confidential report by NATO’s North Atlantic Council stated that the KLA was ‘the main initiator of violence” in Kosovo and ‘launched what appears to be a deliberate campaign of provocation’ which led to the outbreak of hostilities with Yugoslav government forces. These hostilities in turn paved the way for NATO military intervention.” 

The KLA was deeply involved in organ trafficking, as Carla Del Ponti and Dick Marti reported to the Council of Europe, with Kosovo’s Prime Minister Hashim Thaci chief perpetrator, but that was ignored by NATO.  Abrams quotes the renowned journalist John Pilger referring to civilians being

“blown up in crowded passenger trains and buses, in factories, television stations,  libraries, old people’s homes, schools and 18 hospitals, many cut to pieces by the UK’s thousands of ‘unaccounted for’ cluster bombs which fragment into shrapnel.’ The extent of the slaughter perpetrated by the Western powers on the basis of fabricated atrocities widely and uncritically reported in Western press, he said, ‘requires an apology from the propagandists; because, as NATO’s planners never tired of saying at their post-bombing seminars, without journalists ‘on board,’ they could never have pulled it off.” 

This violence was perpetrated without UN Security Council Authorization.

Abrams documents the enormity of the damage to Yugoslavia’s economy, the destruction of a people, and the virtual extermination of a nation, which, as admitted by the savage perpetrators, could never have been accomplished without the media propagandists who flooded their public incessantly with details of atrocities fabricated and attributed to the country, in this case, Yugoslavia, targeted for slaughter because it was independent of Western – US-NATO control. 

Although Abrams does not state this explicitly, it is obvious that if the Soviet Union had not itself been dismembered, the destruction of Yugoslavia could not have taken place.  But the Western Press bears enormous responsibility and guilt for the carnage which resulted from their duplicitous fabrications of atrocities, without which the resultant devastation of an entire people could not have taken place.  The complicitous press was very highly paid for their spearheading of this barbarity, earning them the title as “presstitutes, as Paul Craig Roberts, accurately describes them.

The use of depleted uranium weapons was an unparalleled war crime in the “78 day bombing campaign against Yugoslavia which began on March 24, 1999

“….Lacking authorization from the United Nations or from the Yugoslav government for these attacks, or any argument that it was acting in self-defense, the Western assault was a crime of aggression against a sovereign state -considered the supreme international crime.  The Western alliance had launched limited strikes on Yugoslavia previously, but the new air assault was far larger in scale and was far more focused on non-military targets.  20,000 tons of bombs were dropped in 40,000 sorties, with the munitions used being approximately equivalent to the payload of one of the nuclear warheads dropped on Hiroshima or Nagasaki.  Yugoslavia was one of four countries the US had attacked from the air in the span of just a few months, with Sudan, Afghanistan and Iraq also being targeted at the time.”

Next in Abrams’ catalogue of fabricated atrocities and their consequences, is one of the most crucial events in this Western scourge of rape of peoples independent of Western capitalist control:  Libya, and the connivance of passage of Resolution 1973 by the UN Security Council.  

The Socialist People’s Libyan Arab Jamahiriya was one of the most progressive countries in Africa, spearheading a sovereign pan-African development movement independent of Western capitalist control.  Libya was extremely powerful and influential, one of the leading military powers in Africa and the Arab world.  But like the biblical Samson, destroyed by his vulnerability, according to Abrams, “Fearing an Iraq-style Western assault in the 2000s, after the USSR’s disintegration had allowed the West to impose harsh sanctions and arms embargoes through the United Nations, Libya agreed to unilaterally disarm and accept intrusive Western inspections of its military facilities in exchange for Western security guarantees and sanctions relief.  This fatal mistake is now the example for and reason why the DPRK will not and cannot divest itself of its nuclear weapons.  The destruction of Libya was so shattering of the nation and its people, that its renunciation of its weapons programs in compliance with Western demands and threats proved a  disastrous mistake, from which a terrifying lesson has been learned.

“In mid-February 2011 the sudden outbreak of concerted attacks on Libyan armouries and security forces by unknown militants saw Libyan forces respond with water cannon and rubber bullets, but refrain from using lethal force…. Throughout the conflict questions were repeatedly raised regarding who Libya’s insurgents were, how they had coordinated and trained for simultaneous attacks across the country, and why they had initiated a military campaign which it was clear from the outset could only succeed if Western militaries were to intervene in support. Some indications could be found in neighbouring Syria, which alongside Libya had long been one of the two staunchest opponents of Western hegemony in the Arab world, and which was targeted simultaneously by a very similar form of attack, and by  many of the same foreign actors.  Both insurgencies saw very swift calls in the West for military intervention against the targeted governments, and gained considerable support not only from Western media outlets, but also from major tech giants such as Google.  French Foreign Minister Ronald Dumas noted that Britain had been training insurgents since at least 2009 to ‘invade’ Syria, with multiple other reliable sources confirming that the insurgency had arms, training and support from Western powers and their partners including the deployment of Western and allied special forces alongside them.  In Libya the confirmed presence of Western special forces on the ground within days of the insurgency’s outbreak indicated that it had been long in the planning much as was the case in Syria.  Mummar Gaddafi, for his part, referred to the insurgents as ‘the traitors who are working for the United States and Britain, the colonialists.’”   As reported in the National Interest in 2014, “A decisive factor in the campaign against Gaddafi was a large influx of mujahideen, many affiliated with Al Qaeda…from Eastern Libya, just as the easterners had made a decisive contribution in the 1980s against the Russians in Afghanistan.’” 

Any description of the annihilation of Libya, which had been a highly developed nation and leader of Pan-African independence during the governance of Khaddafi, would be a repetition of the genocidal horrors which resulted from US-NATO military interventions In Iraq, Korea, Vietnam, Yugoslavia, etc., etc.  One unique feature of this annihilation of the Libyan nation and people, whose “infrastructure necessary to support human life” had been demolished by the US-NATO intervention, with United Nations Security Council Authorization, Resolution 1973, “was perhaps the most serious case of genocide and ethnic cleansing of the 21 century. 

It was perpetrated against black Africans who the Jamahiriya era government had protected but who jihadist insurgents targeted for mass slaughter and extermination, with the genocidal conduct of the militants the West had brought to power bearing a very sharp contrast to the Jamahiriya’s Pan-Africanism. …the massacre of Libya’s black population was fueled by outright atrocity fabrication—the primary culprit being Qatar’s Al Jazeera news network….Irish journalist Mary Fitzgerald reported public hangings of black men in insurgent-held areas. 

The Guardian described ‘pogroms’ against blacks reminiscent of Nazi Germany…..Video footage of blacks being tortured by insurgents, including being kept in animal cages…..provided a small indication of the kind of atrocities being perpetrated across the country by the militants the West had empowered…the new Libya quickly saw the emergence of regular slave markets as blacks were kept in chains or cages, sold for free labour, and often given hot iron cattle brands on their faces to identify them…black men and women were reportedly raped by the insurgence.

Perhaps the ultimate symbol of the horror to which Libya was subjected by the US-NATO intervention, was the unspeakably sadistic torture- murder of Kadaffi, a sadism committed by those “gentle protesters” that US-NATO invaded Libya to “protect.”  The horror revealed on Kadaffi’s face, captured in a photo on the front page of the New York Post makes no mention of the fact that in addition to the barbaric cruelty of his “gentle” murderers, they raped him with a bayonet and broken glass forced up his rectum, an unspeakable degradation of a human being, and a symbol of the Western values of “democratic humanism.”  This particular grotesque cruelty was not reported in the American Press, but Europeans were aghast when reports of this particular atrocity surfaced.  As one European stated:  “We were aghast because it was so unnecessary!” 

Abrams next writes of the Syrian war, and of the prevarication of the OPCW, fabricating  a chemical weapons attack in the Douma affair, and the 2013 allegations of a sarin attack in Ghouta, allegations disputed by esteemed journalist Sy Hersh whose impeccable sources absolved Damascus of responsibility for the attack, and indicated that Obama was burying evidence that Al Nusra was the perpetrator.  Western plans to force through a United Nations Security Council Resolution authorizing US-NATO military intervention in Syria were vetoed, three times by Russia and China.

On December 22, 2016 the Syrian Government recovered control over Aleppo, and though Abrams makes no mention of this, which may or may not be coincidental, on December 25, 2016 the airplane carrying the great Russian Alexandrov Choir, en route to  entertain the Russian troops in Syria, suddenly crashed into the ocean, killing all 90 passengers.  Just prior to this, on December 19, 2016,, the Russian Ambassador to Turkey was murdered, in broad daylight in an art gallery in Turkey, with a front page photograph of the assassination in The New York Times, quoting the assassin shouting:  “Don’t forget Aleppo, Don’t forget Syria” and soon thereafter the Russian Consul to Greece  suddenly suffered a fatal heart attack on January 9, 2017. 

The Russian Ambassador to India then died of a sudden heart attack on January 27, and on February 20, 2017 the famous Russian Ambassador to the UN, Vitali Churkin died suddenly of suspected heart failure. On August 24, 2017 Russia’s ambassador to Sudan, Mirgayas Shirinsky was found dead – of a heart attack in his swimming pool at his home.  Although Abrams does not connect these 7 sudden deaths of Russian diplomats to the Syrian victory at Aleppo, following Damascus’ invitation for Russian assistance, these seven sudden deaths may be related to this. 

Abrams’ earlier work on North Korea, the “Immovable Object” is a virtually inexhaustible source of reliable information about the DPRK,;  in this new anthology he includes analysis of the chemical assassination of Kim Jong Nam in Malaysia, which was immediately attributed to Pyongyang, which immediately denied responsibility.  He states:  “While the lack of evidence implicating North Korea as the perpetrator did not rule out the possibility of its responsibility, it highlighted the extent to which its adversaries could shape narratives and manipulate global opinion based on totally unproven accusations. –   He also examines the multiple anti-DPRK theories surrounding the death of Otto Warmbier, citing medical experts in the US stating that there was absolutely no evidence on Warmbier’s body of mistreatment.  

Finally, Abrams concludes with Xinjiang and the Sino-U.S. Conflict to which I will briefly refer, as Syrian Ambassador Bashir Ja’afari informed me personally that Saudi Arabia yearly paid for all expenses of Chinese Uighurs, whom they brought to the pilgrimage at Mecca, where the Uighurs were hosted a month after all other pilgrims had departed, and these Uighurs were then trained in jihad and Islamic extremism, after which they were returned to China for the purpose of fomenting terrorism and separatist movements to disintegrate China.   As the West attempts to provoke Taiwan into further disintegration of China, with visits by such US luminaries as Nancy Pelosi, etc., the attempted dismemberment of China continues, as does the attempted dismemberment of Russia.  One can only hope that Abrams will address that deadly agenda. 

Abrams book, “Atrocity Fabrication and its Consequences” is a masterpiece, deciphering modern history, and identifying the facts underlying the theatrical obfuscation by Western media.  It should be absolutely required reading in all schools and universities in the West, and elsewhere, but it is perhaps too truthful to be tolerated by the Deep State and Establishment, as Galileo’s heresy was intolerable to the Vatican during the Inquisition. 

It must be read by everyone who seeks the truth in order to restore sanity and genuine humanity to this tormented world, on the verge of incineration, as Daniel Ellsberg and Scott Ritter (and innumerable other experts)  fear that the nuclear clock approaches midnight and the extermination of life on earth. 

Those in the West reading Abrams work must be overcome by shame and disgust that our Western pretensions to civilizations are criminally false, and our respect for human life is nonexistent.  This is capitalism, with its contempt for human life. 

The description of US soldiers forcing a hose into the vagina of a  defenseless Vietnamese girl, then turning on its water full force, exploding her body while the soldiers witnessing the atrocity laugh, and the example of Khadaffi’s expression aghast with horror as a bayonet is forced into his rectum:  the reader must ask:  “What are we?  Animals are not savage for amusement.  The reader must himself burst with shame and rage.  But this book must be read nevertheless.  It is agonizing to read:  and it reveals the agony of the victims of “Atrocity Fabrication.”  But this book must nevertheless be read by everyone, if we are ever to become civilized – indeed, human.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Carla Stea is a Research Associate of the Centre for Research on Globalization (CRG) and Global Research’s Correspondent at UN headquarters, New York. 

  • Posted in English
  • Comments Off on “Atrocity Fabrication and Its Consequences,” by A. B. Abrams

All Global Research articles can be read in 51 languages by activating the Translate Website button below the author’s name (only available in desktop version).

To receive Global Research’s Daily Newsletter (selected articles), click here.

Click the share button above to email/forward this article to your friends and colleagues. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

New Year Donation Drive: Global Research Is Committed to the “Unspoken Truth”

***

Iraqi security sources are warning of an ISIS revival in the country, which coincides all too neatly with the spike in Iraqi resistance operations against US bases in Iraq and Syria, and with widening regional instability caused by Israel’s military assault on Gaza. 

More than six years after declaring victory over the terrorist organization, Iraqi intelligence reports now indicate that thousands of ISIS fighters are emerging unscathed, under the protection of US forces in two regions of western Iraq.

The Missing Piece of the Puzzle

According to intelligence reports reviewed by The Cradle, at its height, ISIS consisted of more than 35,000 fighters in Iraq – 25,000 of these were killed, while more than 10,000 simply “disappeared.

As an officer of one Iraqi intelligence agency recounts to The Cradle: 

“Hundreds of ISIS fighters fled to Turkey and Syria at the end of 2017. After the appointment of Abdullah Qardash as the leader of ISIS in 2019, following the death of Caliph Abu Bakr al-Baghdadi, the new Caliph began to restructure the organization, and ordered his followers to return to Iraq. The organization exploited the long border with Syria, the security disturbances, and the diversity of forces on both sides of the border to infiltrate the Iraqi territory again.”

Imprisoned ISIS officials admit that infiltrating that border is not an easy task, because of the strict control imposed by the Iraqi Border Guards and the use of modern technologies, such as thermal cameras. 

It therefore became necessary for the terror group to identify intermediaries capable of breaking through or bypassing these fortifications to transport its fighters across borders

An Iraqi security source, insisting on anonymity, tells The Cradle that the US plays a vital role in enabling these border violations:

“[There are] several incidents that confirm the American assistance in securing the crossing route for ISIS members – mainly, by shelling Iraqi units on the border, especially the Popular Mobilization Units (PMUs), to create gaps that allow ISIS fighters to cross the border.” 

The Iraqi security source adds that there are confirmed reports of US Chinook helicopters transporting fighters from eastern Syria to the Anbar desert in western Iraq and Jebel Hamreen, in the country’s east.

Munir Adib, a researcher specializing in Islamist movements, extremist organizations, and international terrorism, confirms the possibility of the return of ISIS after the organization’s “dozens of attacks in Syria and Iraq in the past few weeks,” which led to the death of tens of civilians and soldiers. 

According to Adib, “the international community’s preoccupation with the Gaza and Russia-Ukraine wars gave ISIS an opportunity to reorganize its ranks, while continuing to receive internal and external logistical support.”

Manufacturing and Harboring Terrorism

Houran Valley is the largest of its kind in Iraq, extending 369 kilometers from the Iraqi-Saudi border to the Euphrates River near the city of Haditha in Anbar Governorate. Its topography is marked by soaring cliffs ranging in height between 150 to 200 meters, and includes the hills surrounding the valley and the sub-valleys that extend into its surroundings.

The valley was and still is one of the most dangerous security environments in the state. Terrorist groups use it as a safe haven because of its desert terrain, and distance from congested urban areas. The valley and its environs have witnessed numerous security incidents, most notably in December 2013, when ISIS killed the commander of the Iraqi army’s Seventh Division, his assistant, the director of intelligence in Anbar Governorate, eight officers, and thirteen soldiers.

Iraqi MP Hassan Salem has called for launching a military operation to clear Houran Valley of terrorist fighters. He confirmed to The Cradle that “there are thousands of ISIS members in the valley receiving training in private camps, under American protection,” noting that US forces have “transferred to this area hundreds of ISIS members of different nationalities.”

US foreign policy, of course, is rife with historical evidence of the creation of proxy armed militias in West Asia and Latin America, often utilizing these organizations to overthrow governments in target countries. We know Washington has no aversion to allying with Islamist extremists largely because of its direct involvement with arming and financing the Afghan Mujahideen, from which the Taliban and Al Qaeda emerged.

An early US-ISIS connection exists quite clearly: the terrorist group’s founding and second rank leaders were among the inmates of Camp Bucca prison in southern Iraq, an internment facility run by the US military. The roster of high-value terrorists captured, then set free by the Americans is quite extraordinary: ISIS leader Abu Bakr al-Baghdadi, his successor Abu Ibrahim al-Hashimi al-Qurashi, Abu Mohammed al-Adnani, Abu Muslim al-Turkmani, Haji Bakr, Abu Abdulrahman al-Bilawi, Abu Ayman al-Iraqi, among others.

Camp Bucca, known for abuses against its detainees, brought together extremist elements, slow-boiled this combustive formula for six years (2003-2009), then let the now well-networked extremists go free.

The religious officials of ISIS even say they used their time at the prison to obtain vows from prisoners to join the terrorist group after their release.

US intelligence also protected the terrorist organization indirectly, by allowing ISIS convoys to move between the cities that were under its control. Other forms of protection, according to Iraqi security experts, include refusing to implement death sentences issued by Iraqi courts against detained ISIS members, and establishing safe havens for the organization’s members in western and eastern Iraq.

ISIS: US Foot Soldiers in the Regional War

In a speech on 5 January, Hezbollah Secretary General Hassan Nasrallah warned that the US was supporting an ISIS revival in the region.

The Cradle obtained security information monitoring the new activity of extremists in Lebanon, communications between these elements and their counterparts in Iraq and Syria, and suspicious money transfer activities among them.

Lebanese Army Intelligence also recently arrested a group of Lebanese and Syrians who were preparing to carry out security operations.

Importantly, this surge in terror activities comes at a time when the Lebanese resistance is engaged in a security and military battle with Israel, which may expand at any moment into open war. It is also notable that renewed ISIS activity is concentrated in Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, and Iran; that is, in the countries that support the Palestinian resistance politically, militarily, and logistically.

On 4 January, ISIS officially claimed responsibility for two bombings in the Iranian city of Kerman that targeted memorial processions on the anniversary of the assassination of Quds Force Commander Qassem Soleimani by US forces. The dual explosions killed around 90 people and injured dozens, in an unprecedented attack targeting the biggest US-Israeli adversary in West Asia – just one day after Tel Aviv killed top Hamas leader Saleh al-Arouri in Beirut.

Before that, on 5 October 2023, ISIS drone-attacked an officers graduation ceremony at the Military College in the Syrian city of Homs, killing about 100 people. These attacks, and others in Iraq, Syria, Iran, Pakistan, Afghanistan, and Africa, indicate that fresh blood, money, and weapons are being pumped into the ISIS organization’s arteries again.

A high-ranking PMU officer, who asked to remain unnamed, tells The Cradle that US forces are preventing Iraqi forces from approaching Houran Valley by attacking any security forces approaching the area. “This happened when American aircraft targeted units of the PMU that were attacking ISIS in the region,” he reveals, citing intelligence reports confirming the presence of dozens of ISIS members and other extremist organizations in the valley, where they receive training and equipment from US forces.

Security sources in the Anbar Operations Command confirm this information:

“Noticeable activity by the organization had been recorded a few weeks ago in the west of the country. Near the Rutba desert, ISIS fighters were spotted digging underground hideouts. Information indicates that the organization is in the process of carrying out terrorist operations in many locations,” they tell The Cradle.

Concurrently, ISIS is expanding its operations in the east of Iraq, within the geographical triangle that includes eastern Salah al-Din Governorate, north-eastern Diyala, and southern Kirkuk, particularly in the geographically challenging Makhoul, Hamrin, Ghurra, Wadi al-Shay, and Zaghitoun areas.

It should be noted that US forces are deployed in Iraq under the umbrella of the International Coalition to Combat ISIS. Last week, four years after the Iraqi parliament first voted to expel foreign forces, Iraqi Prime Minister Mohammad Shia al-Sudani weighed in on the “destabilizing” impact of US troops and demanded a “quick and orderly” exit of those combat units. 

Washington not only countered by saying it has “no plans” to withdraw from Iraq, but announced on 14 January that it would be sending an additional 1,500 troops to Iraq and Syria illegally, and without the consent of either nation.

One irony here is that ISIS appears to regain momentum each and every time Baghdad raises the issue of US military withdrawal from Iraq. 

It can also no longer be seen as a coincidence that the terror group is now re-assembling its forces to target Washington and Tel Aviv’s most capable regional foes – the Axis of Resistance – just when the US and Israel are struggling to handle a region-wide, multi-front assault from the Axis. 

The extraordinary synergies between the Americans and the world’s foremost terror group can no longer be ignored: their targets are one and the same, and ISIS is only now entering the fray, just as Washington begins to lose its hold on West Asia.

*

Note to readers: Please click the share button above. Follow us on Instagram and Twitter and subscribe to our Telegram Channel. Feel free to repost and share widely Global Research articles.

Featured image is from The Cradle


America’s War on Terrorism

by Michel Chossudovsky

ISBN Number: 9780973714715

In this new and expanded edition of Michel Chossudovsky’s 2002 best seller, the author blows away the smokescreen put up by the mainstream media, that 9/11 was an attack on America by “Islamic terrorists”.  Through meticulous research, the author uncovers a military-intelligence ploy behind the September 11 attacks, and the cover-up and complicity of key members of the Bush Administration.

The expanded edition, which includes twelve new chapters focuses on the use of 9/11 as a pretext for the invasion and illegal occupation of Iraq, the militarisation of justice and law enforcement and the repeal of democracy.

According to Chossudovsky, the  “war on terrorism” is a complete fabrication based on the illusion that one man, Osama bin Laden, outwitted the $40 billion-a-year American intelligence apparatus. The “war on terrorism” is a war of conquest. Globalisation is the final march to the “New World Order”, dominated by Wall Street and the U.S. military-industrial complex.

September 11, 2001 provides a justification for waging a war without borders. Washington’s agenda consists in extending the frontiers of the American Empire to facilitate complete U.S. corporate control, while installing within America the institutions of the Homeland Security State.

Click here to purchase.

This Week’s Most Popular Articles

January 19th, 2024 by Global Research News

WEF – Davos 2024. The World Is Falling Apart But the Show Must Go On…

Peter Koenig, January 15, 2024

Evidence Relating to NASA Moon Landings, Unexplained Flaws: What Is Reality? What Is Illusion?

Mark Keenan, January 16, 2024

Expanding Middle East War. Planned US-Israeli Attack on Iran, The War on Energy, Strategic Waterways

Prof Michel Chossudovsky, January 15, 2024

Video: Archbishop Carlo Vigano. A False Pandemic and The Imposition of A False Vaccine. A Criminal Plan of World Depopulation

His Excellency Carlo Maria Viganò, January 11, 2024

Driving an Electric Car Is Fake Environmentalism – Elon Musk Debunked

Mark Keenan, January 15, 2024

5G Danger: 13 Reasons 5G Wireless Technology Will Be a Catastrophe for Humanity

Makia Freeman, January 14, 2024

The Criminalization of International Justice, Putting an End to the Genocide against the People of Palestine. Nuremberg Principle IV

Prof Michel Chossudovsky, January 17, 2024

Video: Vaccine Data – This Could Change Everything!

Russell Brand, January 14, 2024

Video: “Wiping Gaza Off The Map”: Big Money Agenda. Confiscating Palestine’s Maritime Natural Gas Reserves

Felicity Arbuthnot, December 31, 2023

Genocide Will Not Save Israel. Will the ICJ Save Gaza? Paul Larudee

Dr. Paul Larudee, January 12, 2024

Davos24 Bombshell Video: F**k You at the World Economic Forum (WEF)

Global Research News, January 17, 2024

Video: “Shot Dead”. The Movie They Don’t Want You to See. “Covid Shot Deaths Told by Parents who Lost their Children”

We The Patriots USA, January 16, 2024

US Escalates Two-front War on Serbia

Drago Bosnic, January 12, 2024

War Propaganda Intensifies as US Mainstream Media Calls for War on Iran to Stop the “Axis of Resistance”

Timothy Alexander Guzman, January 15, 2024

Johnson & Johnson to Acquire $2 Billion Drug Developer “Ambrx Biopharma” to Treat Turbo Cancers with Same Tech as Pfizer’s $43 Billion Seagen Acquisition

Dr. William Makis, January 17, 2024

What’s the Magic Number of Vaccines Needed for COVID?

Dr. Joseph Mercola, January 16, 2024

Video: The World Should be Ashamed. Genocide and the Criminalization of International Justice

International Court of Justice, January 17, 2024

RFK Jr.’s ‘Unconditional’ Support for Israel Is Costing His Campaign for President

Scott Horton, January 16, 2024

“Toxic by Design”: Researcher Explains How Big Pharma Vax Operation Shows Intent to Harm

Patrick Delaney, January 15, 2024

On the Need to Study “Zionist Power” as Integral to the Globalist Push for “Centralized Control of Everything”

Prof. Anthony J. Hall, January 13, 2024

“Building Trust”?: The World Economic Forum Is the West’s Perfect “White-Collar Euthanasia Agent”

By Peter Koenig, January 18, 2024

The World Economic Forum’s (WEF) motto for Davos24 (ongoing) is “Rebuilding Trust”. This is worse than a joke because what the WEF propagates openly – a Polygon Cyberattack, a not yet identified virus “X”, already somewhere out there (say Bill Gates and WHO’s Tedros), and more — as well as the untold secret behind closed-door topics, is anything but “Building Trust”.

Propaganda Surrounding JN.1 COVID Variant. The Fearmongering Heats Up

By Dr. William Makis, January 18, 2024

There is a desperation about the “JN.1” variant, by the COVID Cartel – it seems to be one last effort to scare substantial numbers of people into taking their COVID booster shots, before a probable “escalation”.

Zelensky Wants a “Peace Summit” to Which Russia Would Not be Invited

By Drago Bosnic, January 18, 2024

For all of human history, when two sides are in a conflict and one wants to initiate peace talks (common sense implies it’s usually the one that’s not exactly winning), the actual negotiations require both of the warring sides to be present. However, the era of the so-called post-truth also seems to be a time of “post-logic”, as the Kiev regime keeps insisting on a “peace summit” to which Russia wouldn’t be invited.

A Quiet Evil: The Destruction of Informed Consent. Shared Decision-Making Whereby Doctors Help Their Patients Regarding Options and Medical Treatment

By Dr. Emanuel Garcia, January 18, 2024

You will forgive me this preface as I alight on a matter that demonstrates with simple clarity a facet of the evil that has been visited upon us during the Corona War by an institution purporting to have as its charge the protection of the public weal in its regulation of medical practitioners: the infamous Medical Council of New Zealand.

“We Meant It”, No More Weapons: US Stresses There Is No Other Military Package for Ukraine

By Ahmed Adel, January 18, 2024

The White House strategic communications coordinator, John Kirby, at a time when Kiev insists that it needs more weapons to combat Russian forces, said once again that Washington has no more funds for Ukrainian troops and stressed that there is not another package “in the works right now.” His statement comes as the Ukrainian foreign minister attempts to manipulate Congress using a Russian disinformation narrative.

How the US Misleads the World About Its Involvement in Yemen. Scott Ritter

By Scott Ritter, January 18, 2024

British Foreign Minister David Cameron cited the UN Security Council in his justification of the UK’s involvement in the attacks on Yemen, claiming that the Council had “made clear” that the “Houthi must halt attacks in the Red Sea.”

21st Annual MLK Day Event Focused on Labor, Community and Palestinian Struggles

By Abayomi Azikiwe, January 18, 2024

Shawn Fain, President of the UAW International, noted during his major policy address at the 21st Annual Detroit MLK Day Rally that the labor movement and the struggle for civil rights remains at the center of change and transformation in the United States.

NYC Physician, Medical Student Speak on Gaza Genocide and Intimidation at Campuses and Workplaces

By Clara Weiss, January 18, 2024

The Gaza genocide has galvanized immense opposition among healthcare workers and students around the world. Despite freezing temperatures, thousands of people, including many healthcare workers, students and youth, joined a rally in Union Square, Manhattan on Monday to protest against the genocide in Gaza.

Philippines Pushing China’s Limits in South China Sea

By Richard Javad Heydarian, January 18, 2024

The Filipino military chief has announced new plans for massive construction activities across all Philippine-claimed land features in the South China Sea, a move that promises to intensify already hot tensions with China over contested territories.

Gaza Will be the Grave of the Western-led World Order

By Prof. Saul J Takahashi, January 18, 2024

No matter how it concludes, South Africa’s lawsuit in the International Court of Justice arguing Israel has violated the Genocide Convention will go down in history. It will either be remembered as the first step towards finally holding a rogue state accountable for repeated, longstanding violations of international law; or as the last, dying breath of a dysfunctional, Western-led international system.